Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
1. Which address for an account should be used when processing 1099s? BCS (Client) The account’s address (delivery carrier address) or billing address can print on 1099 forms, based on this parameter.
Account Address
The delivery carrier’s address should be used for 1099 forms.
Billing Address
The bill-to address for the account should be used for 1099 forms.
2. Should aging be based on days past due, billing periods past due or aging periods past due? BCS (Client) Aging of balances may be based on days past due, billing periods past due, or the Aging Calendar. If aging is based on days past due, the headers on the three aging columns will be based on the number of days defined in Age Period. If aging is based on billing periods past due or the Aging Calendar, the headers on the three aging columns will read Period 1, Period 2, and Period 3 as defined in the Statement Calendar or Aging Calendar, respectively.
Aging Calendar
If aging should be based on the days set up in the Aging Calendar.
Periods
If aging should be based on billing periods, as defined in the Statement Calendar.
Days
If aging should be based on a combination of Terms setup and Age Period setup. The due number days or due date of month fields in Terms setup determine when an account is moved from the current period to the first aging period. Age Period setup then determines how long each aging period lasts.
3. Should credit memos and unapplied payments be aged? BCS (Client) Credit memos are credit invoices that are created during account bill processing (usually when the office pay credit exceeds the draw charge). Unapplied payments are account payments that are not applied to an invoice. These two types of credit can be aged, or they can appear perpetually in the current aging period until they are applied.
Yes
If credit memos and unapplied payments should be aged.
No
If credit memos and unapplied payments should stay in the current aging period until they are applied.
4. Should an invoice number be created when the net of the current charges is zero? (NCS) An invoice number may be assigned to invoices with a net of zero, based on this parameter.
Yes
An invoice number will be assigned to zero-net invoices.
No
Zero-net invoices will not be assigned invoice numbers.
5. Should unapplied payments and/or credit memos automatically be applied during billing? BCS (Client) Unapplied payments and/or credit memos are typically overpayments made by carriers or dealers. Therefore, there is no invoice to which to apply the payment. These unapplied payments may be applied automatically during the billing process. After invoices are created by account billing processing, unapplied payments and credit memos may be applied. When automatically applied, unapplied payments and credit memos are applied to the oldest invoices available.
Both
Unapplied payments and credit memos should be applied automatically during account billing processing.
Credit Memos
Only credit memos should be applied automatically.
Neither
Neither unapplied payments nor credit memos should be applied automatically.
Unapplied Payments
Only unapplied payments should be applied automatically.
6. Are home delivery routes billed using period or copy rates? BCS (Client) The draw charges for home delivery routes may be calculated using either a rate based on the average draw in the billing period, or a rate per paper.
Copy
If home delivery routes are billed using rates per individual copy.
Period
If home delivery routes are billed a rate defined for the billing period. The average draw for the billing period is calculated and then multiplied by the period rate.
7. Are home delivery routes billed using the bill source Business Rule or a publication using period or copy rates? BCP (Client) Valid settings are “Bill Source” (the default), “Copy,” and “Period.”
8. Are single copy routes billed using period or copy rates? BCS (Client) As with home delivery routes, the draw charges for single copy routes may be calculated using either a billing period rate or a per paper rate.
Copy
If single copy routes are billed using rates per individual copy.
Period
If single copy routes are billed using a rate defined for the billing period. The average draw for the billing period is calculated and then multiplied by the period rate.
9. Are single copy routes billed using the bill source Business Rule or a publication using period or copy rates? BCP (Client) Valid settings are “Bill Source” (the default), “Copy,” and “Period.”
10. Do period rates vary by weekday within a delivery schedule? B (Client) You can choose give your carrier/dealers only one rate for each delivery schedule for a whole period. For example, you may charge them 5.00 a month for seven day subscriptions, 4.00 for Monday - Friday subscriptions, and 3.00 for Saturday - Sunday subscriptions. Likewise, if you period rate single copy routes (where delivery schedules do not apply) you may have only one rate, such as 3.50 per average copy per month. Alternatively, you may break each day of the week out, and charge (for example) 4.00 per subscription for all Sundays in the month, and 1.50 per subscription for all Mondays, 1.50 for all Tuesdays, etc. In this case, the rate varies by day of week. If you period rate and do vary draw charges and credits by day of the week, set this rule to “yes.” Otherwise set it to “no.”
Yes
Period rates can vary by day of the week within the same delivery schedule.
No
Period rates do not, within a given delivery schedule, vary by day of week.
11. When charges are created for draw, returns and draw adjustments should the rate code be set? BCS (Client) When creating charges records for draw, returns, and draw adjustments, this setting determines whether the account’s rate code should be updated. If you need to include an account’s rate code in either the Statement Export or the Account Invoice Export, then you will need to set this to “yes” in order to have that data available. The default is “no”.
12. When charges are created for home delivery draw and draw adjustments should the billing method be set? BCS (Client) When creating charges records for home delivery draw and draw adjustments, this setting determines whether the account’s billing method should be included in the Invoice Export. The default setting is “no.”
13. When charges are created for home delivery draw and draw adjustments should the subscriber rate code be set? BCS (Client) When creating charges records for home delivery draw and draw adjustments, this setting determines whether the subscriber’s rate code should be included in the Invoice Export. The default setting is “no.” Note: To include the subscriber’s rate code in the Invoice Export, the following additional Business Rules must also be set to “yes”: Should draw be stored at the rate code level? and Do you store draw quantities at the rate code level for Account Billing?
14. What level of summarization should be used when creating charges for draw, returns and draw adjustments? BCS (Client)
Billing Date
Draw charges are created for the billing date.
Draw Date
Draw charges are created for each draw date processed.
15. When charges are created for returns, should they also be summarized by batch? BCS (Client) This setting allows the returns batch to be included in the summary for returns during billing. The default is “no.”
16. At what level of detail should transactions be created for the general ledger? BCS (Client) When transactions are prepared by account billing for transfer to the general ledger, full transaction detail may be retained, partial transaction detail may be retained in summary form, or only the account number to which the transaction will be posted may be retained. Storing complete transaction detail will require additional disk space on your computer.
Account
If transaction detail should be summarized to the individual carrier’s account level. Multiple charges for a single account that affect the same general ledger account will be combined to create a single general ledger transaction. The Memo field will contain information about where the individual carrier transaction came from.
Full Detail
If each charge that appears on each account bill should cause a general ledger transaction to be created.
Summary
If transaction detail should be created to include all charges for all accounts in a billing run, combined and summarized based only on the general ledger account number.
17. What is the length in lines for a deposit slip? BCS (Client) A deposit slip is a document given to the carrier/dealer to deposit money directly into the newspaper’s bank account. The number of lines that should print on a deposit slip is user-defined. Enter the number of lines from one deposit slip to the next deposit slip. There are six lines per inch, vertically. The default value is 20 lines.
18. On what line of the deposit slip should printing begin? BCS (Client) When the deposit slip is printed, printing will begin on the line specified. There are six lines per inch, vertically. The default is line 2.
19. What is the starting print position of the deposit slip? BCS (Client) When the deposit slip is printed, printing will begin in the print position specified. There are 10 characters per inch horizontally if the printer is set to 10 pitch. The default is position (character) 6.
20. What type of finance charge is applied to past due account balances? BCS (Client) Finance charges may be charged to accounts in one of two methods, as a flat amount or percentage.
None
If accounts should not be finance charged.
Flat Amount
If accounts should be charged a flat amount of finance charge.
Percentage
If accounts should be charged a percentage of the past due balance as the finance charge.
If Flat Amount:
21. What is the finance charge amount to be charged to accounts with past due balances? BCS (Client) If the flat amount option is selected for finance charging, define the flat amount to charge. The default value is 5.00.
If Percentage:
22. What is the finance charge percentage applied to past due account balances (per billing period)? BCS (Client) If the percentage option is selected for finance charging, define the percentage which will be calculated on the past due balance. The default value is 1.5%. Enter 2% as 2.00.
23. What is the minimum finance charge amount? BCS (Client) If the percentage option is selected for finance charging, then a minimum finance charge amount may be charged to the account. For example, if the finance charge calculated on the past due balance is 1.30 and the minimum finance charge is 1.50, the account will be charged 1.50. The default minimum finance charge amount is 1.00.
24. What is the cutoff finance charge amount determining whether or not to charge a finance charge? BCS (Client) If the finance charge is below this cutoff, no finance charge at all will be applied. For example, if the cutoff is 1.20, and the finance charge for an account turned out to be 1.00, no finance charges would be applied to that carrier’s account. If the finance charge was 1.50, however, the charge would be applied. The default is 0. Note that a cutoff amount will overrule a minimum finance charge. For example, if the cutoff is 1.20 and the minimum is 1.50, all charges below 1.20 will be dropped, and all charges between 1.20 and 1.50 will be applied as 1.50.
25. Which charge code should be used for finance charges? BCS (Client) This is the charge code to be used for the finance charges calculated. The finance charge will print as a separate item on the invoice. The charge code will define the general ledger account to be updated.
26. What is the most recent age period for which a finance charge should be applied? BCS (Client) This defines the first past due age category which should be used when calculating the finance charge. The age period amounts starting with the age period selected plus all age periods greater than the starting period will be added together to determine the total past due amount to be finance charged.
1
The first age period is the first past due age category to be considered for finance charging.
2
The second age period is the first past due age category to be considered for finance charging.
3
The third age period is the first past due age category to be considered for finance charging.
4
The fourth age period is the first past due age category to be considered for finance charging.
27. By what factor should the account’s rate be multiplied to calculate the initial bond deposit? BCS (Client) A bond letter may be printed creating the bond deposit requirement for the account based on the carrier collect draw times the wholesale rate. If the rate should be increased by a factor, enter the factor to multiply the rate by. The default is 1.00.
28. Do you use minimum daily draw charges? BCP (Client) Minimum daily draw charges (also called service charges) define a minimum amount an account can be charged for draw on a given delivery day. For example, if the minimum charge is 1.00 and the account delivered only 4 papers at 0.20 each, the account would be charged 1.00, not 0.80. The minimum charge will be assessed on a per account basis, not on a route basis. The combined draw charges for all routes billed to an account will be used to determine if the minimum charge has been met based on the net draw charges for each day within the billing period. Minimum daily draw charges will be created as miscellaneous charges calculated as the difference between the minimum charge and the net draw charges. The minimum daily draw charge may be defined for each carrier account.
Yes
Minimum daily draw charges are defined for carrier accounts.
No
Minimum daily draw charges are not defined for carrier accounts.
If Yes:
29. Which charge code should be used for the minimum daily draw service charges? BCS (Client) Enter the charge code used for the service charges for each day that the net draw charge is less than the minimum draw charge.
30. Are minimum daily draw credits issued? BCP (Client) To guarantee that selected accounts receive a minimum wage for delivery, you can define a minimum daily draw credit for each product, account, and route combination when creating a new carrier account. Note: This functionality can be used only with per-piece rating, not period rating.
Yes
Minimum daily draw credits can be issued for carrier accounts.
No
Minimum daily draw charges may not be defined for carrier accounts.
31. Which charge code should be used for minimum daily draw credits? BCP (Client) If you define minimum daily draw credits for carrier accounts, indicate here which charge code should be used for the credits.
32. When showing draw charges and credits should they be combined as defined in ChargeCodeCombine? BCP (Client) This setting controls whether draw charges and credits should be combined (as defined in Setup | Accounting | Charge/Credit Code | Specifics | Charge Code Combine) for reporting purposes on invoices. The default setting is “no.”
33. When showing the drop credits should they be combined with the draw charges/credits? BCS (Client) This setting controls whether drop credits are included in their own section on invoices or combined with draw credits. Set this Business Rule to “no” (the default) if you want drop credits included in a separate section.
34. Should interest calculation include any previously created interest that has not yet been billed? BCS (Client) During interest calculation, interest is calculated on current recurring charge balance(s). Any previously calculated interest that has not yet been billed can be compounded into this calculation.
Yes
The previously created interest should also be compounded into this interest calculation.
No
The previously created interest should not be compounded into this interest calculation.
35. Should interest calculation include the current recurring charge amount for the billing period? BCS (Client) The recurring charge amount which will be included on the bill in the next billing period may be included in this interest calculation. For example, if the bond balance is 100.00 and a 10.00 charge will be included on the next bill, should interest be calculated on 100.00 or 110.00?
Yes
The recurring charge for this billing period should be included in this interest calculation.
No
The recurring charge for this billing period should not be included in this interest calculation.
36. Should interest calculation include unbilled miscellaneous charges that update the recurring charge code balance? BCS (Client) During interest calculation, interest is calculated on current recurring charge balance(s). Interest can also be calculated on any miscellaneous charges that “update” the balance of the recurring charge. For example, you may set up a charge code of “bondtsfr” that increases a “bond” recurring charge balance. You can include any unbilled “interest” charges in the interest calculation for the “bond” recurring charge balance.
Yes
The unbilled miscellaneous charges should be included in this interest calculation.
No
The unbilled miscellaneous charges should not be included in this interest calculation.
37. Should interest calculation include unbilled miscellaneous credits that update the recurring charge code balance? BCS (Client) During interest calculation, interest is calculated on current recurring charge balances. Interest can also be calculated on any miscellaneous credits that decrease the balance of the recurring charge. For example, you may set up a charge code of “bondwthd” that allows the account to withdraw from their “bond” recurring charge balance, and you can include any unbilled “bondwthd” credits in the interest calculation for the “bond” recurring charge balance.
Yes
The unbilled miscellaneous charges should be included in this interest calculation.
No
The unbilled miscellaneous charges should not be included in this interest calculation.
38. What is the default GL Account for creating vendors in the MediaPlus AP system? BCS (Client) Enter the general ledger account that will default in the A/P Clearing Account in the Interface to A/P. This account number should be a clearing account.
39. Should advance charges (estimated charges for the next billing period) be included in A/R and distributed to G/L? BCS (Client) Carrier/dealers can be charged in advance—draw and other charges are estimated for the next period, and the account bill contains this amount. At the next billing run, when actual figures are available, the advance charges are reversed out and the real charges applied. This setting defines whether the (estimated) advance charges and subsequent reversal are recorded in the general ledger and included in the individual account balances as reported by aging.
Yes
Advance charges should be distributed to the general ledger and included in the aging totals.
No
Advance charges should not be recorded in the general ledger or included in the aging totals.
40. What amount must the net charges and credits on the account’s invoice be greater than to qualify for a discount? BCS (Client) Prompt pay discounts may be given to carrier/dealers. If the account has a credit balance, the discount may or may not be awarded.
No Amount
The discount will be awarded regardless of the carrier/dealer’s net charges or credits.
Discount Amount
If the carrier/dealer has a net credit, or if the net charges are less than the discount amount for that carrier/dealer, the discount will not be awarded. This situation may occur when the discount is based on a percentage of the draw charges instead of the net charges and credits.
Zero
If the carrier/dealer has a net credit, the discount will not be applied.
41. Which address should be used for determining an account’s taxability? BCS (Client) Taxes are assigned according to geographical area (city, county, state, and country). This setting defines which address should be looked at when assigning taxes to carrier/dealer accounts. This becomes important when, for example, a publication has carriers delivering in a different state.
Account
The carrier’s home address will be used when determining taxes.
Publication
The publication’s address will be used when determining taxes.
Route
The route location will determine taxability, using the city, county, state and country entered for the route during route setup. If you select this setting, you will be prompted about running a tool—the tool can set up the city, county, state and country for each route, if this information has not already been set up.
42. At what level should taxes be calculated for bill-to accounts that are billed for multiple routes? BCS (Client) This setting allows you to calculate taxes for bill-to accounts at the account or the route level.
Route
Taxes will be totaled at the route level for each route associated with the bill-to account.
Account
Taxes will be totaled at the account level (i.e., include all routes).
43. When should rounding occur when calculating taxes in Account Billing? BCP (Client) This setting determines where the rounding of tax amounts occurs in account billing.
Total
Taxes are calculated to 6 digits following a decimal point.
Detail
Taxes are calculated to 2 digits following a decimal point.
44. Should advance charges and advance charge reversals be included in the amount account discounts are based upon? BCS (Client) Prompt pay discounts may be calculated as a percentage of the bill. This setting determines whether advance charges and reversals are taken into consideration when calculating discounts. For example, if a carrier has an advanced draw charge for 100.00 and a reversal (the previous month’s advanced draw charge) for 80.00, this setting determines whether the 20.00 difference is considered when calculating the discount amount.
Yes
Advanced charges and reversals should be considered when calculating prompt pay discounts.
No
Advanced charges and reversals should not be considered when calculating prompt pay discounts.
45. Allow account based billing runs to be closed? BC (Client) Billing runs for selected accounts may be necessary to produce a bill for a carrier who, for example, leaves in the middle of the month. They are also convenient for testing, because they take little time to process and may be processed before the normal billing cycle. In the case where you are simply testing rates or printing a memo bill, the billing should be undone rather than closing it.
Yes
Allow selected account billing runs to be closed.
No
Do not allow selected account billing runs to be closed.
46. To which system should account credit balances be interfaced? BC (Client) Note: Each of the interfaces to AP require a separate license fee to use. Contact the Naviga Support Center for more information. Carriers typically have credit balances when most of their subscribers are office pay (i.e., they pay the newspaper rather than the carrier). These credits need to be interfaced to an Accounts Payable system so a check can be written. Usually, the interface is done automatically using an ASCII file (created in Accounting | AP/Direct Deposit | Interface To AP), but credits can also be entered manually into the AP system.
BACS
The credits will be automatically interfaced via an ASCII file in the BACS format.
Compu-Share
The credits will be automatically interfaced via an ASCII file in the Compu-Share format.
Dunn and Bradstreet
The credits will be automatically interfaced via an ASCII file in the Dunn and Bradstreet format.
Great Plains
The credits will be automatically interfaced via an ASCII file in the Great Plains format. This is a licensed add-on option.
Lawson
The credits will be automatically interfaced via an ASCII file in the Lawson format. This is a licensed add-on option.
None
No ASCII file will be created. Account credits will manually be entered into the AP system.
DTI Standard
The credits will be automatically interfaced via an ASCII file in the DTI standard format. If you have SBS, you should use this format.
PeopleSoft II
The credits will be automatically interfaced via an ASCII file in the PeopleSoft format.
PeopleSoft3
The credits will be automatically interfaced via an ASCII file in the PeopleSoft format with expanded record layouts.
47. What is the origin code for accounts when interfacing to the PeopleSoft accounting system? BC (Client) If you use the PeopleSoft3 file format, this setting populates the Origin field in the voucher file when using Interface to AP.
48. What is the default name for the credit balance file? BC (Client)
This Rule allows you to set the default name of the AP Interface file. The default is apcheck.d
.
49. Should account AP export create separate files by company? B (Client)
This setting allows you to create direct deposit and A/P interface files that include the company as part of the export file name. The direct deposit file is depositXXXX999999-999,
and the A/P Interface file is apcheckXXXX.d,
where XXXX is the company, 999999 is the date, and -999 is a sequence.
Yes
Include the company in the file name for direct deposit and A/P interface files.
No
Do not include the company name.
50. Should existing PeopleSoft interface files be appended to or renamed with a sequence? B (Client)
When running the Interface to AP using the PeopleSoft 3 format, if a voucher file exists in the dti/exchange/cm/secure
directory, the file can be appended, rather than renaming the existing file with a sequence number and creating a new file with the default file name. For example, if the Business Rule What is the default name for the credit balance file? is set to “apcheck.d”, and this parameter is set to “Sequence” (the default answer), the existing file will be renamed apcheck.d.0001 (if a file with that name does not already exist) and a new apcheck.d file will be created. If this parameter is set to “Append”, the existing apcheck.d file will simply be appended with the new credit information.
Append
PeopleSoft interface files should be appended.
Sequence
PeopleSoft interface files should be renamed with a sequence, if the file already exists.
51. To which system should account mid-month payments be interfaced? B (Client) The Midmonth Payment option allows recurring account credits to be interfaced in between billing periods. This setting determines what format is used in the export—DTI Standard or Dunn and Bradstreet.
Dunn and Bradstreet
The midmonth credits should be interfaced in the Dunn and Bradstreet format.
Lawson
The midmonth credits should be interfaced in the Lawson format. This is a licensed option.
DTI Standard
The midmonth credits should be interfaced in the DTI Standard format.
52. If the Dunn & Bradstreet format is used for AP, should the Account ID or Zone ID display in the vendor address line 1? B (Client) Line 1 of the vendor address may contain the account’s ID or distribution zone, based on this setting.
Account ID
The carrier’s account ID should be exported as the vendor address line 1.
Zone ID
The distribution zone ID for the carrier’s primary route should be exported as the vendor address line 1.
53. Will multiple accounts be billed for the same draw? BC (Client) Some newspapers may bill more than one account for the same draw. For example, if an agent manages a route, both the agent and the delivery carrier might be charged and credited (at different rates) for the draw of the route. If your newspaper allows multiple account billing for the same draw, enter “yes” here.
Yes
Multiple accounts may be billed for the same draw.
No
Only one account will be billed for any given draw.
54. Should draw be stored at the rate code level? BCP (Client) You can set up account rates so that they vary based on the rates for the subscribers being delivered. For example, if a carrier collect subscriber is receiving a promotional rate, you may want to give the carrier a lower rate as well (because he or she will be collecting less money). If your account rates vary based on your subscriber rates, it will be necessary to store draw at a rate code level. Draw will also need to be stored at the rate code level for AAM reports, if you use AAM price levels. If account rates are independent of subscriber rates and you do not use price levels, storing draw at the rate code level is not necessary, and less draw information will need to be kept—this will save disk space and may improve performance time for some reports.
Yes
Draw should be stored at a rate code level, so accounts can be rated based on the rates of their subscribers.
No
Draw should not be stored at the rate code level.
If Yes:
55. Do you store draw quantities at the rate code level for Account Billing? BCP (Client) This setting determines whether account billing should use draw stored at the subscriber rate code level. For example, if a site keeps draw at the rate code level for AAM purposes but does not have account rates defined by subscriber rate code, they might want to set this rule to “no”.
Yes
Account billing will use draw stored at a rate code level.
No
Account billing will not use draw stored at the rate code level.
56. Are carrier collect invoices produced? BCP (Client) Circulation can create invoices for carrier collect subscribers. The invoices are typically handed to the carriers, and indicate how much money should be collected from each collect subscriber. This setting determines whether some setup fields related to carrier collect invoices will be active or inactive.
Yes
Carrier collect invoices will be produced.
No
Carrier collect invoices will not be produced.
57. Which TM product should be used to credit/charge accounts for previous paper deliveries? BCP (Client) Newspapers may offer new subscribers or restarts a previous day’s paper for free. For example, the previous Sunday’s paper may be offered to a subscriber who starts on a Wednesday, and be delivered with the Wednesday paper. Carriers can be credited for delivering previous papers via a TM product. If you will use a TM product, enter the product ID here. The delivery credits will be created just as with any other TM product, only in this case the draw will be the number of previous deliveries on the route. If your newspaper does not do previous deliveries, leave this and the following rule blank.
58. Which draw adjust code should be used when updating draw for previous paper deliveries? BCP (Client) In previous delivery situations (see the Business Rule above), a draw change is made to the route for the day of the previous paper. This setting determines the charge code that will be used with the draw adjustment. So, for example, if the previous Sunday paper is delivered to a subscription when it starts on Wednesday, a draw adjustment will be made to the route’s Sunday draw. Note: this draw adjust code should be one that has Charge Account set to “n” (see Draw Adjustment for more information).
59. Which draw adjust code should be used when updating draw for bonus day transactions processed after the bonus date? BCP (Client) Bonus day transactions may sometimes be processed after the bonus day. If this happens, a suspended draw adjust batch will be created to adjust the route’s draw. This setting determines the draw adjust code that will be used with the batch.
60. Should the charge/credit amount default from the previous charge/credit in Miscellaneous Charges and Credits Batch? BCS (Client) When entering a batch of miscellaneous charges and credits for accounts, this setting determines whether the charge or credit amount defaults from the previous entry. For example, if a 5.00 charge is entered for an account, and this rule is set to “yes”, when the next charge is entered, the amount will default to 5.00. If this rule is set to “no”, no amount will default.
Yes
The charge or credit amount should default from the previous charge or credit entered.
No
No amount should default when entering miscellaneous charges and credits.
61. Should the charge code default from the previous entry or the batch header in Miscellaneous Charge/Credit entry? BCP (Client) When entering a batch of miscellaneous charges and credits for accounts, this setting determines whether the charge code will default from the previous entry in the batch, or from the charge code entered on the batch header screen.
Previous Entry
The charge code will default from the previous entry in the batch.
Batch Header
The charge code will default from the batch header screen.
62. Are multiple substitute accounts allowed for a single day for a publication and route? BCP (Client) Circulation allows substitutes carriers to be assigned to routes when the regular carrier is absent for some reason, such as a vacation. You may or may not allow multiple substitutes to deliver a single route at the same time.
Yes
Multiple substitute carriers may deliver a route at the same time.
No
Multiple substitute carriers are not allowed.
If Yes:
63. How should multiple substitutes be rated? B (Client) This setting applies to routes that have “split substitutes”, where more than one substitute delivers the route on the same days. In this scenario, the draw is split among the substitutes in Distribution | Account Setup | Substitute Draw. When the draw is billed, it can either use the regular account rate or a special substitute rate set up for split substitutes, depending on how this rule is set. If the regular account rate is used, the account information for the regular delivery carrier will be used to rate the draw; if the substitute rate is used, the substitute carrier’s info will be used. If you select “regular carrier rate”, be sure that you have account rates set up with a “*” in Delivery Schedule, Draw Type, and Rate Code, because split substitute draw will not have a value for any of these fields.
Regular Carrier Rate
The regular delivery carrier’s rate will be used to rate draw for multiple substitutes.
Substitute Rate
A special substitute rate will be defined for rating draw for multiple substitutes.
64. Do you allow entry of miscellaneous charges/credits for end dated accounts? BCP (Client) If a carrier is no longer billed for a route, you may or may not be able to enter miscellaneous charges and credits for the account and route, depending on this setting.
Yes
Miscellaneous charges/credits can be entered for end dated accounts.
No
Miscellaneous charges/credits can no longer be entered if a carrier stops delivering a route.
65. Do you allow entry of donations for end dated accounts? BCP (Client) If a carrier is no longer billed for a route, you may or may not be able to enter donations for the carrier and route, depending on this setting.
Yes
Donations can be entered for end dated carriers.
No
Donations can no longer be entered if a carrier stops delivering a route.
66. Should insert bonuses be reversed for returns/draw adjustments? BCP (Client) Carriers and dealers can receive a bonus for delivering inserts based on the weight of the paper, the number of inserts, or as a per-insert credit. This setting controls whether bonusing is affected by returns and draw adjustments.
Yes
Bonuses will be reversed out for returned copies or negative draw adjustments, and added for positive draw adjustments.
No
Draw adjustments and returns will be ignored by bonusing.
67. Can billing runs be started if there are suspended payment, charge, or draw adjustment batches? B (Client) Circulation can disallow billing runs from being started if there are suspended batches of account payments, miscellaneous charges, returns or draw adjustments, as governed by this setting. If this setting is “yes”, users will still be prompted that there are suspended batches for the billing period, but they will be allowed to continue and start the billing run.
Yes
Billing runs can be started, even if there are suspended batches.
No
A billing run can only be started if there are no suspended payment, miscellaneous charge, or draw adjustment batches.
68. When running account billing selection should it be required that tran processing be completed through the billing date? BCS (Client) This setting determines whether Transaction Processing must be completed through the billing date before Account Billing Selection can be run. The default is setting is “yes.”
69. Should transportation costs be excluded? S (Client) Some states allow tax on transportation costs (the credit to the account for delivering the paper) to be deducted from subscriber taxes by the newspaper. Transportation costs are calculated by Trans Exclusion during the account billing run. This rule determines whether Trans Exclusion should be part of the account billing process. If it is set to “yes”, Trans Exclusion must be run after invoices, deposit slips, or the billing journal, and before the run is closed.
Yes
Trans Exclusion should be a step in the account billing run.
No
The transportation exclusion does not need to be calculated.
70. Are laser forms being used to print 1099s? BC (Client) This and the following setting are no longer used, as 1099 form information is exported to a file rather than generating the actual forms.
71. Which format should be used to print 1099 laser forms? BC (Client)
72. When redelivery is not available for a shortage, should a draw adjustment be created? BCP (Client) The Dispatch Shortages? field on the single copy publication setup screen (Setup | Distribution | Route | Single Copy Route | Specifics | Single Copy Publ) allows you to created a draw adjustment for a shortage amount when redelivery is not available for the route. All of the adjustments for each day/product combination will be placed in the same suspended batch. This Business Rule must be set to “yes” in order to create a draw adjustment.
Yes
A draw adjustment will be created in this circumstance.
No
A draw adjustment will not be created.
73. When a shortage has not been complied with, should a draw adjustment be created? BCP (Client) When a shortage has been dispatched, but the redelivery is non-compliant (i.e., is too late or does not happen at all), a draw adjustment can be created for the non-compliant deliveries, so that the carrier is not charged for papers that were not received. When this Business Rule is set to “yes”, a draw adjustment will be created for non-compliant shortage dispatches. Note that, if this Business Rule is set to “yes”, the Business Rule, When redelivery is not available for a shortage, should a draw adjustment be created?, must also be set to “yes”.
Yes
A draw adjustment will be created in this circumstance.
No
A draw adjustment will not be created in this circumstance.
74. Which adjust code should be used for draw adjustments that are created for shortages? BCP (Client) This setting determines the adjustment code assigned to the shortages described above. If you set the above Business Rule to “yes”, you must enter an adjustment code here.
75. Which other name usage should print when printing other name? BCS (Client) This setting allows you to define the other name usage for accounts displayed in Route Service (typically, the company name). For example, if an account’s other name usage is set to “company”, and you enter “company” here, the account’s company name will be displayed on the first line of the address in Route Service. Available settings are defined in Setup.
76. Should the bank draft process use the balance of open items through the cutoff date rather than the aged balance? BC (Client) When running Bank Draft Payments, this setting allows you to (if “yes”) accumulate the balance of all open items with an invoice date that is less than or equal to the cutoff date, rather than calculating the aged balance. The default is “no.”
77. Should memo bills appear before or after the invoice? BCS (Client)
Before
Memo bills will appear before the invoice.
After
Memo bills will appear after the invoice.
78. When creating memo bills display truck, sequence, depot of the route on the memo rather than the parent invoice? BCS (Client) This setting allows memo bills to display the truck information based on the route and product being processed (when set to “yes”). When set to “no” (the default), memo bills will continue to display the truck information of the billing account.
79. When producing memo bills what sort order should be used? BCS (Client) This setting allows you to set the sort order of memo bills. The setting can be any valid sort order or “Sort Order” (to use the sort order entered at runtime). The default setting is “Account,” which is the standard sort order. The sort order will apply to invoices, journals, and the invoice export.
80. When processing TM credits and adjustments should the TM product be stored in the charges remarks? BCS (Client) Select “yes” if you want the targeted marketing product ID to be included in the remarks of the charges record. The default is “No.”
81. When determining the GL account for complaint charges use ComplaintInfo first? BC (Client) When this rule is set to “yes” (the default), the system will attempt to find the GL account for complaint charges in the ComplaintInfo record. If it is set to “No,” the system will look in the Charge Code record instead.
82. Should returns and adjustments entered after the billing period be included on the same invoice as the draw? CS (Client) This allows returns and adjustments that are entered after billing cutoff date, but before billing is run, to be included in the billing if this Business Rule is set to yes. The default is No. This Business Rule only affects Single Copy; it will not affect Home Delivery or TM product returns.
83. Should billing date or transaction date be used for determining taxing? Default Value: Billing Date This setting determines whether the billing or transaction dates should be utilized for taxing.
84. What should display for an override label in account billing for Invoice Date and Bill Date? This BR allows you to modify the label that is displayed in account billing, such as in printed invoices and invoice export.
85. Should Draws and Draw Adjustments be billed based on End Publishing run or Final Tran Processing? Default Value: Final Tran Processing
When the value is set to “End Publication Run,” the Draws and Draw Adjustments will be billed if the publishing day has been processed through End Publishing Run.
If the value is set to “Final Tran Processing,” the Draws and Draw Adjustments will be billed for a day that has been processed through Final Transaction Processing.
Business Rules are established to control certain aspects of your software. In addition to many other areas, Business Rules affect:
Which fields are active for data entry
Which fields are required for data entry
Default values
Label sizing
Renewal notice formats
Bundle top parameters
Business Rules can be established at the business, company, publication, bill source, and user division levels.
The business-company-publication hierarchy represents a business structure: there is only one business, which owns one or more companies. Each of these companies owns or operates one or more publications. Business Rules set at one level affect all entities below that level in the business structure, as illustrated in the following diagram.
Any of these three entities can decide what the Business Rules are. Many organizations take a strict approach and enforce one set of Business Rules identically across all companies and publications. These organizations set their Business Rules at the business level, and everyone operates in exactly the same way no matter how many companies or publications the business operates. Some organizations need more flexibility, which usually reflects local market conditions. They allow companies and publications to make their own decisions about how to operate their enterprise.
Some Business Rules may also be established at the billing source, user division, and deliverable levels. The first task in establishing Business Rules is to determine the role of the levels in how the rules are administered.
Note: Not all Business Rules can be set at all levels. Most settings do not allow entry at the bill source or user division levels.
You create billing sources in order to govern a whole host of account finance issues, including finance charges, whether unapplied payments are applied automatically during billing, which default sort sequence is used for printing account invoices, and what appears on them. The billing source, therefore, is your means to “program in” the flexibility you need to handle billing-related issues.
For example, suppose your newspaper bills the single copy outlets (dealers) weekly and home delivery routes monthly and the finance charge options vary between the two groups:
How frequently to bill: How often will these distribution points be billed? For example, you may decide to bill single copy outlets more frequently in order to avoid large balance amounts at the single copy outlets.
What is the most current age period for which a finance charge should be applied: Which past-due aging period should the finance charge amount use for calculations? For example, you may decide to finance charge single copy outlets on all past-due balances, but finance charge home delivery routes on the fourth aging period balance.
The following table summarizes the different billing requirements for these distribution points.
Dealers
Billing Frequency
Once per week
Age period for finance charge
1
Home Delivery
Billing Frequency
Once per month
Age period for finance charge
4
Define two billing sources (weekly and monthly, for example) by selecting Setup | Accounting | Account Billing | Bill Source and following the instructions for this menu option in the Setup Manual.
Specify how frequently bills are sent by defining statement periods for each billing source. Do this by selecting Setup | Accounting | Account Billing | Statement Calendar and following the instructions for this menu option in the Setup Manual. Note that Business Rules play no role in this step.
Specify that the decision to define the age period for finance charge calculation will be made for each billing source individually. Do this by going into Rules and entering the applicable settings (highlighted below) to “BillSource”. Then, for each billing source, specify which age period to use for finance charge calculations.
The Business Rules are presented as questions along with the levels at which they can be set: B = business, C
= company, P
= publication, S
= bill source, D
= deliverable, and Dv
= division. Following the levels will be the Cloud configurable setting for the Business Rule. This can be:
Client. Cloud clients can configure the Business Rule.
NCS. Clients cannot configure the Business Rule, but Naviga Support can change the configuration, if needed.
Non. The Business Rule is not configurable for Cloud sites.
For example, the Business Rule...Which day(s) of the week must be reported separately to AAM?
BCP
(Client)
…can be set at the business, company, or publication level, and can be configured by Cloud clients.
Below the Business Rule question the parameter is described, and valid answers, if applicable, are listed. Default answers are in bold. If the Cloud default is different than the on-premises default, the Cloud default will be in bold and the on-premises default will be noted in that answer.
Many settings are “self-contained” in the sense that your response to them does not affect how you set other Business Rules. In some cases, however, how you set rule A affects whether and how you set rule B. In this case, we say that rules are “nested.”
The answers to certain Business Rules that pertain to credit card information (user names, passwords, etc.) are encrypted once they are entered. To view the encrypted answer in the Business Rules or on the Business Rules Settings report, you must be logged in with a user ID that has access to the transaction security ID “BusRuleEncrypt.” See Transaction Security for more information.
There are three types of settings for Business Rules:
Yes/no
Multiple choice
Fill in the blank
In character Circulation, select Business Rules from the Setup | Rules menu.
The Business Rules Setup screen will appear. Business Rules are contained within sections, such as AAM and Account Finance (select Section from the menu). The General section is displayed initially.
Select Modify, highlight a Business Rule, and press Enter. The cursor will rest in the word “Business” in the Level column.
Change the level to Company, Publication, Bill Source, or Division, if desired.
Press Enter again, and the setting for the Business Rule will be displayed. This is the default answer. If you do not wish to change the setting, select Exit from the strip menu and go on to step 3.
To change the setting, select Modify and press Enter. Then, enter a valid setting of your choice.
Press Enter, followed by F4, and then select Exit to exit from the question.
Scroll down and set the remaining Business Rules in the General section. Press F4 to access the strip menu.
Select Section and then highlight another section to set the Business Rules in that section. Then select Exit to exit to the Setup menu. You can modify settings as often as you like.
Note: A few Business Rules for Cybersource involving transaction keys or shared secret keys require very long answers and cannot be answered via the standard Business Rules option. Select Oversized Rules from the Rules menu in Graphical Setup to answer these questions.
At some point, you may want a report that lists all of the Business Rules and their settings. The Rules report contains this information.
Select Rules Report from the Rules menu to display the Business Rules Settings screen.
Click the Add button and indicate which section of Business Rules should be printed. Check All Sections if all sections should print.
Click OK and then Continue to produce the report. See the User Manual for information about viewing and printing reports. An example of the Business Rules Settings report is shown below.
The Configuration Report lists, by section or for all sections, the Business Rules that are client-configurable in the Cloud, DTI-configurable in the Cloud, client or DTI-configurable in the Cloud, not configurable in the Cloud, or all Business Rules.
Select Configuration Report from the Rules menu.
Click the Add button and complete the fields in the following table.
ALL SECTIONS
yes/no
Flag this field to include all sections of Business Rules in the report. If you leave this field unchecked, you must specify one or more sections to include in SECTION.
SECTION
predefined
If All Sections is unchecked, specify the section to include in this report. Click the lookup icon to the right of this field to multi-select sections.
CONFIGURABLE BY
predefined
Indicate the “configurable” status of the Business Rules you want to include in the report. You have the following options:
All Configurable (configurable by either DTI or the client)
Client Configurable (configurable by the client)
DTI Configurable Only (configurable only by DTI personnel)
Everything (all Business Rules)
Non-Configurable (Business Rules that are not configurable)
Click OK and then Continue to produce the report. An example is shown below.
1. Which default sort sequence should be used for printing the account invoices? BCS (Client) There are a number of sort orders for account invoices. This setting determines the default order—it may be changed when account invoices are printed. Select the print order you will most commonly use.
2. Which default truck departure order should the account invoices use? BCS (Client) The default truck departure order entered here will be used to determine the print order of account invoices if invoices are printed in truck order. This default may be changed when the invoices are printed. Enter the user-defined truck departure order that is most commonly used to determine the print order of account invoices.
3. Which default truck sequence should the account invoices use? BCS (Client) The default truck sequence entered here will be used to determine the print order of account invoices if invoices are printed in truck order. It is also used to determine the truck-related information (truck and drop sequence number) which prints on the invoice. This default may be changed when the invoices are printed. Enter the user-defined truck sequence that is most commonly used to determine the print order of account invoices.
4. If notes exist for a payment, should they print on the account invoices? BCS (Client) Notes entered with payments may be printed on the account invoice.
5. Should an invoice be printed for an account with a zero balance? BCS (Client) You may have inactive or seasonal carriers with a zero balance for a billing period. This setting determines whether invoices are generated for these carriers.
If No:
6. Should an invoice be printed if the account has a zero balance and activity for the billing period? BCS (Client) This will alert carriers to any activity on their account during this billing period.
7. Should a blank line separate each group on the account invoice? BCS (Client) Each group of related items on the account invoice may be separated by a blank line to improve readability. Examples of groups are balance forward, payments, draw charges, miscellaneous charges/credits, and messages.
8. Should a blank line appear before each total on the account invoice? BCS (Client) If there is room on your account invoice form, you may wish to insert a blank line before each total line. Totals are printed for draw changes, office pay credit, returns, etc.
9. Should the remit to address print on the account invoice? BCS (Client) If you do not have your company address pre-printed on your account invoices, you may want the remit to address to print on them. This is also useful if you have a variety of remit to addresses for your account invoices.
10. Should the route name of primary route print on the invoice? BCS (Client) When this rule is set to “yes,” invoices will display the route name in the header (under the route) as shown below. The default is “no”.
11. What character should be used on the draw calendar to indicate days on which a substitute delivered the route? BC (Client) If a substitute carrier delivers a route, the draw will appear on the regular carrier’s invoice (along with a draw reversal). If the draw is displayed in the “calendar” format on the invoice, this setting determines the character (such as *) that will be used to indicate that the day was delivered by a substitute.
12. Should the office pay audit print on a separate page? BCS (Client) Each office pay subscriber and the number of days of credit issued to the carrier may print on the account invoice. This will determine whether or not a new page should be started before printing the office pay audit.
13. Which sort sequence should be used for printing the office pay section of account invoices? BCS (Client) The office pay audit list may be printed in subscriber account, address, or name order.
14. Should account invoices print a scan line? BCS (Client) Scan lines can be printed on account invoices to facilitate the process of entering account payments. Typically the scan line section of the invoice is detached and sent with the account payment to the bank or newspaper. The scan line that Circulation prints on the invoices contains the account’s balance and invoice number, as well as the company number and check digits. If there is no new activity for the account, the invoice number will be the number of the oldest invoice that still has a balance due.
15. If printing a scan line on account invoices, what is the two digit company number that will be included in the scan line? C Carriers can belong to multiple companies. The two digit number will identify the company the under which the payments should be applied.
16. Are account invoices printed on the bundle tops? BCP (Client) This setting controls whether account invoices can be printed on bundle tops, and affects the Invoices on Bundle menu option, which allows billings that are in process to be flagged to be included on bundle tops for a given product and publishing date. This setting also affects the Missed Invoices and Historical Invoices menu options.
17. Should column heading print on invoices? BCS (Client) “Memo-style” invoices are used for carrier/dealers who are associated with independent contractors. This setting determines if column headings should appear on these bills.
18. When memo invoices are created should the rates and amounts be displayed? BCS (Client) This setting determines whether rates and currency amounts are displayed on “memo-style” invoices.
This section controls the Invoice Export option.
1. Which default sort sequence should be used when exporting account data? BCS (Client) There are a number of sort orders for account invoices. This setting determines the default order—it may be changed when account invoices are printed. Select the print order you will most commonly use.
2. Which default truck departure order should be used when exporting account data? BCS (Client) The default truck departure order entered here will be used to determine the export order of account invoices if invoices are exported in truck order. This default may be changed when the invoices are exported. Enter the user-defined truck departure order that is most commonly used to determine the export order of account invoices.
3. Which default truck sequence should be used when exporting account data? BCS (Client) The default truck sequence entered here will be used to determine the export order of account invoices if invoices are exported in truck order. It is also used to determine the truck-related information (truck and drop sequence number) which is exported on the invoice. This default may be changed when the invoices are exported. Enter the user-defined truck sequence that is most commonly used to determine the export order of account invoices.
4. Should data be exported for accounts with a zero balance? BCS (Client) You may have inactive or seasonal accounts with a zero balance for a billing period. This setting determines whether invoices are exported for these accounts.
If No:
5. Should data be exported for accounts with a zero balance if the account has activity during the billing period? BCS (Client) This will alert accounts to any activity on their account during this billing period.
6. Which sort sequence should be used when exporting office pay information? BCS (Client) The office pay audit list may be exported in subscriber account, address, or name order.
7. What is the two digit company number used in building the scan line? BCS (Client) Circulation will export a scan line with the invoices that contains the account’s balance and invoice number, as well as check digits and the company number. Since accounts can belong to multiple companies, you must enter the two-digit number that will uniquely identify the company under which the payments should be applied.
8. Should an account which has no charges or credits in the current billing but has a balance be included in the export? BCS (Client) This setting determines whether an account that has a balance, but no charges or credits during the bill period, should be included in the Invoice Export file. Enter “yes” (the default) to include these accounts; otherwise enter “no.”
9. What is the phone type of the secondary phone in the invoice export? BCS (Client) The secondary area code and phone number can be included in the invoice export. This setting identifies the phone type of the secondary phone.
The topics covered in this section are as listed below:
1. How should account payments be entered and applied? B (Client) Account payments may be entered and applied as separate steps, one combined step, or either. Your selection will depend upon whether you divide these two tasks among your personnel and whether entry and application of carrier payments in one step is feasible in your situation.
2. How should account payments be applied? B (Client) Account payments may be automatically applied to the oldest invoices, individually applied to specific invoices chosen by the operator, or either.
3. Is a check number required for account payments? B (Client) Entry of the number of the check used to make each account payment may be required, if desired.
4. Is payment by credit card allowed for accounts? B (Client) If you allow carriers to make payments by credit card, you must indicate this here to activate the credit-card-related fields in the software.
5. To which system are you interfacing credit card payments? B (Non)
Note:
All of the credit card interfaces require a separate license fee to use. Contact the Naviga Support Center for more information.
You can export account credit card payment information to an ASCII file, which can then be imported to credit card distribution software.
If ICVerify:
6. If exporting to ICVerify, should the credit card expire date be formatted MMYY or YYMM? B (Non) The credit card month and year may be required in different formats, depending on the ICVerify version.
7. If exporting to ICVerify, how many blank fields should be at the end of each credit card payment? B (Non) This setting is used to handle version 3.1 of ICVerify. The trailing blanks after the payment record are not allowed in version 3.1. However, some sites need to use trailing blanks. Enter the number of trailing blanks that should be exported at the end of each payment record.
8. If exporting to ICVerify, is the ST field required in the output file? B (Non) The ICVerify system might require an “ST” field to denote the beginning of the close batch record. This setting determines whether “ST” is exported.
9. If exporting to ICVerify and using the ST field, how many blank fields should follow the ST field? B (Non) This setting is used to handle version 3.1 of ICVerify. The trailing blanks after the ST record are not allowed in version 3.1. However, some sites need to use trailing blanks. Enter the number of trailing blanks that should be exported at the end of each ST record (the default is 21). Note: Not all sites use the ST field. If you have already indicated in Business Rules that you do not use the ST field, the setting of this rule will be ignored.
10. If exporting to ICVerify, which export file format should be used? B (Non) If you use ICVerify, you can select “Retail” to use the original file format or “MOTO” to use the MOTO (Mail Order / Telephone Order) format. MOTO is the same as the Retail format with one exception: between the Payment Amount and the Zip code, there is a “yes/no” field that indicates if the transaction is recurring (currently, this field is a placeholder and is always set to “blank”).
11. Should American Express credit card data be separately exported? BC (Non)
American Express credit card payments may be processed through a separate clearing house than other credit card types. In order to separate American Express payments from other credit card payments, account and subscriber payments with American Express (whether a single payment or an auto renew) may be sent to a separate file in /dti/exchange/cm
. If Business Rules are set to export American Express payments separately, payments with credit cards other than American Express will go to the standard export file (ICVerify, Payway Complete, VISANET, etc.). American Express payments will be exported to their own file, rather than the standard file.
If Yes:
12. If you export credit card payments for American Express, what is your merchant ID? BC (Non) The merchant ID is included in the American Express export file.
If EIGEN:
13. If you interface credit card payments to EIGEN, what is your term ID group? BC (Non) This setting determines the term ID that is exported to the ASCII file interfaced to EIGEN.
If Paymentech:
14. If you interface credit card payments to Paymentech, what is your format version? BC (Non) Enter the version number (defaults to “2_0_0” for on-premises sites).
15. If you interface credit card payments to Paymentech, what is your user name? BC (Non) Enter your user name (blank by default).
If Edgil or EdgCapture:
16. If you export payments using the Edgil/EdgCapture format, what is your merchant ID? BC (Client) This setting determines the merchant ID that is exported to the ASCII file interfaced to Payway Complete or EdgCapture.
17. If you export payments using the Edgil/EdgCapture format, what is your OEP ID (order entry process ID)? BC (Client) This setting determines the order entry process ID that is exported to the ASCII file interfaced to Payway Complete or EdgCapture.
If POS-Partner 2000:
18. If you interface credit card payments to POS-partner 2000, what is your V number? BC (Non) Enter the V number.
If Skipjack:
19. If you interface credit card payments to Skipjack, what is your merchant serial number? BC (Non) The merchant serial number is included in the Skipjack export file.
If VISANET:
20. If you interface credit card payments to VISANET, what is your merchant ID? BCP (Non) The merchant ID is included in the VISANET export file.
21. How should account payments be applied when the payment amount does not equal the full amount outstanding? B (Client) This setting determines how underpayment and overpayment amounts are applied.
22. How many days will you allow account payments to be backdated? BD (Client) Carrier payments may be backdated to accommodate situations where the accounting department has a deposit date that is not the same date as the payment entry date. This is commonly used if payments received on a Saturday are not entered until the following Monday. The default number of days is 5.
23. How many days will you allow account misc charges and credits to be backdated? BD (Client) This setting works the same as the payment backdating setting above, but it governs miscellaneous charges and credits. The default number of days is 15.
24. How many days after the discount date will you allow the account to qualify for the prompt-pay discount? BCS (Client) If you offer a discount to carriers who make payments by a particular discount date, you may have an unadvertised policy of granting the discount to carriers whose payments are received shortly after the discount date. If this is the case, you must indicate the number of days in this discount “grace period” here. Payments received after the “grace period” will not be given the discount. If you do not offer a prompt-pay discount, or if a no “grace period” policy is in effect, set this rule to 0. The default number of days is 5.
25. What is the payment variance with which the account may earn the discount? B (Client) Payment terms for carriers and dealers may include a prompt pay discount percentage which may be earned if the carrier pays prior to the discount date and pays the entire amount due less the discount. The setting of this rule defines the dollar variance at which the carrier may earn the discount. For example, suppose the total balance owed by a carrier is 100.00. A 5.00 discount is available, and the payment variance defined by this setting is 3.00. Therefore, the carrier may pay 92.00 to 100.00 (100.00 balance, less the 5.00 discount, less the 3.00 variance) and still earn the 5.00 discount. A payment of 92.00 would leave a 3.00 balance for the carrier. This payment variance must be a positive decimal amount. The default value is 0.
26. What is the default bank for account payment entry? B (Client) The default bank is used during account payment entry to define the bank on the payment batch screen. This default may be changed during payment entry. Enter the user-defined bank that is most commonly used for account payment deposits.
27. What account ID should be assigned to an account payment when an invalid invoice number is supplied in the lockbox file? BC (Client) When carrier payments are interfaced via Carrier Lockbox, they are applied to carriers based on invoice number. If a payment is interfaced with an invoice number that does not exist in Circulation, this setting determines what carrier account is credited for the payment. This must be a valid carrier account number. If the setting is left blank, carrier payments with invalid invoice numbers will be assigned a blank account number, and will have to be assigned to a carrier in Payment Entry before the batch can be accepted.
28. When entering account payments, will you be searching by invoice number? B (Client) During payment entry, invoice numbers can be used to locate payments if you set this Business Rule to “yes”.
29. Should only accounts in the same company as the company of the entered bank be selected for BACS Prenotification? B (Client) When this Business Rule is set to “yes,” the accounts selected for BACS Prenotification will be only those that have an account bill source with the same company ID as the company ID of the bank entered. When set to “no” (the default), all accounts will be selected.
1. Enter the character or string to be used to represent the day of week the account does not deliver the product. B (NCS)
These two Business Rules are used in the Account Services module (within Route Service). They identify the characters to represent delivery and non-delivery days for an account in the Account Detail window. The default for this setting is <font color=#5994d5><b>
O</b></font>
(a light blue “O” character). The characters and the colors can be changed.
2. Enter the character or string to be used to represent the day of week the account delivers the product. B (NCS)
By default, this setting is <b> X</b>
(a black “X” character).
3. Should the social security number for each account be unique? B (Client) Circulation can verify, if desired, that the Social Security Number entered for each carrier is unique. If the Social Security Number entered is not unique within the Circulation database, and set this rule to “yes”, the operator will be prompted to enter a unique Social Security Number.
4. Should the vendor ID/company for each account be unique? B (Client) An account’s vendor company and vendor ID in your Accounts Payable system can be entered when the account is set up. When entering a vendor company/ID, Circulation can validate the vendor ID to make sure it is not being used for another account with the same vendor company. This setting determines whether duplicate vendor ID/companies can be entered.
5. Should the vendor ID be automatically assigned? B (Client) The account’s vendor ID may be specified as part of Account Setup. If this rule is set to “yes”, and the Vendor Company is specified, the Vendor field will be display-only, and the vendor ID will be assigned by Circulation. It will be the next number in the vendor ID sequence—for example, if the last vendor ID assigned was 00001472, the next one will be 00001473.
6. What account demographic should be used for the primary contract holder in the Vendor and Carrier Mail Exports? B (Client) This setting will be the value of the PrimaryContractHolder exported to the DTI Standard 2 vendor export file. It can be set to any “account” type of demographic question.
7. To which system should vendor information be interfaced? B (Client) This setting determines the format for the vendor export. Formats may be selected only if the appropriate add-activation record is licensed. Otherwise, this rule should be set to “None”.
8. At what level of detail should DTI Standard vendor file be exported? B (Client) This setting determines whether the standard or expanded format should be used, as well as whether new or active carriers are included in the export.
9. What is the default name for the vendor file? BC (Client)
This rule allows you to define the name of the vendor file. The default is vendorexport.d
.
10. Should vendor export create separate export files by company? B (Client) Setting this rule to “y” will cause the vendor export file, vendorexport.d, to be prefixed with the ID of the company. One export file will be created for each company.
11. What email type notification should be used to identify email addresses to include in DTI Standard 2 export? B (Client) An account notification e-mail address can be exported in the Notification Details field of the DTI Standard 2 format for the Vendor Export, if the notification is selected here. Only account notifications set up with a notification method of “Email” can be selected. If no notification is selected here, the first notification found for an account is exported instead.
12. Should a message be broadcast when a new account is assigned to a route? BCP (Client) A broadcast message can be automatically generated by the system when a new carrier delivers a route; the message will display for any subscriber on that route. This can be helpful to Customer Service associates if they receive calls about service on the route.
If Yes:
13. How many days should the new account message be broadcast? BCP (Client) If a message should be generated when a new carrier begins delivering a route, indicate for how many days the message should display.
14. Should the account ID be automatically assigned? B (Client) This setting determines if the account number assigned to a home delivery carrier, agent, or dealer is automatically assigned by the system during account setup.
15. The Search Date in Account Services should default as how many days before the current date? B (Client) This setting controls the default date when searching for an account in Account Services, with 0 (the default) being today’s date.
16. What is the default account notification preference? B (Client) In Account Setup and Account Activation, each account must have at least one notification preference set up. This Business Rule allows you to set a default value in this field. Notification preferences must be set up in advance.
1: Does your circulation vary significantly from weekday to weekday requiring specific days to be reported separately? BCP (Non) The Alliance for Audited Media (AAM) may require you to provide separate circulation totals for a specific day of the week. If the circulation totals for a day vary by 15% or more, that day must be reported separately from the other days. If so, set this rule to “yes,” which will cause the Circulation History report to break out the totals for those days. This affects the Circulation History report only, not the other AAM reports.
If Yes:
2: Which day(s) of the week must be reported separately to AAM? BCP (Client) Enter the day(s) of the week for which the Alliance for Audited Media (AAM) requires you to provide separate circulation totals. Enter one or more of “Su, Mo, Tu, We, Th, Fr, Sa” separated by commas, or press F2 and select the days. Enter “:” or press F2 again to designate another group of one or more days. For example, if Saturday and Sunday should be reported separately in one group and Wednesday in another, you would enter “su,sa:we”. This would cause Saturday and Sunday’s circulation figures to be grouped together in one total, Wednesday’s in another, and the remaining days in a third total.
3: Which days of the week should be combined in the first combined column on the AAM Paid and Qualified History report? BCP (Client) This and the following two settings identify which days of the week should be combined in the first, second, and third combined columns of the AAM Paid and Qualified History report.
4: Which days of the week should be combined in the second combined column on the AAM Paid and Qualified History report? BCP (Client)
5: Which days of the week should be combined in the third combined column on the AAM Paid and Qualified History report? BCP (Client)
6: Do you want to store AAM circulation history by ZIP code or by ZIP by town? BCP (Non) AAM circulation history information is automatically stored by AAM zone and Town of 25 ID. It may be also stored at the Zip code level, if desired, based on this setting. If you enter “By ZIP” here, the Paragraph 3 Report by Zip Code will list one town (the primary city) for each Zip code. If you enter “By ZIP By Town”, you will run a different report, the Paragraph 3 Report by Zip By Town report, which lists each town in the Zip code. If you enter “Neither”, you will not be able to create either report.
7: Do you want to store AAM history by price levels? BCP (Non) The AAM allows discounted subscriptions to be reported in separate categories: paid circulation at 50% or more of the basic price, paid circulation at 25% - 49% of the basic price, and other paid circulation. If you break your AAM reporting down by these price levels, this rule should be set to “yes”, so that AAM information is kept at the price level. If you do not do AAM reporting by price level, enter “no” here.
If Yes:
8: What is the default AAM price level for office pay draw? BCP (Client)
9: What is the default AAM price level for carrier collect draw? BCP (Client)
10: What is the default AAM price level for paid comp draw? BCP (Client)
11: What is the default AAM price level for third party sponsored draw? BCP (Client)
12: What is the default AAM price level for single copy draw? BCP (Client)
13: What is the default AAM price level for bulk draw? BCP (Client) AAM price levels can be assigned to subscriber rate codes or single copy routes. If the rate code or single copy route is not assigned an AAM price level, however, the default price level defined here will be used. The price level entered should be the one that will cover the majority of your rates or single copy draw (for example, “full paid”). This will save you the effort of having to modify all of your subscriber rate codes and single copy routes to manually assign a price level. Note that the bulk draw setting refers to draw for single copy routes that have a single copy type whose AAM type is “bulk”.
14: What is the default AAM price level for day pass draw? BCP (Client)
15: What is the AAM price level for single copy other paid draw? BCP (Client) One of the price level categories defined by the AAM is “other paid circulation”. The price level used for other paid circulation is defined here; single copy routes assigned to the price level entered for this setting will appear in the “Other Paid” section of the AAM reports.
16: Is your circulation audited by AAM? P (NCS) This setting allows you to indicate whether or not a publication is audited for AAM. This will have an effect when setting up routes.
17: Which draw adjustment code should be used when creating draw adjustments to restate AAM history? BCP (Client) If you use the Restate AAM History report, you should have a separate draw adjustment code specifically for the batches created by this menu option. Set this Business Rule to that draw adjust code. The setting of this Business Rule can be any valid draw adjust code for which:
Adjust AAM History? = Yes
Return? = No
Authorized? = No
Charge Account? = No
Charge Code (Sun-Sat) = All charge codes (i.e., no credit codes)
18: Which draw adjustment code should be used when creating draw adjustments in Digital Access Draw? BCP (Client) If you use Digital Access Draw to create or move AAM history for digital draws within a combo, specify a draw adjustment code here. This adjustment code will be used to process adjustment change batches created by Digital Access Draw. You will not be able to enter other draw adjustments for this code, unless allowed by Transaction Security (the "DigiAccDrawAdj" item).
19: Should Digital Access Draw count one or multiple copies when digital subscribers access multiple platforms in a day? BCP (Client) Digital Access Draw can count accesses by a subscriber for the same product and date on multiple platforms as multiple copies, rather than one copy, when calculating digital draw. For example, if a subscriber accessed a publication via a mobile phone three times and a laptop once on the same date, it could count as two copies for AAM reporting, rather than one.
20: Which draw adjustment code should be used when changing paid draw to unpaid draw for ‘did not order’ subscriptions? BCP (Client) When a “did not order” reason code is used for a stop transaction, the draw is converted from “paid” to “unpaid”. This setting identifies the draw adjust code to use for the conversion. The setting of this Business Rule can be any valid draw adjust code for which:
Adjust AAM History? = Yes
Return? = No
Authorized? = No
Charge Account? = No
Charge Code (Sun-Sat) = All charge codes (i.e., no credit codes)
21: Which AAM column should be used for reporting ‘did not order’ unpaid comp draw? BCP (Non) AAM history is changed to unpaid when processing a stop transaction with a “did not order” stop reason. The benefit of this adjustment is that manual changes are not required to report AAM history properly. This setting identifies the AAM column under which unpaid comp draw created by stop transactions entered with “did not order” reason codes should be reported. For Cloud sites this defaults to “DNO”.
The following three Business Rules must be set in order to create a suspended batch of draw adjustments to restate AAM when running the Grace Writeoff report (i.e., the Is Writeoff Now Unpaid? checkbox).
22: Which draw adjustment code should be used when changing paid draw to unpaid draw while writing off grace? BCP (Client) The setting of this Business Rule can be any valid draw adjust code for which:
Adjust AAM History? = Yes
Return? = No
Authorized? = No
Charge Account? = No
Charge Code (Sun-Sat) = All charge codes (i.e., no credit codes)
It is best if a new draw adjustment code is created specifically for use with these draw adjustment batches.
23: Which AAM column should be used for reporting grace writeoff unpaid comp draw? BCP (NCS) The AAM column entered here will be used for any draw being restated where the adjustment occurs after the AAM close date.
24: Which AAM column should be used for reporting grace writeoff unpaid comp draw written off before the AAM close date? BCP (NCS) The AAM column entered here will be used for any draw being restated where the adjustment occurs on or before the AAM close date.
25: Which delivery schedule should be used when running Restate AAM History to add qualified digital access draw? BCP (Client) When restating AAM history, draw can be added for route- or mail-delivered subscribers who also have digital access history, by using the restate type of “Add Qualified Digital Access.” The setting of this Business Rule identifies the delivery schedule to which the draw will be added.
26: Which publication should update AAM history for this combined publication? P (Client) This setting is used to specify the “reporting” publication for a combined publication’s AAM history. This setting affects AAM history when publishing runs are ended and when draw adjustments and returns are accepted. The default setting is to update and report AAM history using the combined publication (in which case, this setting would be either blank or the combined publication).
27: Do you want End Publ Run to track subscriptions that don't meet AAM's digital incremental pricing requirements? BCP (NCS) When this Business Rule is set to “no,” End Publ Run will skip the creation of records needed for restating AAM.
Note: The default setting of this Business Rule is “no,” and it can be changed to “yes” without issue. However, Naviga does not recommend changing this setting from “yes” back to “no” without assistance. If a user attempts to do so, a warning to this effect will be displayed. Please contact the Naviga Support Center if you need to do this for any reason.
28: When should End Publ Run start tracking subscriptions that don’t meet AAM’s digital incremental pricing requirements? BCP (NCS) Use this Business Rule to specify the date on which subscriptions should start should start being considered for AAM restatement. The default setting is 10/01/2011.
29: Do you want End Publ Run to track subscriptions that qualify for a combo product, but are not assigned to the combo? BCP (NCS) This setting determines if the End Publ Run process will track, for AAM restating purposes, the subscriptions that qualify for a combo but are not assigned to it.
30. Should the paragraph 3 reports include unpaid draw? BCP (Client) This setting determines whether unpaid draw is included in the Paragraph 3 reports. The default setting is “No.” Canadian AAM requires that the Paragraph 3 reports include unpaid draw, and so Canadian sites will typically change this answer to "Yes."
31. What is your AAM member number? BCP (Client) The member number is only needed if you will be filing AAM reports electronically. It is exported in the Member # field in the Paragraph 3 by Zip export file.
32. If a day pass is also valid for the next publishing day, should it count for both days in AAM history? BCP (Client) If you offer day passes, you can count a day pass as a single day (copy), but because it is a 24-hour period and readers can typically access the website on two different days, AAM allows a day pass to be counted as two copies.
1. Which default sort sequence should be used for printing the billing journal? BCS (Client) The default order for printing the billing journal may be by account number, district, carrier name, route, or truck sequence. This default order may be changed when the billing journal is printed. The order selected will depend upon the primary purpose of the report.
2. Which default truck departure order should the billing journal use? BCS (Client) The default truck departure order entered here will be used to determine the default print order of the billing journal, if it is sorted by truck. This may be changed when the billing journal is printed. Enter the user-defined truck departure order that is most commonly used to determine the print order of the billing journal.
3. Which default truck sequence should the billing journal use? BCS (Client) The default truck sequence entered here will be used to determine the default print order of the billing journal if it is sorted by truck. Enter the user-defined truck sequence that is most commonly used to determine the print order of the billing journal.
4. If notes exist for a payment, should they print on the billing journal? BCS (Client) Notes entered with the payment may print on the billing journal.
5. Should an account with a zero balance be printed on the billing journal? BCS (Client) You may elect not to print information on the billing journal about carriers who have zero balances.
If No:
6. Should account appear on the billing journal if account has a zero balance and activity in the current billing period? BCS (Client) This will alert you to any activity on zero-balance accounts during this billing period.
7. Should a blank line separate each group on the billing journal? BCS (Client) Each group of related items on the billing journal may be separated by a blank line if desired. Examples of groups are balance forward, payments, draw charges, miscellaneous charges/credits, and messages.
8. Should a blank line separate each total on the billing journal? BCS (Client) You may wish to insert a blank line before each total line.
9. When printing the billing journal in district order, should there be a page break between districts? BCS (Client) You may wish to insert a page break after each district’s subtotals when printing in “District” sort order.
10. Which sort sequence should be used for printing the office pay section of the billing journal? BCS (Client) The office pay audit list may be printed in subscriber account, address, or name order.
Account
Account invoices will be exported by default in account order.
Area
Account invoices will be exported by default in area order.
Depot
Account invoices will be exported alphabetically by depot, and in depot sort order within each depot. Depots are user-defined and are assigned to routes.
Distribution Code
Account invoices will be exported by default in distribution code order. Distribution codes are user defined and can be assigned to accounts. Within each distribution code, invoices can be sorted in any of the other orders listed above.
District
Account invoices will be exported by default in district order.
Name
Account invoices will be exported by default in account name order.
Publication/Area
Account invoices will be exported by default in publication order, and within each publication, by area order, and within each area in region/zone/district/route order.
Publication/District
Account invoices will be exported by default in publication order, and within each publication, by district order, and within each district in route order.
Publication/Region
Account invoices will be exported by default in publication order, and within each publication, by region, and within each region in zone/district/route order.
Publication/Zone
Account invoices will be exported by default in publication order, and within each publication, by distribution zone, and within each zone in district/route order.
Region
Account invoices will be exported by default in region order.
Route
Account invoices will be exported by default in route order.
Truck
Account invoices will be exported by default in truck departure order, and within each truck in drop sequence order.
Zone
Account invoices will be exported by default in zone order.
Yes
If you want to export data for accounts with a zero balance.
No
If you do not to export data for accounts with a zero balance.
Yes
If you send statements to accounts with a zero balance if there was activity on their account during this billing period.
No
If you do not send statements to accounts with a zero balance regardless of whether there was activity on their account during this billing period.
Account
If the office pay audit should be exported in account order on the account invoices.
Address
If the office pay audit should be exported in address order on the account invoices.
Name
If the office pay audit should be exported in name order on the account invoices.
Introduction to Business Rules
AAM
Account Export
Account Finance
Account Invoice
Account Journal
Account Payments
Account Setup
Address Cleansing
Customer Services
General
Import Sub Activity
InsertPlus
Insight
Integration
iServices & Mapping
List MatchPlus
Mail Processing
Pymt Auth - Account
Pymt Auth - General
Pymt Auth - Subscrib
Reports
Returns
Rewards
Route Processing
Route Services
Subscriber Acctg
Subscriber Billing
Subscriber Payments
Transportation Cost
Household Management
Combined Process
If the entry and application of carrier payments will always be done as a one-step process. At the time the payment is entered the payment amount will be applied to the invoices selected or to the oldest balance.
Either
If you want the flexibility of entering and applying carrier payments as either a one- or two-step process. A decision will be made at the time a batch is entered.
Separate Processes
If the entry and application of account payments will always be done as a two-step process. The first step will be to enter the payment. The second step will be to apply the payment amount to the selected invoices.
Automatic
If carrier payments should always be applied automatically to the oldest invoices.
Either
If the operator should have the option of either applying carrier payments to the desired invoices or automatically applying them to the oldest invoices.
Select by invoice
If the operator should always apply carrier payments to specific invoices, without using any automatic application.
Yes
If entry of a check number should be required when carrier payments are entered.
No
If entry of a check number is not required when carrier payments are entered.
Yes
If payment by credit card is allowed for carriers.
No
If payment by credit card is not allowed for carriers.
EdgCapture
Account credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in EdgCapture format.
Edgil
Account credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in Payway Complete format.
EIGEN
Account card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in the EIGEN format.
ICVerify
Account credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in ICVerify format.
None
Account credit card payments should not be exported to an ASCII file.
Paymentech
Account credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in Chase Paymentech format.
POS-partner 2000
Account credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in POS-partner 2000 format.
Skipjack
Account credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in Skipjack format.
TrnsFirst TrnsCentrl
Account credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in TransFirst Transaction Central format.
viaWARP
Account credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in viaWARP format.
VirtualTerminal
Account credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in Virtual Terminal format.
VISANET
Account credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in VISANET format.
MMYY
The month should be exported, then the year.
YYMM
The year should be exported, then the month.
Yes
An “ST” field should be exported to the ICVerify file.
No
The “ST” field should be omitted from the export.
MOTO
The MOTO format is used.
None
ICVerify is not used.
Retail
The original, retail format is used.
Yes
American Express credit card payments should be exported to a separate file.
No
American Express credit card payments should be exported with other credit card payments in the ICVerify, Payway Complete, VISANET, etc. file.
Current Only
Payments will be applied only to the oldest charge. Let’s say, for example, an account has a $400 charge in the third period and a $500 charge in the fourth period, and makes a payment of $750. With this setting, it will pay off the $400 in the third period and leave $250 as an unapplied payment. The fourth period will remain untouched with a $500 charge.
Oldest Charges
Payments will be applied to the oldest charges, and continue to apply payments from oldest to newest until the payment amount is used up. If, for example, an account has a $400 charge in the third period and a $500 charge in the fourth period, and makes a payment of $750, it will pay off the full $500 in the fourth period, and then apply $250 toward the balance in the third period. After this payment, there will be $150 in the third period and $0 in the fourth period. This setting is the more common one, and is the default.
Yes
Invoice numbers are used to locate payments.
No
Invoice numbers are not used.
Yes
If entry of a unique Social Security Number is required.
No
If the operator may enter duplicate Social Security Numbers.
Yes
If carrier vendor ID/companies must be unique.
No
If duplicate vendor ID/companies can be entered.
Yes
The vendor ID should be assigned by the system.
No
The vendor ID should be assigned by the user.
DTI Standard
Vendor information should be exported in the Standard format.
DTI Standard 2
Vendor information should be exported in the Standard 2 format (an expanded format).
Lawson
Vendor information should be exported in the Lawson format.
None
Vendor information will not be exported.
PeopleSoft II
Vendor information should be exported in the PeopleSoft format.
New Standard
Carriers created after a date and who have a social security number, tax ID, or vendor ID will be exported in the DTI Standard format.
Active Standard
All all carriers who have a social security number or tax ID will be exported in the DTI Standard format.
New Expanded
Carriers created after a date and who have a social security number, tax ID, or vendor ID will be exported in the expanded format.
Active Expanded
All all carriers who have a social security number or tax ID will be exported in the expanded format.
Yes
A separate export file will be created for each company.
No
One export file will be created for all companies.
Yes
A broadcast message should display within Customer and Route Services when a new carrier delivers a route.
No
A broadcast message should not display when a new carrier delivers a route.
Yes
The account ID will be assigned automatically.
No
The account ID will need to be entered.
Yes
If you must provide AAM with separate circulation totals for a specific day of the week.
No
If AAM does not require you to provide separate circulation totals for a specific day of the week. This is the on-premises default
By ZIP
If AAM circulation history should be stored by Zip code. This is the on-premises default.
By ZIP By Town
If AAM circulation history should be stored by each town within a Zip code.
Neither
If AAM circulation history should not be stored by Zip code.
Yes
AAM history should be stored by price level, so that AAM reports can separate price level categories. If you enter “yes”, the following rules become active for entering AAM price levels for different draw types.
No
AAM history does not need to be stored by price level. This is the on-premises default.
Setup
AAM price level setup can be done, but the AAM reports will not use price levels. You can use this setting when first defining price levels, then switch to “yes” when setup is complete.
Yes
Users will be required to enter AAM Town of 25 and DistribPointZip percentages that total 100% when setting up routes.
No
Users will be allowed not to enter AAM Town of 25 and DistribPointZip percentages but, if percentages are entered, they must total 100%.
Multiple
Digital Access Draw will count one copy per access platform for the same subscriber, publication and date.
One
Digital Access Draw will only count one copy per subscriber for a publication and date.
Yes
End Publ Run will track digital subscriptions that do not meet incremental pricing requirements.
No
End Publ Run will not track digital subscriptions for AAM purposes unless they meet incremental pricing requirements.
Yes
End Publ Run will track subscriptions that qualify for a combo for AAM reporting purposes, even if they are not assigned to the combo.
No
End Publ Run will not track subscriptions with a combo for AAM purposes unless the subscription is assigned to the combo.
Yes
The Paragraph 3 reports will include unpaid draw.
No
The Paragraph 3 reports will not include unpaid draw.
Yes
The day pass will count for two copies in AAM history.
No
The day pass will only count for one copy in AAM history.
Account
If the billing journal should print in account order by default.
Account Group
If the billing journal should print by default in account group order.
Area
If the billing journal should print by default in area order.
Depot
If the billing journal should print alphabetically by depot, and in depot sort order within each depot.
District
If the billing journal should print in district order by default.
Name
If the billing journal should print in carrier name order by default.
Publication/Area
If the billing journal should print by default in publication order, and within each publication, by area order, and within each area in region/zone/district/route order.
Publication/District
If the billing journal should print in publication, district, and route order by default.
Publication/Region
If the billing journal should print by default in publication order, and within each publication, by region, and within each region in zone/district/route order.
Publication/Zone
If the billing journal should print by default in publication order, and within each publication, by distribution zone, and within each zone in district/route order.
Route
If the billing journal should print in route order by default.
Truck
If the billing journal should print in truck departure and, within each truck, in drop sequence order by default.
Zone
If account invoices should print by default in zone order.
Yes
If notes entered with the payment should print on the billing journal.
No
If notes entered with the payment should be omitted from the billing journal.
Yes
If information should print on the billing journal about carriers with a zero balance.
No
If information about carriers with a zero balance should be omitted from the billing journal.
Yes
If information about zero-balance accounts should print on the billing journal if there was activity on their accounts during this billing period.
No
If information about zero-balance accounts should not print on the billing journal regardless of whether there was account activity during this billing period.
Yes
If a blank line should separate each group of information on the billing journal.
No
If the groups of information on the billing journal should not be separated by a blank line.
Yes
If a blank line should separate each total line on the billing journal.
No
If total lines should print immediately below the last line of account information on the billing journal.
Yes
Insert a page break between districts.
No
Do not insert a page break.
Account
If office pay audit should print in account order on the billing journal.
Address
If office pay audit should print in address order on the billing journal.
Name
If office pay audit should print by default in name order on the billing journal.
The settings in this section govern the format, protocol, and other parameters for sending e-mails from Circulation. They are used when Circulation sends eBill, New Password, and Digital Vacation Pack e-mails.
1. What level of logging should be used when sending SMTP email? B (NCS) If using the SMTP protocol, select the logging level for monitoring e-mail. This can be verbose (“1”), medium (“2”), or minimal (“3”). The default is “2.”
2. Which mode should Send EBills be run in? BCP (Client) This parameter is typically set to “Test” while implementing eBill e-mails, and is set to “Live” once testing is complete.
Live
eBill e-mails will be sent when Send eBills is run with Send Emails checked.
Test
E-mails will not be sent by Send eBills. Instead, when you run Send eBills with Send Emails checked, a pop-up window will appears that prompts for the number of test e-mails to send, the test e-mail address to send them to, and whether or not the bills in this batch should be marked as sent.
3. What is the host name for the related online edition? BCP (Client) For example, this might be “http://www.dtint.com.” Subscribers temp stopped on a digital vacation pack will be given access to this edition.
4. What is the URL path for the related online edition? BCP (Client)
This path is appended to the host name. For example, the URL path might be
“?action=login&rtype=eereg
.”
5. What is the host name for Day Pass? BCP (Client)
6. What is the URL path for Day Pass? BCP (Client) If you offer day passes, these parameters define the host name and URL to be used with the day pass e-mail template (see the User Manual). The template defines the content of e-mails sent to subscribers who purchase a day pass. These parameters should therefore build the URL that points to the digital edition offered to day pass subscribers.
The Business Rules in this section have meaning only if you have activated the TicketSauce add-on.
1. If using Events, what is the host name for the Events service? Enter the host name for the Events service.
2. If using Events, what is the port number of the Events service? Enter the port number for the Events service.
3. If using Events, what is the API Key for the Events service? Enter the API Key for the Events service.
4. If using Events, what is the stage of the Events service? Default Value: prod Enter the stage for the Events service.
5. If using Events, what is the AWS API key for the Events service? Enter the AWS API key for the Events service.
6. If using Events, what is the company ID for the Events service? Enter the company ID for the Events service.
7. If using Events, what is the AWS Access key for the Events service? Enter the AWS Access key for the Events service.
8. If using Events, what is the AWS Secret key for the Events service? Enter the AWS Secret key for the Events service.
9. If using Events, what is the AWS Region for the Events service? Enter the AWS Region for the Events service.
10. If using Events, what is the AWS IAM Role for the Events service? Enter the AWS IAM Role for the Events service.
11. What is the maximum number of events to display in the past? Default Value: 3 This BR controls the Events Purchased section of the Events tab. It should control the maximum number of past events to be displayed. This applies to events that the user had attended.
12. How many days in the past should events display? Default Value: 30 This BR controls the Events Purchased section, limiting the displayed events to a certain number of days. If this is set to 30, any events that occurred 31 days or more in the past should not display.
13. What is the maximum number of events to display in the future? Default Value: 3 This BR controls the Upcoming Events section, determining how many future events should be displayed.
14. How many days in the future should events display? Default Value: 999 This BR controls the Upcoming Events section, and limits the displayed events to a certain number of days in the future. If this is set to 60, users will not see events 61 or more days away.
1. What system do you use for Address Correction and Encoding software? B (Client) You have the option of using address cleansing software within Circulation. These options are licensed add-on applications; contact the Naviga Support Center for more information.
None
If you do not use address cleansing software.
PostalSoft
If you have purchased PostalSoft’s ACE software and have it installed. Note that ACE is no longer supported (support for ACE has transitioned to Quadient).
QAS
If you have purchased QAS software and have it installed.
Satori
If you have purchased Satori software and have it installed.
If Postalsoft:
2. Which of PostalSoft’s Address Correction and Encoding products are you using? B (Client) PostalSoft offers both Canadian and US ACE products.
US
If you have purchased US ACE.
CA
If you have purchased Canadian ACE (CACE).
Both
If you have purchased both ACE products.
If Satori:
3. If using Satori, what is your registration key for single address cleansing? B (Client) If using Satori, enter your Satori registration key here. This is used for the online address cleansing (not the batch process).
4. If using Satori, what is your username for the batch process? B (Client) A user name and password is required to run Batch Address Hygiene using Satori.
5. If using Satori, what is your password for the batch process? B (Client)
6. If using Satori, to which email address should updates from the batch process be sent? B (Client) Quadient will send an e-mail to this address when Batch Address Hygiene starts and when it completes. A valid e-mail must be specified here in order to run Batch Address Hygiene when using Satori.
7. If using Satori, what number of records should be blocked for file transfers during the batch process? B (Client) The value entered here will determine the number of address records uploaded and downloaded as a single transaction by Quadient. You can fine-tune this setting to achieve optimal transfer rates. By default this is blank for Cloud sites, and 2000 for on-premises sites. This value must be greater than 0 in order to run Batch Address Hygiene.
If Postalsoft or Satori:
8. Should your addresses be case-standardized to upper, lower or mixed case? B The USPS prefers upper case. (Client)
Upper
Data-entered address information will be converted and stored in the database as all upper case.
Lower
Data-entered address information will be converted and stored in the database as all lower case.
Mixed
Data-entered address information will be converted and stored in the database as mixed case.
If Postalsoft:
9. For US addresses, how would you like unit designators standardized? B (Client)
USPS
The unit designator will be standardized according to the data that the USPS (United States Postal Service) maintains. For example, if the USPS directory indicates that an apartment building contains only apartments, a designator of STE would be changed to APT.
Retain
All unit designators will be retained as entered but will be checked for correct spelling.
If Postalsoft or Satori:
10. Would you like extraneous address information removed from your addresses? B (Client) The USPS prefers that extraneous information not be included on mail pieces. For example, in the address, PO Box 321, Main St., if “Main St.” is not a required part of the address for the purpose of delivery, the USPS prefers that it be removed from the address.
Yes
Extraneous information will be removed from the address.
No
Extraneous information will be retained with the address.
If Postalsoft:
11. For US addresses, would you like invalid US city place names retained? B (Client) A geographical area that does not have its own post office can have its own place name. For example, in Minnesota, one part of St. Paul is called “North Oaks”. North Oaks is technically served by the St. Paul Post Office, but many of the people who live there prefer that all of their mail be addressed and delivered to North Oaks. A city place name is also known as a vanity address.
Yes
Invalid city place names will be retained. In the example above, North Oaks would be retained.
No
Invalid city names will be converted to the USPS-preferred city names. In the example above, North Oaks would be converted to St. Paul.
12. For US addresses, would you like non-preferred US city names retained? B (Client) Some addresses (particularly in suburban areas) may have two valid city names. For example, addresses in Roseville (a suburb of St. Paul) may have a city name of “Roseville” or “St. Paul”. Both of these names are valid, but the USPS prefers “St. Paul”. “Roseville”, then, is non-preferred. This differentiation of preferred versus non-preferred city names should not affect your mail delivery, but it is a USPS requirement for CASS-certified software programs such as Quadient.
If you would like addresses entered with non-preferred city names to keep the non-preferred city, set this rule to “yes”. If you enter “no”, ACE or Quadient will change the city names of these addresses to the preferred name as part of the cleansing process.
Yes
If an address is entered with a non-preferred city name, address cleansing will keep the non-preferred city name for that address.
No
If an address is entered with a non-preferred city name, address cleansing will change the city name for the address to the preferred city name.
13. If using ACE, will you be using the Enhanced Line of Travel (eLOT) directory? B (Client) Line of travel (LOT) postal information can be updated when an address is cleansed, but only if you install LOT directories (these are separate from the ZIP + 4 directories). This setting determines whether ACE attempts to return LOT information for the address. If no LOT information is returned, the address will be updated with a LOT of “0” and a LOT SEQUENCE of “D” (descending).
Yes
LOT directories will be installed and addresses should be updated with LOT information from ACE.
No
ACE should not return LOT information.
14. If using ACE, will you be using the Delivery Point Validation (DPV) add-on software? BCP (Client) Indicate whether the DPV add-on will be used. The default is “no”.
15. If using ACE, will you be using the Locatable Address Conversion System (LACSLink) add-on software? BCP (Client) Indicate whether the LACSLink add-on will be used. The default is “no”.
If Postalsoft or Satori:
16. For US addresses, should the DPV NO STATS directory be used? BCP (Client) This setting controls whether the DPV NO STATS directory is used. This directory provides information from the USPS about specific addresses. An address may exist, but information such as whether it is vacant or does not yet have mail delivery (such as the home is under construction and not yet occupied), etc. is obtained by using the DPV NO STATS directory. If you use the DPV NO STATS directory and an address is determined to be vacant or does not yet have delivery, the Mail Accessible flag will be set to “no”.
Yes
The DPV NO STATS directory will be used.
No
The DPV NO STATS directory will not be used, and no DPV-confirmed addresses will be marked as not Mail Accessible.
If Postalsoft and using CACE:
17. If using CACE, should street name aliases be converted? B (Client) An alias is an alternative form of a primary street address. For example, suppose you have addresses on a street named “Highway 55”, but the Post Office prefers the mail addressed to “Olson Memorial Highway”. In this case, “Highway 55” is considered to be street name alias for “Olson Memorial Highway”.
Yes
Aliases will be converted to the USPS-preferred equivalent. In the example above, Highway 55 would be converted to Olson Memorial Highway.
No
Aliases will not be converted. In the example above, Highway 55 would be retained.
18. If using CACE, what is your Canada Post assigned customer number (required to appear on the AAS report)? B (Client) Canada Post requires that your assigned customer number appear on the AAS report (Address Accuracy Statement). You will need to contact Canada Post to obtain your number if you do not know it. This setting determines the customer number that prints on the AAS report. Note that if you leave it blank you will not be able to create an AAS report in Batch Address Hygiene.
If QAS:
19. If using QAS, what host should be used? B (Client)
20. If using QAS, what port should be used? B (Client)
21. If using QAS, what WSDL should be used? B (Client) The default is “proweb.wdsl”.
22. If using QAS, what country code should be used? B (Client)
23. If using QAS, how many milliseconds for a search to time out and abort? B (Client) The default is “300”.
24. If using QAS, how many matches should be the threshold of when matches should be shown or a message displayed? B (Client) The default is “100”.
25. If using QAS, how many milliseconds should be delayed before initiating a search? B (Client) The default is “300”.
26. What QAS Address Layout should be used for parsed address components (see QAS Server - Configuration Editor)? B (Client) Possible settings are “All Components” and “6 Line Address.” These layouts must be defined in the Qawserve.ini file.
27. What QAS Address Layout should be used for formatted addresses (see QAS Server - Configuration Editor)? B (Client) Possible settings are “All Components” and “6 Line Address.” These layouts must be defined in the Qawserve.ini file.
28. If using QAS, which search engine should default? B (Client) The default is “Typedown”. The other possible setting is “SingleLine.”
29. If using QAS, are you using the OnDemand version? B (Client) QAS OnDemand is a hosted version of QAS that can be used at Canadian sites. It has the same address cleansing features as on-premises QAS, but runs from a cloud hosted by QAS.
Yes
QAS OnDemand is being used. If so, you must answer the two Business Rules below, and also set the Business Rule If using QAS, what host should be used? to “ondemand”. Note that the QAS port and WSDL Business Rules are ignored when using OnDemand.
No
QAS OnDemand is not being used.
If Yes:
30. If using QAS OnDemand, what user name should be used? B (Client)
31. If using QAS OnDemand, what password should be used? B (Client) If using OnDemand, specify your user name and password for the above Business Rules.
32. When using Canadian QAS, can users update the County field? B (Client)
Yes
The country can be entered when cleansing addresses with Canadian QAS.
No
The country code cannot be changed when cleansing addresses with Canadian QAS.
1. Does the user name in the CIRC API need to be a valid user in the database? Default Value: No This setting determines whether the username provided in the CircAPI has to be a valid user recorded in the database. Set the value to Yes if it has to be a valid username in the database; otherwise, set it to No.
2. Should the CIRC API require a valid access key be passed to it? Default Value: Yes If set to Yes, user has to provide the access key to obtain a response from the CircAPI. Set the value to No to avoid providing the access key.
3. Should starts via the CircAPI be suspended? Default Value: N(o) This setting determines whether a new subscription can be started using the CircAPI. If the value is set to Y(es), new starts will not be created through CircAPI.
4. What is the default reason code for permanent stop from the CircAPI? Enter the default reason code that should be used when creating Permanent Stop through the CircAPI.
5. What is the default reason code for Delivery Address Change from Circ API? Enter the default reason code that should be used when creating Delivery Address Change through the CircAPI.
6. What is the default reason code for Billing Address Change from Circ API? Enter the default reason code that should be used when creating Permanent Stop through the CircAPI.
7. What is the default source code for transactions Created from Circ API? Enter the default source code that should be used for transactions created through the CircAPI.
8. In CircAPI Should a sub-source be created, if the sub-source does not exist in the database? Default Value: No This setting determines whether a new SubSource record is to be created if the value in the CircAPI does not exist in NCS Circ Setup. Set the value to Yes to create a new SubSource record; otherwise, set it to No.
1. What is the first day of the week for InSight Reporting? B (Client) Indicate the first day of the week for InSight reporting purposes. The default is Sunday.
2. In which directory should the exported files reside? B (Client)
Enter the directory into which InSight files should be exported. The default is “/dti/exchange
”.
Account
If the account invoices should print by default in account order.
Account Group
If account invoices should print by default in account group order.
Area
If account invoices should print by default in area order.
Depot
If the account invoices should print alphabetically by depot, and in depot sort order within each depot. Depots are user-defined and are assigned to routes.
Distribution Code
If the account invoices should print by default in distribution code order. Distribution codes are user defined and can be assigned to carriers. Within each distribution code invoices can be sorted in any of the other orders listed above.
District
If the account invoices should print by default in district order.
Name
If the account invoices should print by default in carrier name order.
Publication/Area
If the account invoices should print by default in publication order, and within each publication, by area order, and within each area in region/zone/district/route order.
Publication/District
If the account invoices should print by default in publication order, and within each publication, by district order, and within each district in route order.
Publication/Region
If the account invoices should print by default in publication order, and within each publication, by region, and within each region in zone/district/route order.
Publication/Zone
If the account invoices should print by default in publication order, and within each publication, by distribution zone, and within each zone in district/route order.
Region
If account invoices should print by default in region order.
Route
If the account invoices should print by default in route order.
Truck
If account invoices should be printed by default in truck departure order, and within each truck in drop sequence order.
Zone
If account invoices should print by default in zone order.
Yes
If notes entered with the payment should be printed on the account invoice.
No
If notes entered with the payment should be omitted from the account invoice.
Yes
If you send invoices to carriers with a zero balance.
No
If you do not send invoices to carriers with a zero balance.
Yes
If you send statements to carriers with a zero balance if there was activity on their account during this billing period.
No
If you do not send statements to carriers with a zero balance regardless of whether there was activity on their account during this billing period.
Yes
If a blank line should separate each group of information on the account invoices.
No
If the groups of information on the account invoices should not be separated by a blank line.
Yes
If a blank line should appear before each total line on the account invoice.
No
If total lines should print immediately below the last line of carrier information.
Yes
If the remit to address should print on the account invoice.
No
If the remit to address should not print on the account invoice.
Yes
Print the office pay audit on a separate page.
No
Print the office pay audit immediately after the billing detail.
Account
If the office pay audit should print in account order on the account invoices.
Address
If the office pay audit should print in address order on the account invoices.
Name
If the office pay audit should print in name order on the account invoices.
Yes
A scan line should print on account invoices.
No
No scan line should print on account invoices.
Yes
Account invoices can be printed on bundle tops.
No
Account invoices cannot not printed on bundle tops.
Yes
Column headings are printed on memo invoices.
No
Column headings are not printed on memo invoices.
Yes
Rates and amounts are displayed on memo invoices.
No
Rates and amounts are not displayed on memo invoices.
1. Should unprocessed starts be set as processed when perm stops process? BCP (Non) If a start is suspended for a subscriber and a permanent stop is then processed for that subscriber, the suspended start can be set as “processed” if it is on or before the stop.
2. Will you use the router to determine routes and delivery methods for addresses and subscriptions? B (Client) Circulation’s automatic carrier routing (router) feature may be used to determine the routes and delivery methods for addresses and subscriptions entered in Customer Service. This setting will determine whether the router is used.
If Yes:
3. Are any of your route boundaries defined by city and state instead of ZIP Code? B (Client) The city and state or the Zip code may be used to define the geographic boundaries for a route. You may use city/state boundaries, for example, in cases where there are two streets of the same name in a single Zip code.
If Yes:
4. Should the ZIP code or the city/state be used first when determining a route for an address? B (Client) When an address range is defined in the router for both the Zip code and city/state, this setting determines which router record should be used.
5. Are any of your route boundaries defined by PO route type and PO route number? B (Client) The PO route type and route number may be used to define the geographic boundaries for a route. You may use PO route boundaries, for example, in cases where some of the house numbers have a dash, such as 11-04, where the first set of digits is the block and the second set is the house number on the block.
6. Should the full ZIP/postal code be used when routing addresses? B (Client) When routing addresses, the entire ZIP/postal code may be used if desired. When using the entire ZIP/postal code and a match is not found, a search is then made using only the first portion of the postal code.
7. If an address cannot be routed, should the delivery method default to mail or should the operator decide? BCP (Client) If the router is used but it cannot route the address, it will not be able to find the appropriate delivery method for the address. This setting determines whether a default delivery method of “Mail” should be assigned to addresses that the router could not find, or if the associate should manually assign the appropriate delivery methods to such subscriptions.
8. Are manual changes to route assignments allowed? B (Client) If the router is used to automatically assign routes, you can use this setting to control whether those routes may be overridden by the associate when a subscription is started.
9. Do you allow duplicate addresses? B (Client) This setting determines whether entry of duplicate addresses is allowed.
If Yes:
10. Should a warning display that the entered address already exists? B (Client) If duplicate addresses are allowed, you may wish the associate to be notified that a duplicate address has been entered. This setting determines whether such a warning will be displayed.
11. Should the street name be validated? B (Client) Street names can be set up in Circulation and used for validation during address entry. This can prevent the entry of misspelled street names.
12. Do you display last name first for occupant setup? B (Client) On the Occupant tab, an occupant’s name can be displayed last name, then first name, or vice-versa.
13. What is the default dwelling status? B (Client) The default dwelling status assigned during address entry may be set up here, if desired. This default may be changed by the associate during address entry.
14. What is the default dwelling type? B (Client) The default dwelling type assigned during address entry may be set up here, if desired. This default may be changed by the associate during address entry.
15. What is the default town of 25? B (Client) The default Town of 25 can be specified here, for situations in which it cannot be determined by the router or the Zip Town of 25. This default may be changed by the operator during address entry.
16. What is the default credit status for new occupants? B (Client) The default credit status assigned during occupant entry may be set up here, if desired. This default may be changed by the associate during occupant entry.
17. What is the default occupant type for new occupants? B (Client) The default occupant type assigned during occupant entry may be set up here, if desired. This default may be changed by the associate during occupant entry.
18. What is the occupant type used for employees? BCP (Client) Donation Code Setup identifies donation codes for use by employees and non-employees. An occupant’s employment status is determined by comparing the occupant type in the occupant record to the “employee” occupant type, specified here.
19. What is the default number of days to display in the TM Products Delivered query? B (Client) This setting controls the number of Targeted Marketing days of history that are displayed in the TM Products Delivered tab after performing a Find in Customer Service. The default setting is 30 days.
20. Should a list of subscriptions display when entering a transaction for a subscriber with multiple subscriptions? BCP (Client) When entering transactions for a subscriber with multiple subscriptions, this Business Rule determines whether the subscriptions display in a popup window, or whether the currently selected subscription is automatically used.
21. Should reason codes for transactions entered in Customer Services be limited by product? BCP (Client) This Business Rule allows you to limit the available reason codes to those that have either (1) no reason info records or (2) a reason info record for the publication of the current transaction. If you select “no” (the default), there will be no change for how reason codes are validated in Graphical Customer Service.
22. What is the reason code used for stopping paid subscriptions that expire with grace days and are not renewed? BCP (Client) The stop reason code assigned when renewed subscriptions are stopped for non-payment with grace days must be set up here. The stop reason entered must be a valid permanent stop reason code. This field must not be left blank.
23. What is the reason code used for stopping paid subscriptions that expire and have no grace days? BCP (Client) This setting has the same application as the previous setting, but it is used for renewed subscriptions stopped for non-payment without grace days.
24. What is the reason code used for stopping start and bill subscriptions that are never paid for? BCP (Client) The stop reason code assigned when start and bill subscriptions (subscriptions that are started but not yet paid for) are stopped for non-payment must be set up here. The stop reason entered must be a valid permanent stop reason code. This field must not be left blank.
25. Is a source code required for a start? BCP (Client) It may be desirable to require that every start transaction be assigned a source code to indicate the source of the subscription. Source examples might be: a particular ad campaign, subscriber referral, or the carrier.
26. What is the default source code for new starts? BCP (Client) The default source code assigned when subscriptions are started may be set up here, if desired. This default value may be changed by the associate.
27. What is the default delivery schedule for new starts? BCP (Client) The default delivery schedule assigned when subscriptions are started may be set up here, if desired. This default value may be changed by the associate.
28. What is the default billing method for new subscribers? BCP (Client) The default billing method for subscribers when entering a new start must be either carrier collect or office pay. This default value may be changed by the associate.
29. What is the maximum number of days to allow between the start and stop dates for ‘Did Not Order’ stop reasons? BCP (Client) You can disallow the use of “did not order” stop reason codes if certain criteria are met. For example, you may not allow them if a stop is entered more than 14 days after the start or if a payment has already been made. This will prevent the use of these reason codes when subscriber activity suggests there was an intent to order. This Business Rule identifies the maximum number of days after the subscriber’s start date that a “did not order” stop reason can be used. The default is zero.
30. Do you allow entry of new starts with a billing method of third party? BCP (Client) This setting determines if third-party sponsored new starts can be entered in Customer Service. Note: This setting is relevant only for Customer Service—third-party sponsored new starts can be created in Targeted Marketing and via the Subscriber Activity Import no matter how this rule is set.
31. What is the reason code used for stopping third party sponsored subscriptions? BCP (Client) This setting identifies the reason code that is used to stop third-party stop subscriptions. For example, when the third-party subscriptions created in TM expire, stop transactions will be created automatically. This setting assigns a reason code to these transactions.
32. Should the previous billing address and occupant be retained when entering a start for a former subscriber? BCP (Client) Some post offices cannot deliver mail to some locations that are newspaper delivery locations. Therefore, for some subscribers, the billing address and occupant may differ from the delivery address and occupant. This setting determines whether the billing address entered for a former subscriber is retained if a new subscription is started. It applies to starts entered in Customer Service as well as starts created by payment processing.
33. Is a source code required for a stop? BCP (Client) It may be necessary to know who initiated the subscription stop. This can be accomplished by requiring the entry of a source code for each stop transaction.
34. Is a source code required for a complaint? BCP (Client) It may be necessary to know the general source of each complaint. For example, was it from a carrier, a subscriber, or some other source? This information may be recorded by requiring the entry of a source code for each complaint.
35. Do you allow access to the digital edition for complaints? BCP (Client) This parameter determines whether digital access to the publication website or replica version can be offered to resolve a delivery complaint.
If Yes:
36. How many past days does the subscriber have access to the digital edition after reporting a complaint? BCP (Client) This and the next parameter determine how many days of content (in the past and future) the subscriber has digital access to. For example, if this rule is set to “5”, the subscriber will be able to read content for the current publishing day and five days into the past (past dates typically pertain to only replica editions). The days are in calendar days. If both of these Business Rules are set to zero (the default), the subscriber will only have access for the current publishing date.
37. How many additional days does the subscriber have access to the digital edition after reporting a complaint? BCP (Client) Indicate how many days into the future the subscriber will be allowed digital access. For example, you can set this parameter to “7” to give the subscriber access to the publication website for the current publishing date and seven days into the future. The default is zero.
38. What is the maximum number of days a subscription may be extended for a complaint? BCP (Client) It may be desirable to extend subscription expiration dates to accommodate subscribers who have missed receiving a paper due to service errors. It may also be desirable to establish a maximum number of days that a subscription’s expiration date may be extended due to a complaint. Enter the maximum number of days a subscription expiration date may be extended for a complaint here. The default number of days is 5.
39. Do you want complaints to print to a dedicated printer at entry time? BCP (Client) You may have a printer set up for the exclusive purpose of printing complaints entered in Customer Service using the complaint entry option. This setting determines whether complaints will print on the dedicated printer immediately after entry. Complaints may also be printed by selecting Reports | Route | Complaint.
If Always, Ask, or Urgent:
40. What is the device name of the printer for automatically printing complaints? BCP (Client) If a printer has been set up to print complaints as they are entered, you must enter the printer’s device name here. Examples of device names are: lp0, lp, lpt1, etc. See your system administrator for this information.
41. What is the maximum number of days after a complaint has been processed that the reason code can be changed? BCP (Client) Unlike most subscriber transactions, complaints can be modified after they are processed (only the complaint code can be changed). This setting determines the number of days after the processing date during which a complaint transaction can be modified. The default is zero.
42. What is the maximum number of complaints a route may receive on a day before warnings display? BCP (Client) You may not wish to take serious action if only a few complaints are received from subscribers on a route. This setting allows you to establish the maximum number of complaints that may be received for a route in a single day before warnings display. When the number of complaints received for a route exceeds this limit for one day, a warning message displays on the complaint entry screen. The default number of complaints is 5.
43. How many delivery type complaints should be allowed before a complaint is flagged as “urgent”? B (Client) Most complaints are delivery complaints (for example, a missed paper), as determined by the complaint code. If a subscriber submits this number of delivery complaints within a given time interval (defined with the next setting), this and any subsequent complaints will automatically be marked as urgent for dispatching purposes. For example, if this rule is set to four and there are five complaints for a subscriber, the fourth and fifth complaints would be marked as urgent. The feature allows dispatchers to quickly take action if, for example, a carrier does not realize a certain address should be delivered. In addition to being marked as urgent, a message will display when entering any additional complaints for the subscriber. The default is 99 days.
44. How many calendar days should be reviewed when determining if the complaint should be considered “urgent”? B (Client) This setting determines the number of days to consider when evaluating the setting above. For example, if the above setting is two and this setting is three, if a subscriber complained on Tuesday and then again on Thursday, the Thursday complaint would be marked as urgent. The default is 999 days.
45. Should “urgent” complaints be based on the number of complaints received from an occupant, address, or both? B (Client) This setting determines if addresses or occupants should be considered when determining whether a complaint should automatically be marked urgent (based on the two settings above). For example, if an occupant with three complaints moves to an address with two complaints, this setting governs whether the system counts two or three complaints for this subscriber. If you set this rule to “both”, only complaints entered for the occupant at that address will be counted (in the example above, zero complaints would be counted for the subscriber).
46. Should the subscriber's delivery directions and request default as the redeliver instructions for complaints? BCP (Client) When entering a complaint that should be redelivered, the delivery directions for the address and delivery instructions for the occupant can default in the Redeliver Instructions window, based on this setting.
47. Can a route be assigned during a complaint when the subscriber's address is not route accessible? BCP (Client) When entering complaints for a mail subscriber, the paper can be flagged for redelivery and a route specified. If the address is marked as route inaccessible, a route may or may not be entered, as determined by this setting.
48. Is a source code required for a move? BCP (Client) It may be important to track the source of a move request for analysis.
49. Is a source code required for a subscriber billing method change? BCP (Client) It may be important to track the source of a subscriber billing method change for analysis.
50. Is a source code required for a route reassignment? BCP (Client) It may be important to track the source of a route reassignment, for example, if a route boundary changes and you want to differentiate between such a change and a change initiated by the subscriber.
51. Is a source code required for a delivery schedule change? BCP (Client) It may be important to track the source of a delivery schedule change for analysis.
52. Is a source code required for a temporary address? BCP (Client) It may be important to track the source of a temporary address, for analysis.
53. Is a source code required for a restart? BCP (Client) It may be important to track the source of a restart, for example, if a carrier reports a restart and you want to differentiate between such a restart and a restart initiated by the subscriber.
54. How many days will you allow a transaction to be backdated? BCPDv (Client) In some cases, it may be desirable to backdate a transaction. The number of days a transaction may be backdated is established by this setting. The default number of days is 0. Backdated transactions will not change draw or AAM history for previous publishing days.
55. Should backdated transactions create draw adjustments between associated routes? BCP (Client) At times, transactions performed at an agent level are not reported to the newspaper until after they have occurred. For example, a subscriber may start a subscription on Monday, but the newspaper may not be notified until Wednesday. In this instance, the agent provides the paper to the subscriber from a specific single copy route until the regular route draw is updated. This Business Rule allows this draw movement to be corrected through draw adjustments between home delivery and single copy routes as the start transaction is processed. Setting this Business Rule to “yes” will require home delivery routes to be linked to a single copy route; otherwise, backdated subscription transactions will not be processed.
56. Which draw adjustment code should be used to create a charge for copies added to associated home delivery routes? BCP (Client)
57. Which draw adjustment code should be used to create a credit for copies deducted from associated home delivery routes? BCP (Client) If the above rule about backdated transactions is set to “yes”, enter the draw adjustment codes to be used for home delivery routes. Enter an adjustment code for copies added, as well as an adjustment code for copies deducted. Codes are limited to those for which IsReturn=“no”, AdjustAAMHistory=“yes”, and ChargeCarrier=“yes”.
58. Which draw adjustment code should be used to create a charge for copies added to associated single copy routes? BCP (Client)
59. Which draw adjustment code should be used to create a credit for copies deducted from associated single copy routes? BCP (Client) If the above rule about backdated transactions is set to “yes”, enter the draw adjustment codes to be used for single copy routes. Enter an adjustment code for copies added, as well as an adjustment code for copies deducted. Codes are limited to those for which IsReturn=“no”, AdjustAAMHistory=“yes”, and ChargeCarrier=“yes”.
60. Should carrier collect subscriptions be assigned a rate code? BCP (Client) It is not necessary to establish rates for carrier collect subscribers, since they will not receive a renewal notice. However, if collection invoices are given to carriers for the purpose of collecting from carrier collect subscribers, a rate must be assigned to these subscribers. In addition, if subscribers tend to move between office pay and carrier collect, then it is best to assign a rate to the carrier collect subscribers at the time the start is entered.
61. Should available refunds be applied to former subscribers when they start again? BCP (Client) Customers may have refunds available if they stop permanently before their expire date. If a new start is then entered, the refund amount may be automatically applied to the new subscription.
If Yes:
62. Which source code should be used when an available refund is automatically applied to a former subscriber during a start? BCP (Client) Applying an available refund amount to a new subscription requires a source code.
63. Which reason code should be used when an available refund is automatically applied to a former subscriber during a start? BCP (Client) A reason code is also required when applying a subscriber’s available refund amount to a new subscription. The reason code must be valid for Transfer type transactions (in effect, you are transferring the refund to the same subscription).
64. Should available refunds be automatically applied during a billing change to office pay? BCP (Client) If a billing change switches a customer with an available to office pay, the refund balance amount can be applied to the subscription, based on this parameter.
If Yes:
65. Which source code should be used when automatically applying available refunds during billing changes to office pay? BCP (Client)
66. Which reason code should be used when automatically applying available refunds during billing changes to office pay? BCP (Client) If applying available refunds as part of a billing change, specify the source and reason codes that should be used with the transfer in/out transactions that will transfer in the refund amount.
67. Should manually entered messages for subscribers be retained as transactions? BCP (Client) Messages can be entered for individual subscribers, and print on bundle tops, display for dispatchers, etc. Your newspaper may or may not want permanent message transactions to be created when messages are entered. If this rule is set to “yes”, messages will be retained and you will be able to view them just like other subscriber transactions. If this rule is set to “no”, subscriber messages will be purged with other messages at the end of the applicable publishing run.
68. How many days do you want to retain messages before End Publ Run deletes them? BCP (Client) The End Publ Run option typically purges all carrier and subscriber messages after they have printed on bundle tops, and if they have an end date earlier than the process date. This setting allows you to retain these messages for a defined number of days, rather than purging them immediately. This allows you to rerun bundles with subscription-related messages after closing a publishing run. The default setting is one day.
69. How many days must an office pay subscriber be temp stopped before the system resends the last invoice or renewal? BCP (Client) Renewal notices and invoices can be resent to subscribers who have been temp stopped for a given number of days. If a subscriber qualifies for a resent renewal, the renewal number for the subscriber will be decreased by one when the restart processes. For example, if a subscriber who has been sent a first renewal temp stops for 10 days and this rule is set to 8, transaction processing will set the renewal number for the subscriber from 2 back to 1 as part of the restart. The renewal notice will then be resent the next time first renewals are processed. Note that this rule uses the calendar days (not publishing days) that the subscriber is temp stopped. The default is 999.
70. What is the permanent stop reason that should update a carrier collect subscriber’s credit status? BCP (Client) All occupants are assigned a credit status, which determines whether they can start a subscription, among other things. An office pay subscriber’s credit status may change when their subscription expires. But carrier collect subscribers do not have expire dates—the subscriber or their carrier must call in to stop the subscription. However, you can change a carrier collect subscriber’s credit status when their subscription is stopped, by setting this rule. Enter the stop reason code that will cause a carrier collect subscriber’s credit status to change. All carrier collect stop transactions entered with this reason code will change the subscriber’s credit status to the status entered for the next rule. If you will not be using this feature, leave the setting blank.
71. What credit status should be assigned to a carrier collect subscriber permanently stopped with a rules defined reason? BCP (Client) If you entered a stop reason code for the previous rule, enter a credit status here. When a stop transaction with that reason code is processed for a carrier collect subscriber, the subscriber’s credit status will be changed to the status entered here.
72. If a subscriber perm stops on a non-refundable rate, what donation code should the subscriber’s balance be applied to? B (Client) Subscribers on non-refundable rates should not receive refunds when they permanently stop with a balance. Instead, their balance will be applied to a donation code. Enter the donation code here. It must have a type of “GLAccount” or “Specific Carrier”.
73. Do you want to maintain an occupant’s credit status by product? B (Client) An occupant’s credit status determines how many grace days they are allowed after a subscription has expired, among other things. By setting this rule to “yes”, you can allow an occupant to have different credit statuses for each product. For example, an occupant might have a credit status of “Good” for the Tribune, but “Bad” for the Star.
74. Do you want a detailed product query when entering a start in Customer Service? BCP (Client) When the associate presses F2 for a lookup in a Product field, valid products will display. However, if F2 is pressed in the Product field during a new start and this rule is set to “yes”, the lookup will display not only valid products, but also the default route (determined by the router), carrier, valid delivery schedules, and other information for each product.
75. Are previous delivery requests allowed for restarts? BCP (Client) Newspapers may offer new subscribers a previous day’s paper for free. For example, the previous Sunday’s paper may be offered to a subscriber who starts on a Wednesday, and be delivered with the Wednesday paper. Restarts can also be offered a previous paper. This setting determines whether previous papers can be delivered to subscribers that restart.
76. Are previous delivery requests allowed for schedule changes? BCP (Client) In addition to starts and restarts, a subscriber may be offered a previous paper during a delivery schedule change. For example, a previous Sunday’s paper may be offered to a subscriber changing from Monday-Friday to 7-day.
77. When entering a start transaction, what is default answer for the previous paper delivery prompt? BCP (Client) This determines the initial setting of the Prev Delivery field, and can be set to “yes”, “no”, or “Blank” (nothing defaults in the field).
78. When entering a restart transaction, what is default answer for the previous paper delivery prompt? BCP (Client) This is the same as the setting above, only it applies to restarts.
79. May the subscription renewal delivery method be overridden during a new start or billing change transaction? BCP (Client) Renewal notices are most often mailed by the newspaper, but notices for route-delivered subscribers can also be delivered by the carrier of the route or sent via e-mail. A subscriber whose renewal notices would normally be carrier-delivered may request that the notices be mailed instead. This setting determines whether the delivery method of the renewal notice can be changed to mail-delivered or e-bill, as part of a new start or billing change.
80. What is the default source code for a billing change created by the reroute utility? BCP (Client) When a subscriber’s route is changed by the mass reroute utility (Utilities | Subscription/Address | Rerouting), billing changes occasionally need to be made. This happens, for example, when a subscriber who is office pay is rerouted to a route that does not allow office pay subscribers—so a billing change is created to change the subscriber to carrier collect. This and the following rule determine the default source and reason code for these billing change transactions.
81. What is the default reason code for a billing change created by the reroute utility? BCP (Client) Enter the default reason code for billing changes created by mass rerouting (as described in the previous rule).
82. Which file map should be used to create the Dispatch Interface? B (Client) The Dispatch Interface uses a file map when exporting information. Enter the name of a file map with a usage of “DispatchExport.” Two predefined file maps can also be used: Dispatch (the standard format, which defaults) and DispatchPlus (the standard format plus the Redelivery and Dispatch flags).
83. Should the Dispatch Interface create separate files by product? B (Client) This setting allows separate export files to be generated for each product.
84. What is the area code of the vendor modem used with the Dispatch Interface? BCP (Client) Optionally, enter the area code of the vendor modem to be exported using the Dispatch Interface.
85. What is the phone number of the vendor modem used with the Dispatch Interface? BCP (Client) Optionally, enter the phone number of the vendor modem to be exported using the Dispatch Interface.
86. What is the district manager’s phone type used with the Dispatch Interface? BCP (Client) Enter the phone type of the district manager’s phone number (work, cell, etc.) to be exported using the Dispatch Interface.
87. To which entity are items dispatched using the Dispatch Interface? BCP (Client) Enter the dispatching method that the Dispatch Interface will add to dispatch transactions in the database. This setting will populate the Dispatched To field in the Circulation Dispatching module. It shows the entity to which the item was dispatched.
88. Should the account’s name and address be exported to the Dispatch Interface when dispatched? BCP (Client) The carrier’s name and address can be added to the pager interface export file when dispatching shortages.
89. How many days of historical transactions should be exported using the Dispatch Interface? BCP (Client) Historical transactions can be exported to the Dispatch Interface when dispatched. This setting determines the maximum age of transactions that will be exported. If you enter “7” (the default), transactions entered within the last seven days will be exported. The maximum is 999.
90. Should messages display during payment entry for grace, tax or unallocated amounts? BCP (Client) When entering subscriber payments, messages can display when amounts are deducted to pay grace or tax amounts, or if there will be an unallocated amount (a leftover amount which is not enough to buy another day). The messages may be helpful to the associate, but also increase the time it takes to enter the payment. This setting determines whether the messages are displayed.
91. When a subscriber is in grace or has grace owed/written off, should the grace owed be included in the balance displayed? BCP (Client) Customer Service displays the customer’s current balance—i.e., the value of their subscription that remains undelivered. When the balance falls to zero, the subscription expires and the subscriber is either permanently stopped or goes into grace. Subscribers in grace, and those whose grace period has ended without a payment, may be looked at as having negative balances. This setting determines whether subscribers in grace or with grace owed are shown with a negative balance, or a balance of zero.
92. What is the default source code for bonus day transactions created during a start or delivery schedule change? BCP (Client) Bonus days are free papers given to subscribers outside of their normal delivery days (for example, a weekend-only subscriber who receives a New Years paper, even though New Years falls on a Monday this year). If the subscriber is to receive bonus day papers, BonusDay transactions will be created as part of a new start or delivery schedule change. This setting determines the source code to be used with the BonusDay transactions.
93. What is the default reason code for bonus day transactions created during a start or delivery schedule change? BCP (Client) Indicate the reason code that should be used with bonus day transactions created as part of a new start or delivery schedule change, as explained in the previous rule.
94. What is the default reason code for bonus day transactions for subscribers who opted out of bonus day papers? BCP (Client) It is possible to create bonus day transactions for subscribers who opt out of bonus days by using the Incl Opt Out Subscribers field in the Bonus Days specific of Delivery Schedule setup. The draw for these subscribers will be counted as unpaid draw in AAM reporting. This setting specifies the reason code that will be used for these bonus day transactions.
95. What is the reason code to use when a suspended subscription is restarted to process a stop? BCP (Client) Circulation has the ability to suspend route delivery on a given route, creating a temporary stop (suspend transaction) for the subscribers on that route. If a stop is entered for a subscriber on a suspended route, the stop will create a restart (unsuspend transaction) when it is processed, so the subscription will be unsuspended but stopped. This setting determines the reason code to use when the system creates unsuspend transactions for subscribers. This reason code must have a transaction type of “Restart” and UPDATE DRAW set to “n”. This and the following rule need to be set only if you will use Circulation’s suspend route functionality.
96. What is the reason code for the temp stop created when an unsuspend subscription is overridden? BCP (Client) If a customer on a suspended route calls in to stop the subscription, the associate can enter a stop for the subscriber (as discussed in the previous rule). Or, the associate can modify the existing temp stop (the suspend transaction) and set the Restart flag to “n”. If this happens, then a restart transaction will be created for the subscription when the route is unsuspended, as it will be for all the other subscribers on the route. However, the system will also create a new temp stop so that the subscription remains stopped. This setting determines the reason code to use if a stop is created in this scenario. This reason code must have a transaction type of “Stop” and PERMANENT set to “n”.
97. For combo subscriptions, should the suspend route process override the combo's setup for 'must stop together?’ BCP (Client) This parameter determines whether the Suspend Route utility can ignore the Must Stop Together flag in Combo setup when suspending a combo subscription.
98. What is the label to be displayed for an auto renew to bank account subscription? BCP (Client) Subscribers who renew their subscriptions automatically via a bank draft can have a special label displayed in the Bill Method field in the Customer Service window. The label itself is defined by this setting. For example, if “Auto Bank” is entered here, that will be the bill method displayed for auto renew bank draft subscribers. “Auto Renew Bank” is the default setting. This value can also be exported using the Subscriber Tax Export data element of “Auto Pay Type”.
99. What is the label to be displayed for an auto renew to credit card subscription? BCP (Client) Subscribers who renew their subscriptions automatically via credit card can have a special label displayed in the Bill Method field in the Customer Service window. The label itself is defined by this setting. For example, if “Auto CC” is entered here, that will be the bill method displayed for auto renew credit card subscribers. “Auto Renew Card” is the default setting. This value can also be exported using the Subscriber Tax Export data element of “Auto Pay Type”.
100. Should complaints associated with a formal complaint count towards the creation of a future formal complaint? BCP (Client)
If you are using Circulation’s complaint escalation feature, a formal complaint will be created if a subscriber calls in a certain number of complaints within a certain number of days. Once the formal complaint is resolved, any complaints entered will count towards a second formal complaint. The complaints that led up to the first formal complaint may or may not be included when determining whether a second formal complaint should be created.
For example, say the threshold for formal complaints is three complaints within three days, and in a three day period the five complaints were entered for the subscriber. If this rule is set to “no”, only one formal complaint would be created:
C, C, C, F, C, C (where C = complaint and F = formal complaint)
If this rule is set to “yes”, three formal complaints would be created because the first three complaints would continue to count towards future formal complaints:
C, C, C, F, C, F, C, F
101. For Note transactions, should the reason code display in the transaction window? BCP (Client) A note’s reason code may now display with the note in the Transaction window in Customer Service. For example, if the reason code is “FYI”, the note transaction will display in the Transaction window as “Note-FYI”.
102. Should a warning display during entry of a billing change if the rate entered is less than or equal to the current rate? BCP (Client) During a billing change, a subscriber can be assigned a different rate. If the new rate has a lower cost than the old rate, a warning message can display. The warning tells the Customer Service associate that the subscriber is being switched to a lower rate, and so prevent a discounted rate from inadvertently being assigned. This setting determines whether the message displays. When determining whether the new rate is cheaper than the old rate, Circulation will use the 1 day rate terms (average copy rates) or 1 week rate terms (rate by day rates).
103. Should the previous bonus day delivery request be retained when entering a start for a former subscriber? BCP (Client) Subscribers can be flagged for bonus day papers (papers delivered on days the subscriber would not normally receive a paper) as part of a start. This determines whether a former subscriber’s bonus day setting should be retained if they start a new subscription. For example, if a former subscriber had Bonus Days set to “n” in their Start transaction, if this rule is set to “yes” and they start again, Bonus Days will default to “n”.
104. When rerouting a subscriber, should the delivery placement be retained? BCP (Client) Subscribers can specify a delivery placement (a specific place, such as under the mat or in the door, where they would like the paper delivered) as part of a start. This can default from the router. When a reroute is entered, the delivery placement can also be changed. This setting determines how the delivery placement field defaults in a reroute. It can be set to “Retain if possible” (use the current delivery placement, if there is one), “Retain if overridden” (use the current delivery placement, but only if the default has been overridden), and “Use route’s default” (use the new route’s delivery placement, as defaulted from the router).
105. For adjustment only payments, what description should display in the transaction window? BCP (Client) Payments may be entered with only adjustment amounts (no payment amount). To differentiate these from regular payments, you may wish to have a different label display in the Customer Service transaction window; if so, enter it here. The default is the standard description for payment transactions: “Payment”.
106. For grace owed, what description should display in the transaction window? BCP (Client)
107. For grace paid, what description should display in the transaction window? BCP (Client) These settings allow you to customize the label of GraceOwed and GracePaid transactions that appear on the Customer Service screen. For example, GraceOwed transactions could be labeled “PastDue” instead of GraceOwed. Use these settings to assign a different name to these transactions.
108. Should multiple-day complaints be displayed as a single transaction? BCP (Client) Set this Business Rule to “yes” (the default) to display multiple-day complaints as a single complaint within Customer Service. When this Business Rule is set to “yes,” a multiple-day complaint will be displayed as “Complaints” in the Transactions tab in the upper-right corner of the window, with the number of individual complaints displayed in parenthesis. On the Transactions tab in the lower portion of the window, the number of individual complaints is displayed next to Incident Date field. The individual complaints themselves can be viewed by clicking the forward and back arrows next to the incident date.
109. Which solicitation code should be checked when displaying a Do Not Call indicator for an occupant in customer service? B (Client) If an occupant’s phone number is on a Do Not Call list, a DNC indicator displays by the phone number on the Customer Service main screen. Occupants who are not on the DNC list can still have the indicator appear next to their phone number, if you assign them the solicitation code entered here. For example, you might assign this solicitation code to an occupant who is not on the Do Not Call list but requests that the newspaper not call.
110. Should donations be allowed for subscribers in their grace period? BCP (Client) Donations can be made by subscribers in grace (i.e. subscribers who have no balance or a negative balance) during a stop or restart, as governed by this rule.
111. Do you allow subscribers to select both the Redeliver and Digital Access options for complaints? BCP (Client) If digital access can be offered to resolve a complaint (based on the Business Rule Do you allow access to the digital edition for complaints?), you can offer subscribers both digital access and redelivery to resolve a complaint, based on this parameter.
112. At which level can individual papers be selected to be held in a vacation pack within a temporary stop period? BCP (Client) This setting determines the level of detail at which subscribers can choose to have their papers held for vacation packs. It applies only to graphical Customer Service; in character Customer Service, the only options are to choose the vacation pack or not.
113. Should non-delivery accounts be included for sub-source types defined as carrier? BCP (Client) This setting affects source/sub-source setup. If you set up a source code to require a “carrier” type of sub-source, this setting determines if non-delivery carriers can be selected in addition to delivery carriers.
114. Do you support hybrid subscriptions? BCP (Client) Hybrid subscriptions are a combination of online and route delivery. Indicate here whether your newspaper offers hybrid subscriptions.
115. Do you allow a subscriber’s delivery address to vary by weekday? BCP (Client) A subscriber may wish to receive a newspaper at different addresses on different days of the week; for example, the office on Monday-Friday, and home on Sat-Sun. If you allow multiple delivery addresses on the same subscription, set this Business Rule to “yes”.
116. If multiple delivery addresses are allowed should the subscription rate be based on the primary address only? BCP (Client) Subscribers with multiple delivery addresses have both a “primary” address defined, as well as one or more “secondary” addresses. This setting determines if subscriber rating should account for multiple addresses or not (set up in Location Rule). Setting this Business Rule to “yes” allows a newspaper to, for example, charge more for multiple-address subscriptions.
117. What is the document name associated with storing renewal notice PDF files? BCP (Client)
If you make PDF versions of renewals available for viewing in Customer Service (the View Renewal button), this setting identifies the document name (established in Document setup) that will be used to establish the file-naming convention of the PDF files and the file path on your server where you store them. For example, you could set up a document called “Renewal” that uses a file name of <Subscription>Renewal<TranDate>.pdf and is stored in a folder called pdf/renewals. When renewals, invoices, or rebill transactions are displayed in Customer Service for this subscription, the View Renewal button will be active if a PDF file with this name exists in this folder. Clicking the button will show the PDF file. In this scenario, you would set this Business Rule to “Renewal.” Press F2 to select from a list of documents that exist in Document setup.
Note: To ensure the uniqueness of each document, it is recommended that you use at least the <Subscription>
and <TranDate>
tokens somewhere in the file name when setting up the document in Document setup. The <Product>
token can also be used.
118. What is the maximum days before the publishing date that a message may be sent to an agent? BCP (Client) Newspaper-defined messages can be produced and sent to agents on bundle tops (e.g., for expire alerts). These messages that can be based on the subscription rate code and number of days before of after the expiration date. This Business Rule allows you to define a maximum number of days before the publishing date that these messages are produced. The default is “999” days.
119. Do you use alternate account numbers? P (Client) If this Business Rule is set to “yes”, an external (alternate) account number can be imported for subscribers from a third party system via the Subscriber Activity Import, and displayed in Customer Service.
120. Should new starts that cannot be routed be suspended? BCP (Client) If a new start is entered for an address that cannot be routed, it will be suspended if this setting is “yes”.
121. Is a restart date required when entering a temporary stop? BCP (Client) If this Business Rule is set to “yes”, users must include a restart date every time they enter a temporary stop. The restart date will then be included on the message along with the stop notification.
122. When entering a fixed term start, what is the default answer to “Renew after this term”? BCP (Client) When entering a new start for a fixed-rate, fixed end-date subscription (such as for an NIE fixed rate), the Renew After This Term checkbox will default based on this setting.
123. Should the default date for Notes always be today? B (Client) When set to “yes,” the default date will always be today. When set to “no” (the default), the default date will always be the greater of the cutoff date plus one day, and today.
124. What is the reason code used to permanently stop subscriptions dropped from a combo during a combo? BCP (Client) The Business Rule determines the reason code to use when perm stopping a component subscription as part of an end combo transaction.
125. When displaying search results for Find Subscription, should phone number or other name be shown? B (Client) If this Business Rule is set to “Phone Number” (the default), the occupant’s phone number will be displayed in the search results. If it is set to “Other Name,” the occupant’s other name will be displayed instead.
126. Can a transaction which exceeds a security threshold be suspended? BCP (Client) When the security threshold is exceeded, the transaction can only be accepted (as suspended) if this parameter is set to “Yes.” See for more information on security thresholds.
127. What label group should be used for subscribers on digital vacation pack? BCP (NCS) If you offer digital vacation packs for temp stopped subscribers, specify the label group that should be used to determine the electronic edition offered. This will typically be a label group used for online subscribers.
128. Which AAM column should be used for reporting digital vacation pack draw? BCP (NCS) Digital vacation pack draw will be reported under this AAM column. At Cloud sites, the AAM column “oDigVac” will be added automatically, and Naviga recommends that setting.
129. What is the delivery schedule used for day pass purchases? BCP (Client) Although day passes are valid on any day of the week, day pass subscriptions must have a delivery schedule for validation reasons. The delivery schedule specified for this Business Rule must be a delivery schedule set up with a subscriber type of “Day Pass”. See the User Manual or more information about day passes.
130. When entering a make good day pass transaction, which subscription adjust code should be used? BCP (Client) If you allow make goods for day pass subscriptions (see the User Manual), the subscription adjustment code to use for the make good adjustment must be specified for this parameter. This adjustment code must have Cash Adjustment and Refundable set to “n”.
131. Which Adjustment Code should be used for Print Trial Subscriptions? Enter the adjustment code that should be used Print Trial Subscriptions. When a Print Trial Subscription Start Transaction is processed, an Adjustment Only Payment for the same Trial Length and Term is created using the Adjustment Code specified in this Business Rule.
132. Which Adjustment Code should be used for Digital Trial Subscriptions? Enter the adjustment code that should be used Digital Trial Subscriptions. When a Digital Trial Subscription Start Transaction is processed, an Adjustment Only Payment for the same Trial Length and Term is created using the Adjustment Code specified in this Business Rule.
133. What is the reason code for Trial Subscriptions? Enter the reason code that should be used when creating Trial Subscriptions.
134. What should be the maximum number of days for Trial Subscriptions? Enter the maximum number of days allowed for a Subscription during the Trial period. The value should not be more than 999.
135. What is the default Billing Change Reason Code for Discontinued AutoPay when Credit Card account is closed? Enter the default Billing Change reason code that should be used for discontinuing the AutoPay for a subscription when the Credit Card account is closed.
136. What is the default Billing Change reason code for change in Credit Card Details? Enter the default Billing Change reason code that should be used when changing the Credit Card details.
137. When a subscriber has unpaid fees, should the unpaid fee amount be included in the balance displayed? Default Value: Yes This setting determines whether subscribers with an unpaid fee amount are shown with a negative balance or a balance of zero.
1. In which country are the addresses primarily located? B (Client) This setting determines which is the primary country so that the country code will print on mail labels for addresses in all other countries.
2. Is the Address database shared between AM and CM? B (Client) At sites that have both Circulation and Ad Management, addresses may be shared in a single database and managed by the Household Management application. This setting determines whether Circulation is sharing addresses via Household Management. Contact the Naviga Support Center before changing the setting of this Business Rule.
3. Should the address be stored as parsed data elements within the Address database? B (Client) This setting determines how addresses are stored and displayed in Circulation, and whether parsed elements (such as House Number, Street Name, etc.) are required when adding addresses or are permitted when searching. Note: This Business Rule also affects iServices Subscriber. If it is set to “no” users will be unable to add or update addresses through iServices, and billing addresses will not be stored.
4. Should the city and state always be stored using upper case letters within the Address database? BCP This setting allows you to enforce upper-case cities and states in the address database.
5. What is the default area code format? B (Client) This setting determines how many digits are used for telephone number area codes, up to six characters. The default is “999”.
6. What is the default phone format? B (Client) This setting determines how phone numbers are displayed in Circulation, up to seven characters. The default is “9999999”.
7. What is the minimum length for phone numbers? B (Client) This setting determines the minimum length for phone numbers in an integer format. The default is “10”.
8. What is the maximum length for phone numbers? B (Client) This setting determines the maximum length for phone numbers in an integer format. The default is “10”.
9. What is the display format for fixed length phone numbers? B (Client) This setting determines the display format for fixed-length phone numbers. The default is “999-99999”.
10. What is the default area code and phone separator? B (Client) This setting determines the character used to separate the area code from the phone number. The separator will be displayed only on reports. On-screen display will not include the separator character, because the area code and phone number are distinct fields.
11. Are occupant email addresses required to be unique? B (Client) This setting can be used to prevent duplicate email addresses. When set to “yes”, an attempt to add an email address that already exists in the database for another occupant will result in an error, and the user will be required to enter a different email address. Also, users will be allowed to modify existing non-unique email addresses only to add an end date. Attempts to make other modifications will result in an error. The default setting is “no”.
12. Do you have route delivery? BCP (Client) If you have an independent delivery force of circulation (non-postal) carriers who deliver your publications and/or products, you have “route delivery.”
13. Do you have mail delivery? BCP (Client) If you rely on postal carriers to deliver all or a portion of your publications and/or products, you have “mail delivery.” If set this Business Rule to “no,” the mail-delivery-related features in Circulation will be deactivated.
14. Do you allow digital addresses? B (Client)
15. Does this publication support digital access? BCP (Client) This setting is used to distinguish between online/hybrid mail subscription records and actual mail delivery. Sites that offer online/hybrid subscriptions that do not include actual mail delivery should set this Business Rule to “yes” and change the setting of the Business Rule, Do you have mail delivery? (above), to “no.” Setting the Business Rules in this way allows a site to close publishing runs without having to do postal reporting. The default setting is “no.”
16. How many days into the future will you allow a transaction to be dated before receiving a warning? B (Client)
17. How many days into the past will you allow a transaction to be dated before receiving a warning? B (Client) These two Business Rules define the number of days into the past or future for which transactions may be entered. A warning will be displayed if the transaction date entered is greater than the system date plus the number of days defined here. This reasonableness factor will help to prevent obvious errors in date entry, such as 07-01-3000. The default is blank (no errors display).
18. Which day is considered the first day of the week? B (Client) This setting defines which day of the week is considered the first day of the week by Circulation. Whenever Circulation displays the weekday names, they will be ordered based on this setting. For example, if the first day is Monday, then the weekday prompts would be Monday - Sunday in customer service, returns entry, account billing draw/return calendars, etc. The default day is Sunday.
19. Which file format should be used for the general ledger export? B (Client) GL transactions may be exported in the DTI Standard format, or the Lawson format. The Lawson format is a licensed add-on.
20. Should general ledger transactions with a zero amount be exported? B (Client) GL transactions with a zero amount will be excluded when running Export GL, if this parameter is set to “no”.
21. Should the fiscal information of a GL transaction be based on fiscal period setup or the transaction (calendar) date? B (Client) When creating the ASCII file to interface general ledger transactions, Circulation can export either the fiscal period and year or calendar month and year for the transaction. For example, if fiscal periods were defined on a quarterly basis, a transaction on 12/15/07 might have a calendar month/year of 12/07 but a fiscal period year of 4/07. Your setting for this rule will depend upon your accounting practices. If you interface GL transactions to SBS, you must use calendar months/years.
22. Should a link to the source transaction be created when creating general ledger transactions? B (Client) When set to “Yes,” this Business Rule enables a GL transaction link to be created every time a transaction is written to GL. The default setting is “No.”
23. How many addresses should be displayed when searching and multiple addresses match the selection criteria? B (Client) This setting governs how many addresses display in the selection window when you are searching for an address and more than one address matches your search parameters. The default is “250”.
24. How many occupants should be displayed when searching and multiple occupants match the selection criteria? B This setting has the same role as the previous rule, but with occupants rather than addresses.
25. What is the maximum number of items that should display in an F2 lookup? B When you do a lookup in certain fields (by pressing F2), a window will appear with all of the valid selections for that field. This setting governs how many items will display in the selection list—which will impact how long Circulation takes to generate the list. If you enter “0” here, there will be no maximum for F2 lookups. The default is “750”. Note that this setting also controls how many reports appear when viewing reports in the View/Print Utility, and how many transactions display in the Transaction window in Customer Service.
26. Do you extend the subscriber’s expire date when they are on vacation pack stops? BCP (Client) Vacation pack programs are used by newspapers to retain subscribers by offering to keep papers for them when they are on vacation, then deliver the papers when they return. To make vacation packs more attractive some newspapers offer free days to subscribers who receive vacation packs. For this rule, indicate whether your newspaper has vacation pack promotions.
27. What is the maximum period a subscriber will not receive vacation credit? BCP (Client) This setting identifies the number of calendar days, starting at the beginning of a temp-stop period, that a subscriber will not receive vacation credit. Instead, the days will be donated using the donation code specified in the next Business Rule. Because these are calendar days rather than publishing days, the number of days actually donated will depend on the subscriber’s delivery schedule. For example, if a maximum period of seven calendar days is specified, Sat-Sun subscribers will be forced to donate only two days. If you want to force all days to be donated, set this Business Rule to a very large number such as 9999. The default setting is zero (no days donated). The vacation credit rules will only be applied if the reason code entered with the temp stop has Apply Vacation Rules set to “y”.
Note:
For combos, you can specify a different number of days for each component product, but the maximum number of days credited will be based on the primary product.
When changes are made to the vacation credit rule settings, subscribers currently temp stopped will receive credit for vacation days based on the old settings. Temp stops entered after the changes are made will use the new settings.
If not zero:
28. Which donation code is used for the portion of the vacation stop not credited to the subscriber? BCP (Client) This setting identifies the donation code to be used for the forced donation days. This donation code will not be available for stops or other transactions in Customer Services. Therefore Naviga recommends setting up a donation code specifically for vacation credit rules.
29. Should donations created from vacation credit rules be allowed for subscribers in their grace period? BCP (Client) This setting governs whether the vacation credit rules apply to in-grace subscribers (i.e., whether forced donations are allowed for subscribers who are in a grace period).
30. When the entire stop period is donated, should the restart be included in the subscriber billing export? BCP (Client) This setting governs whether or not the expire change information related to the system-generated forced restarts will be exported in the E1 record of the Subscriber Billing Export. Typically, the stop/restart is not shown on the bill if all days are donated, as it does not affect the subscriber’s expire date.
31. When stopping only print on a combo that has digital, must the customer donate all? BCP (Client) This setting determines if the entire temp stop period should be donated (print and digital) for subscribers stopping a combo subscription.
32. When stopping only print on a combo that has digital and donating all, what is the donation code? BCP (Client) This setting identifies the donation code to use for the print-only component’s temp-stop period when the above Business Rule is set to “yes.”
33. What is the default answer for using an existing router segment when adding one that already exists? B (Client) In Router Setup, when adding a router segment that is already in the database, the following question is displayed, “This router segment already exists. Do you want to use the existing segment? Answering ‘(n)o’ will create an overlapping router segment.” This setting allows you to define the default answer for this question.
34. Should private information such as credit card numbers and bank account info be encrypted when stored in the database? B (Client) Circulation allows private subscriber and carrier information, such as credit card numbers, to be encrypted in the databases. Encryption insures that this information is secure. This setting determines whether private data should be encrypted when it is entered.
35. What is the minimum number of days private information must be retained before it can be purged? B (Client) This setting relates the Purge Private Info option. Enter the minimum number of days that private information (such as credit card and bank account numbers) must be kept in the system before it can be purged using this option. The default is “365”.
36. When running programs on the History Purge menu, should data be exported before it is purged? B (Client)
Historical data can be exported before it is purged using the History Purge options. When this Business Rule is set to “yes” (the default), historical data will be exported to the /dti/exchange/cm
directory before it is purged. The file naming convention is Purged-[Date]-[Time]-[Table].d
(e.g., “Purged-032012-1103-RouteDraw.d”).
37. When viewing a report should the view window be resized? B (Client) When viewing a report, if the terminal type VT100 is being used, the screen can automatically resize to display all 132 characters. The screen will return to its normal size when the user is finished viewing the report. This is a useful feature; however, sites that use a Terminal Emulator that does not support 132 column mode may have screen-wrapping issues when viewing reports in 132 column mode. This setting determines whether resizing is done when displaying reports.
38. Can a user change an account’s address or occupant information outside of Account Services? B (Client) At the time a start is entered, the occupant name may be changed. If the name is already assigned to a carrier, you may not allow the customer service associate to change the name. For example, if Lee Johnson is a carrier and his wife calls to start a subscription, you would not want Lee’s name changed to his wife’s name.
39. How many days after last use do email addresses become outdated? B (Client) This rule allows you to enter a number the days that occupant email addresses are considered current in Customer Service without being used successfully or updated. For example, if you enter “30” here, an occupant’s email address is still considered current 29 days after the Last Use date. On the 30th day, the email address will be considered outdated, and the email address icon (envelope) in the Customer Service window will be displayed as tilted. This icon is a signal to the Customer Service associate that he or she should verify the occupant’s email address. The default is zero (e-mails are not considered outdated).
40. Which algorithm should be used for password encryption? B (Client) This Business Rule determines how occupant web passwords are stored.
41. What is the business unit when interfacing to the PeopleSoft accounting system? BC (Client) If you interface to the PeopleSoft accounting system, you must define the business unit here.
42. What is the operating unit when interfacing to the PeopleSoft accounting system? BC (Client) If you use the PeopleSoft3 file format, this setting populates the OPERATING_UNIT in the vendor file.
43. What is the prefix used for vendors when interfacing to the PeopleSoft accounting system? BC (Client) If you use the PeopleSoft3 file format, this setting populates the prefix portion of the VENDOR_ID field in the voucher and vendor files.
44. What is the publication code for accounts when interfacing to the Great Plains accounting system? BC (Client) If you use the Great Plains file format, enter the 4-digit publication code that will be exported when interfacing to AP.
45. What is the general ledger account number for accounts when interfacing to the Great Plains accounting system? BC (Client) If you use the Great Plains file format, enter the 4-digit general ledger account number that will be exported when interfacing to AP.
46. How many days should pass before transaction processing reports suspended starts that are awaiting payment? BCP (Client) This setting controls the number of days to wait before starting to log messages indicating that a suspended start awaiting payment was skipped. With a setting of “0” (the default), these messages will no be suppressed.
47. Should a batch ID be automatically generated if one is not entered? B (Client)
When set to “yes,” this Business Rule enables a batch ID with the format of
<RECORDTYPE><DATE><SEQUENCENUMBER>
to be generated automatically for the following processes: Account Payment Entry, Miscellaneous Charge, Batch Draw Change, Group Draw Change, Returns for a Day and Week, Returns Import, Route Returns, Adjust for a Day and Week, Draw Adjust Import, Single Copy Draw Import, Route Adjust, Batch Payments, and Batch Refunds. If this Business Rule is set to “yes,” users will not be required to enter a batch ID right away when using these options. If it is set to “no” (the default), then users will be advised right away that a batch ID is required.
48. What is the physical name of the database? B (Client) This setting defines the database name for the purposes of real-time payment authorization. The database name entered here must match the actual name of the database in order to allow real-time payment authorization to occur. Real-time payment authorization is not allowed on copies of the database. The intent of the Business Rule is to prevent payments when a live database is copied to a test database. If you want to use payment authorization in a test database, open the Progress editor in the test database and run the following program: display pdbname(“cm”) format “x(60)” Use the value returned from this program as the setting of this Business Rule (in the test database).
49. What is the host name of this server? B (Client) The production server host name is used when doing real-time payment authorization. If the server host name does not equal the value in the Business Rule (for example, it is a copy of the production database on the test server), the payment will not be sent to the authorization service.
50. What is the default output format for reports? B (Client) When saving a report, you can set the output format as Normal (text), PDF or (for some reports) Delimited in the Output field. This Business Rule determines the default output format. It will default to “PDF” for Cloud sites and “Normal” for non-Cloud sites.
51. What end date should be used for setting up GUI Calendars? Default Value: 01-01-2050 This Business Rule is used to set date range for GUI calendar module. This BR will be responsible for fetching the end date for anew start.
52. What are the valid values for address predirectionals and postdirectionals? Default Value: N,NE,E,SE,S,SW,W,NW This setting determines the pre-directional and post-directional for the addresses. The other values that can be set are: N,NE,E,SE,S,SO,O,NO and N,NE,E,SE,S,SW,SO,W,O,NW,NO.
53. Can subscribers opt out of vacation credit rules? Default Value: No This setting determines whether the subscribers can opt out of the vacation credit.
54. Should we allow authorized credit card payments to cancel in Pymt Authorization utility? Default Value: No This determines whether a PymtCancel transaction for an authorized credit card payment can be created when running the Subscriber Payment Authorization (Accounting > Subscriber Payments > Pymt Authorization).
The Business Rules in this section apply to Start transactions entered via iServices and the Circulation API.
1. When creating a start, if the address does not route what type of delivery should it be defaulted to? BCP (Client) This rule, and the level 2 rules below, allow you to set up default handling of addresses entered by subscribers on the web that cannot be routed automatically. This question assigns a default delivery type to addresses that cannot be routed.
If Route:
2. When creating a start, if the address does not route what route should it be defaulted to? BCP (Client) If you selected “Route” as the default delivery type, indicate which route the address should be assigned to by default.
If Mail:
3. When creating a start, if the address does not route what mail label group should be defaulted? BCP (Client) If you selected “Mail” as the default delivery type, indicate which label group the address should be assigned to by default.
If Online:
4. When creating a start, if the address does not route what online label group should be defaulted? BCP (Client) If you selected “Online” as the default delivery type, indicate which online label group the address should be assigned by default.
5. When creating a start, if the address does not route what AAM zone should it be defaulted to? BCP (Client) Every subscriber needs to be assigned an AAM zone. This rule allows you to assign a default AAM zone to addresses that cannot be routed automatically. You need to indicate which AAM zone should be assigned.
6. What is the host name for the StormPost server? B (Client) This and the next three Business Rules apply only if you integrate Circulation with StormPost to generate targeted mass e-mailings. Enter the settings expected by StormPost. The default is “”.
7. What is the URL for the StormPost server? B (Client)
The default is “/services/
”.
8. What is the class path for the StormPost web service? B (Client)
The default is “SoapRequestProcessor
”.
9. What is the WSDL name for the StormPost web service? B (Client)
The default is “wsdl
”.
The settings in this section are used by the Subscriber Activity Import option.
1. If a valid subscription ID exists should validation be done only on the house number and ZIP code? B (Client) This setting controls whether the occupant information should be validated when a valid subscription ID is found (either a Circulation subscription ID or an external subscription ID from another system). When this Business Rule is set to “yes,” only the house number and ZIP Code of the address will be validated if a subscription ID exists; first name, last name, and other occupant information will not be validated. The default setting is “no.”
2. Should the occupant's phone number be updated when the imported phone number does not match that of the database? B (Client) If the occupant’s phone number in the subscriber activity import file does not match the phone number in Circulation, it may be updated in Circulation, as governed by this setting.
3. Are ‘downgrades’ in delivery frequency (fewer days of the week) allowed when importing a delivery schedule change? BCP (Client) This setting determines whether delivery schedule changes can be imported when the new delivery schedule has fewer days than the old delivery schedule (for example, if the subscriber is changing from 7-day to Sunday-only).
4. Should a sub-source be created if the sub-source does not exist in the database? BCP (Client) Starts can be interfaced with subsources (for example, if the source is “carrier” the subsource might be the individual carrier responsible for the start). If the subsource is not defined in Circulation, this setting determines whether the subsource code should be created.
5. What is the complaint code for formal complaints created from complaints imported through Subscriber Activity Import? BCP (Client) If you use the Circulation’s complaint escalation feature, interfaced complaints may create a formal complaint. This setting determines the complaint code for the system-created formal complaint.
6. If an active subscription exists at an address, should a new start transaction for a different occupant be rejected? BCP (Client) If this rule is set to “yes”, any new start (office pay, carrier collect, paid complimentary, unpaid complimentary or third party) will be rejected when a subscription (active, pending or temporarily stopped) already exists at the address. The default is “no”.
7. Should a new start be rejected or suspended if the subscriber has a bad credit status? BCP All new starts will be either rejected or suspended when the credit status is defined not to accept subscriptions. The default is “Rejected”. (Client)
8. Should new starts that cannot be routed be rejected or suspended? BCP (Client) All new starts imported from the Subscriber Activity Import that are not routable will be rejected or suspended. The default is “Rejected”. (Client)
9. How should imported starts with a delivery method of mail be handled if the address is routable? BCP (Client) This setting determines if starts should be Accept(ed), Reject(ed), or Suspend(ed) when the delivery method is mail but the address is routable. The default setting is “Reject.”
10. Should an address be created if the imported address does not exist in the database? BCP (Client) This setting determines if an imported address that does not exist in the database should be created. The default is “No.”
11. Should billing changes to the same rate code be allowed? BCP (Client) Billing changes can be imported using the same rate code that the subscriber is currently on if this Business Rule is set to “yes”. If this rule is set to “no” (the default) such changes will be rejected.
This section of Business Rules will appear only if you have InsertPlus, another software program created by Naviga.
1. Do you want the advertising zone printed on the truck manifest for each route? BCP (Client) Advertising zones are geographical areas in which preprints are often sold. Ad zones are based on routes, and it may be useful to list the ad zone assigned to a route on the truck manifest.
2. Do you want the insert combination code printed on the truck manifest for each route? BCP (Client) A preprint can be scheduled to go to particular routes. This means that one or more routes may receive a unique set of preprints, known as an insert combination. It may be helpful to the distribution personnel if the code for each route’s combination is printed on the truck manifest (the code is a number generated by InsertPlus).
3. Do you want the advertising zone printed on the bundle tops for each route? BCP (Client) Ad zones may print on the bundle tops, as well as on the truck manifest.
4. Do you want the insert combination code printed on the bundle tops for each route? BCP (Client) Combination codes may print on bundle tops, as well as on the truck manifest.
5. Should a list of inserts that should be in a route’s newspapers print on the bundle tops? BCP (Client) A list of preprints that should be inserted in the newspapers going to a route may be helpful to distribution personnel.
6. Which demographic set will special handling routes belong to? BCP (Client) A “special handling” route is one that requires special handling during the insert process. For example, you may have several college dormitory routes that receive special inserts. Routes can be assigned a preprint demographic (also known as an insert group), and preprint demographics can be combined to form demographic sets (in InsertPlus). If you enter a demographic set here, all routes assigned to preprint demographics within that set will be marked as “special handling”. Bundle tops for special handling routes will be printed after other bundle tops, if you set the rule “What type of bundle tops should be printed separately?” (Route Processing section) to “Special” or “Both” (both special handling and hand-tie routes).
7. Should accounts ineligible for insert delivery piece/weight bonuses be eligible for insert-specific special bonuses? BCS (Client) Bonus rates based on the number of preprint pieces or the overall weight of the newspaper can be set up in Account Rates. Individual carriers can be set up as eligible or ineligible for these bonuses. Delivery bonuses for specific preprints can also be entered, in InsertPlus. This setting determines whether carriers ineligible for piece or weight bonuses can be eligible for preprint-specific bonuses.
8. What is the default number of days to display in the insert query? B (Client) Sites that have InsertPlus can view recent inserts that should have been delivered to subscribers in Customer Service; a similar insert query for routes is located in Route Service. This setting determines the default number of days for which inserts display in these queries, starting with the current publishing date and going backwards in time. For example, if you enter “5” here, all of the inserts that should have been delivered to a subscriber on the current publishing day and the previous four publishing days will display in the insert query. The default is “7”.
AUS
If the addresses in the Circulation database are primarily in Australia.
CA
If the addresses in the Circulation database are primarily in Canada.
FI
If the addresses in the Circulation database are primarily in Finland.
HN
If the addresses in the Circulation database are primarily in Honduras.
IE
If the addresses in the Circulation database are primarily in Ireland.
JM
If the addresses in the Circulation database are primarily in Jamaica.
NZ
If the addresses in the Circulation database are primarily in New Zealand.
SV
If the addresses in the Circulation database are primarily in El Salvador.
UK
If the addresses in the Circulation database are primarily in the United Kingdom.
US
If the addresses in the Circulation database are primarily in the United States.
Yes
Circulation and Ad Management addresses should be shared in a single database.
No
Circulation addresses should not be shared.
Yes
Addresses are stored as parsed elements, such as City, State, County, House Number, etc. These elements are required for entered addresses, and users can enter them during searches.
No
Addresses are stored and displayed as Address Lines 1 through 6. Fields such as City, State, County, and House Number are not required when entering addresses, nor will they be prompted for when searching.
Yes
Cities and states will be converted to upper-case letters when addresses are entered or imported.
No
Cities and states will be stored how they are entered.
-
A hyphen separates the area code and phone number.
.
A period separates the area code and phone number.
Blank
A blank space separates the area code and phone number.
Yes
If you have route delivery and want the route-related features to be active in Circulation.
No
If you do not have route delivery.
Yes
If you have mail delivery and therefore wish the mail-related features to be active in Circulation.
No
If you do not have mail delivery, and therefore wish the mail-related features to be inactive in Circulation.
yes
Digital Sales Workflow addresses can be entered in the system. The Digital Address checkbox on the Address tab in Customer Service is enabled.
no
Digital Sales Workflow addresses cannot be entered. The Digital Address checkbox is disabled. If this rule is set to “no” and an existing Digital Sales Workflow address is modified, the Digital Address box will be unchecked.
If an interface such as the Circulation API attempts to add a Digital Sales Workflow address when this business rule is set to “no”, an error is generated and the Digital Sales Workflow address is not added.
DTI Standard
Export GL transactions in the DTI Standard format.
Lawson
Export GL transactions in the Lawson format.
Yes
Zero amount GL transactions will be exported by Export GL.
No
Zero amount GL transactions will be excluded by Export GL.
Calendar
Use calendar months and years when exporting GL transactions.
Fiscal
Use fiscal periods and years when exporting GL transactions.
Yes
Vacation pack promotions are used.
No
Vacation pack promotions are not used.
Yes
Forced donations are allowed for in-grace subscribers.
No
Forced donations are not permitted for in-grace subscribers.
Yes
When all stop days are donated, the restart should still be exported by the Subscriber Billing Export.
No
Restart transaction should not be exported by the Subscriber Billing Export if the entire stop period is donated.
Yes
The entire stop period will be donated. The donation code that will be used is identified in the next Business Rule.
No
The “maximum period” and “donation code” settings described above will be used to determine the donation period and code.
Yes
The default answer to this question is “yes”.
No
The default answer to this question is “no”.
Yes
Private information should be encrypted.
No
Private information should stay unencrypted in the database.
Yes
The screen should be resized to display all 132 characters when viewing reports.
No
No resizing should occur when viewing reports.
Yes
If an associate may change the subscriber name while entering a subscription start if the occupant is a carrier.
No
If an associate should not be allowed to change the subscriber name while entering a subscription start if the occupant is a carrier.
ENCODE
Use the Progress ENCODE form for encryption.
MD5
Use the MD5 hashed form for encryption. MD5 encryption of web passwords must be used by sites using iServices authentication-only login integration with Tecnavia’s News Memory product..
SHA-1
Use the SHA-1 hashed form for encryption. SHA-1 is used by the AudienceReach/ContentPublisher web password synching process, and can also be used by iServices Authentication.
Normal
The default output format for reports is “Normal”.
The default output format for reports is “PDF”.
Yes
Payment Authorization utility will create a PymtCancel transaction for an authorized credit card payment.
No
Payment Authorization utility will not create a PymtCancel transaction for an authorized credit card payment.
Yes
Yes, the occupant’s phone number should be updated by the phone number in the subscriber activity import file.
No
The occupant’s phone number should not be updated.
Yes
Delivery schedule downgrades should be allowed.
No
Delivery schedule downgrades should not be allowed. A delivery schedule change containing downgrade will be rejected during the import.
Yes
The subsource code should be created in Circulation, if it is not already defined.
No
The subsource code should not be created. A start containing a subsource code that is not defined will be rejected during the import.
Yes
Print the advertising zone on the truck manifest.
No
Do not print the advertising zone on the truck manifest.
Yes
Print the combination code on the truck manifest.
No
Do not print the combination code on the truck manifest.
Yes
Print the advertising zone on the bundle tops.
No
Do not print the advertising zone on the bundle tops.
Yes
Print the combination code on the bundle tops.
No
Do not print the combination code on the bundle tops.
Yes
A preprint list should print on the bundle top.
No
A preprint list should not print on the bundle top.
Yes
Accounts should be eligible for preprint-specific bonuses, regardless of piece/weight bonus eligibility.
No
Accounts ineligible for piece/weight bonuses should also be ineligible for preprint-specific bonuses.
Yes
The start will be set as processed when a perm stop processes.
No
The start will be left suspended when a perm stop processes. This is the on-premises default.
Yes
If the router should be used to automatically determine the routes and delivery methods for subscriptions. Whether the operator may override route assignments is determined by another setting (below).
No
If the associate will manually determine the routes and delivery methods for subscriptions.
Yes
If the city and state should be used to route addresses.
No
If only the Zip code should be used to route addresses.
ZIP Code
If the Zip code was most commonly used when defining the street segments for a route in the router.
City
If the city was most commonly used when defining the street segments for a route in the router.
Yes
If the PO route type and route number should be used to route addresses.
No
If the PO route type and route number should not be considered when route addresses.
Yes
Use the full ZIP/postal code as the first search when searching for a router match.
No
Use only the first portion of the postal code when searching for a router match.
If a delivery method of “Mail” should be assigned by default if the router cannot find a route. This may be changed by the associate.
Operator
If the associate will be required to enter the appropriate delivery method for addresses that the router cannot route.
Yes
If the associate may change routes assigned by the router.
No
If the associate may not change routes assigned by the router.
Yes
If duplicate addresses may exist in the Circulation database. The next setting will define whether or not a warning will be displayed.
No
If associates will not be allowed to enter duplicate addresses.
Yes
If a warning message should display when a duplicate address has been entered. The associate may then either accept the duplicate address, reject it, or modify it.
No
If no warning message should display when a duplicate address has been entered.
Yes
If the street names will be set up and should be used for street name validation.
No
If the street names will not be set up.
Yes
Occupant names are displayed last name, then first name.
No
Occupant names are displayed first name, then last name.
Yes
If a subscriber has multiple subscriptions, all subscriptions will be listed in a popup window when entering a transaction.
No
If a subscriber has multiple subscriptions, the currently selected subscription will automatically be used for transactions.
Yes
Reason codes will be limited by product.
No
Reason codes will not be limited by product.
Yes
If entry of a source code is required for subscription starts.
No
If entry of a source code is optional for subscription starts.
Carrier Collect
If the carrier will usually collect the subscription payment from the subscriber.
Office Pay
If the subscriber will usually deliver the subscription payment in person or by mail to the newspaper office.
Yes
New starts can be entered in Customer Service with a billing method of “third party”.
No
New starts cannot be entered in Customer Service with a billing method of “third party”.
Yes
Retain previous billing address and occupant information when entering a start for a former subscriber. The associate may change this information.
No
Do not retain previous billing address and occupant information when entering a start for a former subscriber.
Yes
If a source code must be entered for each stop transaction.
No
If entry of a source code is optional for stop transactions.
Yes
If a source code must be entered for each complaint.
No
If entry of a source code is optional for complaints.
Yes
Subscribers can be offered access to the digital edition when entering a complaint.
No
Digital access cannot be offered to resolve a complaint.
Always
If you always want complaints to print on a dedicated printer at entry time.
Never
If you do not have a dedicated printer set up for printing complaints at entry time. Complaints will print on the Complaint Report.
Ask
If you have a dedicated printer set up for printing complaints but would like to ask the associate if the complaint should print.
Urgent
If you have a dedicated printer set up for printing complaints but would like to print only if the complaint is urgent.
Address
Only complaints at the address should be considered when determining whether a complaint should be marked urgent.
Occupant
Only complaints for the occupant should be considered when determining whether a complaint should be marked urgent.
Both
Both address and occupant complaints should be considered when determining whether a complaint should be marked urgent.
Yes
If delivery directions and instructions should default when entering redeliver information.
No
If no delivery information should default in the Redeliver Instructions window.
Yes
A redelivery route can be specified in a complaint for a subscriber whose address is route inaccessible.
No
Redelivery routes can only be specified for subscribers with route accessible addresses.
Yes
If entry of a source code is required for move transactions.
No
If entry of a source code is optional for move transactions.
Yes
If entry of a source code is required for subscriber billing method changes.
No
If entry of a source code is optional for subscriber billing method changes.
Yes
If entry of a source code is required for a route reassignment.
No
If entry of a source code is optional for a route reassignment.
Yes
If entry of a source code is required for a delivery schedule change.
No
If entry of a source code is optional for a delivery schedule change.
Yes
If entry of a source code is required for a temporary address change.
No
If entry of a source code is optional for a temporary address change.
Yes
If entry of a source code is required for a restart.
No
If entry of a source code is optional for a restart.
Yes
Backdated transactions should create correcting draw adjustments between routes.
No
Draw adjustments will not be made.
Yes
If carrier collect subscriptions should be assigned a rate code. When set to "Yes," the rate code/term/length details are mandatory, and failure to provide them will result in an error stating— "No value passed for required field, Rate, Term, Length combination not valid."
No
If carrier collect subscriptions should not be assigned a rate code.
Yes
Available refunds should be automatically applied to new starts, if applicable.
No
Available refunds should not be applied to a new subscription, but should remain available until transferred, issued as refunds or written off.
Yes
Available refunds should be automatically applied as part of a billing change, if applicable.
No
Available refunds should not be applied as part of a billing change, but should remain available until transferred, issued as refunds or written off.
Yes
Subscriber messages will be retained.
No
Subscriber messages will be purged at the end of the publishing run for which they are entered.
Yes
An occupant can have different credit statuses for different products.
No
An occupant can have only one credit status that applies to all products.
Yes
A detailed F2 lookup will display for the Product field during a new start.
No
An ordinary F2 lookup will display for the Product field during a new start.
Yes
A previous paper may be offered to a subscriber as part of a restart.
No
A previous paper may not be offered to restart subscribers.
Yes
A previous paper may be offered to a subscriber as part of a delivery schedule change.
No
A previous paper may not be offered to subscribers during a delivery schedule change.
Yes
The Prev Delivery field will default to “yes”.
No
The Prev Delivery field will default to “no”.
Blank
The Prev Delivery field will initially be blank.
Yes
The Prev Delivery field will default to “yes”.
No
The Prev Delivery field will default to “no”.
Blank
The Prev Delivery field will initially be blank.
Yes
A subscriber’s renewal notice delivery method may be overridden.
No
A subscriber’s renewal notice delivery method may not be overridden.
Yes
Separate export files are generated for each product by the Dispatch Interface.
No
A single file is exported by the Dispatch Interface.
Zone
Dispatch transactions are dispatched to a zone.
District
Dispatch transactions are dispatched to a district.
Service Area
Dispatch transactions are dispatched to a service area.
Truck
Dispatch transactions are dispatched to a truck.
Route
Dispatch transactions are dispatched to a route.
None
No dispatching method will be added to the dispatch transaction.
Yes
Export the carrier’s name and address.
No
Do not export this information.
Yes
Messages should display during payment entry for grace, tax or unallocated amounts.
No
Grace, tax, and unallocated messages should not display during payment entry.
Yes
Grace amounts should be deducted from subscriber balances, resulting in a negative balance for subscribers in grace or with grace owed.
No
Grace amounts should not be deducted from balances; a balance of zero should display for subscribers in grace or with grace owed.
Yes
Combo setup can be ignored, and a combo component subscription can be suspended without the rest of the combo being suspended.
No
If one component subscription of a combo is suspended and subscriptions are required to stop together, all subscriptions of the combo will be suspended.
Yes
A complaint attached to a formal complaint should contribute to future formal complaints.
No
A complaint attached to a formal complaint will not count towards other formal complaints.
Yes
The Note reason code should display in the Customer Service Transaction window with the Note transaction.
No
The Note reason code should not display in the Transaction window.
Yes
A warning message should display during a billing change if the new rate has a lower cost than the old rate.
No
No warning message should display.
Yes
When starting a former subscriber, the bonus day flag should default based on the bonus day setting in their former subscription.
No
Former subscriptions should not be considered when defaulting the bonus day flag during a start.
Retain if Possible
Default the subscriber’s current delivery placement, if there is one.
Retain if Overridden
Default the subscriber’s current delivery placement, if the old route’s default has been overridden. Otherwise, use the current route’s default (from the router).
Use Route’s Default
Use the current route’s default, based on the router.
Yes
All in grace subscribers can make a donation.
No
Donations can only be made by subscribers with a positive balance.
Auto Renew
Auto renew subscribers who are in grace can make donations, but no other in grace subscribers.
Yes
If a complaint is being redelivered, digital access can still be given.
No
Either redelivery or digital access can be selected to resolve a complaint, but not both options.
All Days Only
The subscriber can choose to have all papers held, or none.
Selected Weekdays
The subscriber can choose to have papers held on specified weekdays during the vacation period (e.g., every Wednesday and Sunday), or to have all papers held.
Specific Dates
The subscriber can choose to have papers held for specific dates during the vacation period (e.g., 2/14, 2/17, 2/20), or selected weekdays, or to have all papers held.
Yes
Non-delivery carriers are valid sub-sources.
No
Only delivery carriers are valid sub-sources.
Yes
Hybrid subscriptions are supported.
No
Hybrid subscriptions are not supported.
Yes
Multiple delivery addresses are allowed.
No
Multiple delivery addresses are not allowed.
Yes
Subscriber rating should account for multiple addresses.
No
Subscriber rating should use the primary address only.
Yes
Alternate account numbers can be imported for subscriptions.
No
Alternate account numbers are not used.
Yes
Starts entered for an address that cannot be routed will be suspended.
No
Starts entered for an address that cannot be routed will be processed like other starts.
Yes
A restart date is required.
No
The restart date can be left blank.
Yes
The default answer is “yes”.
No
The default answer is “no”.
Yes
Transactions that exceed a security threshold can be accepted as suspended.
No
Transactions that exceed a security threshold cannot be accepted.
Yes
Unpaid fee amounts should be displayed in subscriber balances, resulting in a negative balance for subscribers.
No
Unpaid fee amounts should not be displayed in subscriber balances; a balance of zero will be displayed for subscribers.
The address will default to a delivery type of “Mail”.
None
If nothing is entered, the address will not be assigned a delivery type, and no route or label group will be assigned to it.
Online
The address will default to a delivery type of “Online”.
Route
The address will default to a delivery type of “Route”.
1. Will PostWare be used to produce subscriber mail? BCP (Client) Presort and Label are Postalsoft software products that have been integrated into Circulation for the purpose or sorting mail (Periodical and Standard A class) and designing label formats. Presort and Label give greater flexibility for sorting and designing mail labels. However, you may still elect to use Circulation programs for these tasks.
Yes
Use Presort and Label to sort and format mail labels.
No
Use Circulation to sort and format mail labels.
The following two rules apply only to Postalsoft. If Yes:
2. For how many days do you wish to retain Postalsoft data and work files? BCP (Client) If you use Postalsoft Presort and Label software, each mailing will generate work files, reports, and other information. This setting governs how many days the information should be retained before being automatically purged. The default is 7 days.
3. Will Postalsoft’s Desktop Mailer be used to print mail labels? BCP (Client) Desktop Mailer is a PC-based program that can be used to sort and print mail labels. Circulation is not integrated with Desktop Mailer, but you can, by setting this rule to “yes,” have Circulation export an unsorted address file that can be used by Desktop Mailer. The file will be created when mail labels are generated (in the publishing run or TM processing). It will be comma delimited, with each field surrounded by quotes; the file will be written to your PW/data directory and named <productid>dd.txt, where “dd” is the day of the month. Note that you will also need to create a .def and .dmt file in Desktop Mailer before the mail labels file can be imported.
Yes
Desktop Mailer will be used—mail labels should be exported to a delimited file.
No
Desktop Mailer will not be used and no delimited file need be exported.
4. What is the sort sequence for subscriber mail labels? BCP (Client) Mail labels may be printed in Zip code or user-defined Zip code order. This setting determines the order used to print subscriber mail labels.
UserDefined ZIPCode
If subscriber mail labels should print in the sort order established by the user. If this option is selected, the user will be prompted to define the order in the ZIP Label Sequence file.
ZIP Code
If subscriber mail labels should print in order by ZIP/postal Code, beginning with foreign (no Zip codes) and ending with zzzzz-zzzz.
5. What is the number of subscriber mail labels across one page? BCP (Client) Subscriber mail labels may be printed in one- to five-column format, depending on the number of columns specified here.
1
Print subscriber mail labels in one column.
2
Print subscriber mail labels in two columns.
3
Print subscriber mail labels in three columns.
4
Print subscriber mail labels in four columns.
5
Print subscriber mail labels in five columns.
6. Should subscriber mail labels print in horizontal or vertical order? BCP (Client) Subscriber mail labels may be printed in order horizontally or vertically.
Horizontal order of mail labels ordered alphabetically from A-I (assuming, for this example, that there is one mail label per letter of the alphabet) will print like this if labels are printed in three columns: A B C D E F G H I Vertical order of mail labels will print like this if labels are printed in three columns: A D G B E H C F I
Horizontal
If subscriber mail labels should print in horizontal order.
Vertical
If subscriber mail labels should print in vertical order.
7. Should subscriber mail labels print in ascending or descending sort order? BCP (Client) Subscriber mail labels may be printed in either ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) sort order, according to the sort order selected.
Ascending
If subscriber mail labels should print in ascending sort order.
Descending
If subscriber mail labels should print in descending sort order.
8. What is the number of lines on subscriber mail labels? BCP (Client) The number of lines from one subscriber mail label to another is determined by the number entered here. There are six lines per inch, vertically. The default number of lines is 6.
9. What is the width of subscriber mail labels in characters? BCP (Client) The width of subscriber mail labels in characters is determined by the number entered. There are usually 10 characters per inch, horizontally. The default number of characters is 30.
10. What is the starting position of the first column of subscriber mail labels? BCP (Client) The limitations (if any) of your printer and label stock will determine the print position, in characters, of the first character of the first column of subscriber mail labels. Assuming the type face is non-proportional and that there are 10 characters per inch, horizontally, enter the desired starting position for the fourth column of subscriber mail labels. The default starting position is 1.
11. What is the starting position of the second column of subscriber mail labels? BCP (Client) If subscriber mail labels are being printed in two or more columns, you must indicate the horizontal starting position of the second column of labels. Enter the desired starting position for the second column of subscriber mail labels. The default starting position is 35.
12. What is the starting position of the third column of subscriber mail labels? BCP (Client) If subscriber mail labels are being printed in three or more columns, you must indicate the horizontal starting position of the third column of labels. Enter the desired starting position for the third column of subscriber mail labels. The default starting position is 69.
13. What is the starting position of the fourth column of subscriber mail labels? BCP (Client) If subscriber mail labels are being printed in four columns, you must indicate the horizontal starting position of the fourth column of labels. Enter the desired starting position for the fourth column of subscriber mail labels. The default starting position is 103.
14. What is the starting position of the fifth column of subscriber mail labels? BCP (Client) If subscriber mail labels are being printed in five columns, you must indicate the horizontal starting position of the fifth column of labels. The default starting position is 0.
15. Should bag tags print for subscriber mail labels? BCP (Client) Bag tags may be printed for subscriber mail labels to identify the mail contained in the sacks provided by the post office. These bag tags may also be used to identify the mail labels for which they are printed. If you will use PostWare for mail sorting, PostWare will produce the bag tags (this setting will be disregarded).
Yes
If bag tags should print for subscriber mail labels.
No
If bag tags should not print for subscriber mail labels.
If Yes:
16. Should bag tags print at the start of a group of labels or at the end of a group of labels? BCP (Client) You may choose to have bag tags print at the start or end of a group of labels, depending on your labeling needs and the print order of your labels. In this version of the software, Start is the only valid option.
Start
If bag tags should print at the start of each group of labels.
17. What is the page length for a page of mail labels? BCP (Client) This is the number of lines to a page of labels. The default value is 66.
18. Do label groups represent separate mailings (e.g., from different points of entry)? BCP (Client) The label groups may define delivery to multiple post offices or they may represent different mailings to the same post office which need to have separate financial post office reports. When separate financial post office reports are required and will be submitted to the post office, the dollar figures must be rounded per postal standards on each label group’s report. When only the summary report will be submitted, rounding per postal standards is only required on the summary report.
Yes
Label groups represent different points of entry or different mailings. Separate postal reports will be submitted to the post office.
No
Only a single postal report will be submitted to the post office.
19. Will the Financial Post Office report be submitted for each label group? BCP (Client) Separate post office reports may be needed if delivery is made to multiple post offices.
Yes
Print separate financial postal reports for each label group.
No
Separate financial reports are not required for each label group. Print one financial report which is the total of all label groups.
Note: If you set this rule to “no,” you should also set the previous rule to “no.” If not, the Financial Post Office Report will process as though you set it to “no” anyway, and produce an error message.
20. In the Piece sections of the report, should Copies refer to “Average” daily copies or “Total” copies? BCP (Client) The Financial Post Office report is printed in two sections: Piece Rate and Pound Rate. For the date range covered by the report, the number of copies shown in Pound Rate sections is a daily average, and the number of copies shown in Piece Rate sections is the actual count. Enter “Total” to continue displaying information in this way. Enter “Average” to display the number of copies in Piece Rate section as averages rather than as totals.
Total
Continue to display the number of copies in Piece Rate section as totals.
Average
Display the number of copies in Piece Rate section as averages rather than as totals.
21. Should page breaks occur between mail label groups? BCP (Client) Mail labels are printed by label group. When the labels are completed for one label group, should a new page be started before printing the next group of labels?
Yes
A new page should be started at the beginning of each new label group.
No
A page break should not occur when a new label group is started.
22. Which walk sequence indicator, if any, should appear on the first line of the mail label? BCP (Client) There are several types of walk sequence delivery available from the USPS: ERCLOT (Standard A basic walk or lot sequence), ECRWSH (high density), and ECRWSS (saturation). WS is a general walk sequence label. Selecting a walk sequence indicator here means only that it will appear on mail labels; it does not indicate that these subscribers qualify for the walk sequence rate.
ECRLOT
“ECRLOT” should appear on the first line of the mail label.
ECRWSH
“ECRWSH” should appear on the first line of the mail label.
ECRWSS
“ECRWSS” should appear on the first line of the mail label.
None
No walk sequence indicator should appear on the first line.
WS
“WS” should appear on the first line of the mail label.
23. Should detail pages print along with the Financial Post Office report? BCP (Client) Circulation creates a number of “detail” pages showing how certain figures were calculated in the process of compiling the Financial Post Office report.
Yes
Print the Financial Post Office report detail pages.
No
Do not print the Financial Post Office report detail pages.
24. For which single copy type should mail labels print when using Postalsoft Presort and Label? BCP (Client) Note: This setting applies only to Postalsoft. Newspapers sometimes mail draw to single copy routes in remote areas. Circulation can be used (in concert with PostWare) to print “firm labels” for these routes, which can be useful to the distribution staff and the post office. A firm label is generated for each single copy route, so that all copies for the route can be mailed together as a single piece. The firm labels print the truck ID, route ID, and distribution information for the route. To produce firm labels, you need to set up a special single copy type for mailed single copy routes (see Single Copy Type) and enter the single copy type as the setting of this rule. You then set up your “mail trucks”, just like ordinary trucks: you create a special truck sequence for them, and place the routes on the trucks in the correct drop order. Firm labels will be created for all single copy routes that have the single copy type indicated here. The process for creating the labels is the same as for bundle wrappers for subscriber mail (see Specifics, Mail Truck): the single copy route information is exported to PostWare with other mail information when mail labels are produced. Note that you will need to work with Postalsoft to incorporate this information on the firm labels (which will be package or sack labels created in PostWare). Unless you will be creating firm labels, leave this setting blank.
25. If using Postware, do you mail with the category Automated Flat? BCD (Client)
Yes
The Automated Flat category is used.
No
The Automated Flat category is not used.
26. If using Postware and process mail for Automated Flat, what is the maximum weight in pounds for an Automated Flat paper? BCD (Client) This and the previous Business Rule work together. When the previous Business Rule is set to “yes” and the average copy weight entered in Press Room Entry is greater than the setting of this Business Rule (default is 1.25), the paper is considered “heavy,” and a warning will advise the user that it exceeds the maximum weight. When leaving the Run Date field of the Financial PO Report, if the previous Business Rule is set to “yes” and the paper is considered heavy, a warning message will advise users of that fact, and also that the Processing Category will be updated. When the Financial PO Report is processed, if the paper is considered heavy, the Processing Category will be set to “flat,” and Prepare Automation Rate Packages will be set to “n.” If the paper is not considered heavy, the Processing Category will be set to “automated flat,” and Prepare Automation Rate Packages will be set to “yes.”
Note: All of the credit card interfaces mentioned in the Payment Authorization sections require a separate license fee to use. Contact the Naviga Support Center for more information.
Important: If these settings are changed, you must close and relaunch all Graphical modules after the changes have been made.
1. Are credit card validation values (CID, CVV, CVV2) required when entering credit card payments? B (Non) A credit card validation value is a 3- or 4-digit security code found on the back of a credit card in the signature area. This setting can be overridden in Security.
Yes
The validation value is required when entering credit card payments.
No
The validation value is not required.
2. Should credit card validation values be retained until payment authorization is obtained? B (Non) A credit card validation value cannot, by law, be stored after the credit card is authorized. This setting determines if you will store these values long enough to obtain authorization.
Yes
Store the validation value until the credit card is authorized; then remove it.
No
Do not store validation values at all.
3. When not using real-time payment authorization, should authorized payments be exported by the batch export process? B (Non) This setting does not apply to real-time credit card authorization. Rather, it indicates whether you export credit card payments to a file that will be read by third-party software.
Yes
Export payments to a file. This is the on-premises default.
No
Do not create an export file.
4. Which product integration is used for real-time payment authorization? B (Non) Select the name of the system you use to authorize credit cards in real time. Currently, the possible settings are “DTI”, and “None” (the default).
DTI
Use the DTI Payment Authorization Service.
None
No payment authorization integration is used. This is the on-premises default.
5. Should pre-authorized payments be sent to the authorization service as a forced transaction? B (Non) A Customer Service associate may be required to call the credit card company to obtain authorization. If the credit card company authorizes the card, they will give the associate an authorization number to enter in the credit card window. This type of transaction is considered a “force” transaction.
Yes
“Force” transactions are allowed.
No
“Force” transactions are not allowed. This is the on-premises default.
6. After how many seconds should the validation process stop trying to communicate with the authorization server? B (Client) When attempting to communicate with the authorization server, the validation process will eventually time-out. Enter the maximum number of seconds that validation should be attempted before timing out. The default is 60.
7. If using DTI Payment Authorization, which third party payment authorization product integration is being used? B (Client) If using the DTI Payment Authorization Service, select your credit card payment authorization vendor here. All vendors are licensed add-ons—contact Naviga Support for more information.
bPoint
Payments will be authorized by bPoint.
Beanstream
Payments will be authorized by Beanstream.
Braintree
Select “Braintree” only if you use Off-Site Braintree (for off-site credit card storage). Select “None” if you use real-time Braintree (i.e., with on-premise credit card storage).
Cybersource
Payments will be authorized by the Cybersource hosted order page. Note that this product has been superseded by Cybersource SA and is no longer supported.
Cybersource SA
Payments will be authorized by Cybersource Secure Acceptance.
Edgil
Payments will be authorized by Payway Complete EdgCapture.
EPX
Payments will be authorized by EPX.
None
The DTI Payment Authorization Service will not be used.
PayPalHOP
Payments will be authorized by PayPal Payments Pro.
The settings of the next 3 Business Rules (8, 9, and 10), when combined into one string and entered in a web browser’s address bar, should open an XML document.
See the following example.
http://<iiS Host Name>/wspaymentauthorization/wspaymentauth.asmx?WSDL
In this example:
http://<iis Host Name>
is the host name,/wspaymentauthorization/
is the URL path, andwspaymentauth.asmx?WSDL
is the WSDL name.
8. If using DTI Payment Authorization, what is the host name for the DTI Payment Authorization server? BCP (Client) Enter the host name of the authorization service; for example: “http://qatest” or “http://10.121.1.186”.
9. If using DTI Payment Authorization, what is the URL Path for the DTI Payment Authorization service? BCP (Client) Enter the URL path of the authorization service. This setting defaults to the standard value used in the installation instructions; for example: “/wspaymentauthorization/”.
10. If using DTI Payment Authorization, what is the WSDL name for the DTI Payment Authorization service? BCP (Client) Enter the WSDL name. This setting defaults to the standard value used in the installation instructions; for example: “wspaymentauth.asmx?WSDL”
11. If using DTI Payment Authorization, do you want to prevent transactions from being processed against this database? BCP (Non) Set this Business Rule to “yes” during the initial setup of payment authorization while testing with a demo or test account. When switching over to live mode or when testing against a real merchant account, set this Business Rule to “no”.
12. If using Hosted Order Page, what is the host name of the service that you use? B (Client) If using the Hosted Order Page, enter the name, URL and redirect URL in these parameters. They will vary based on your payment authorization vendor.
13. If using Hosted Order Page, what is the host URL of the service that you use? B (Client)
14. If using Hosted Order Page, what is the host URL of the redirect page that you use? B (Client) The default redirect is “cmshare/http/echo.html”.
15. If using Beanstream, what is the web service URL for the authorization server? B (Client) The default is “https://www.beanstream.com/scripts/process_transaction.asp”.
16. If using Beanstream Hosted Page, what is the web service URL for the lookup request? B (Client) The default is “https://www.beanstream.com/scripts/payment_profile.asp”.
17. If using Beanstream Hosted Page, what merchant ID should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client) This will be provided by Beanstream.
18. If using Beanstream Hosted Page, what API access passcode should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client) This will be provided by Beanstream.
19. If using Beanstream Hosted Page, what hash key should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client) This will be provided by Beanstream.
See FAQ #125: bPoint Hosted Order Page Setup
for more information about bPoint.
20. If using bPoint API, what merchant ID should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client)
21. If using bPoint API, what billing code should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client)
22. If using bPoint API, what user name should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client)
23. If using bPoint API, what password should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client)
24. If using bPoint API, what is the full URL for the bPoint authorization service? BC (Client)
25. If using bPoint API, what is the full URL for the bPoint token lookup service? BC (Client).
26. If using bPoint Hosted Page, should transactions be processed against the production environment? BC (Client)
The default is blank for Cloud sites and “no” for on-premises sites.
To implement bPoint skipping the Expire Date check (designed for use with Auto Renew), the value of TxnType can be set in the PAS (in version 8.11.50 and higher) to ‘RECURRING’ based on the name of the Batch. This change will set the TxnType flag to 'RECURRING' for any batch where the name begins with 'ZC' (case insensitive). 'ZC' is used for the names of the auto renew batches, so 'RECURRING' will be used for auto renew.
This value (ZC) is set by default in the PAS, and can be changed by putting the following line in the AppSettings section of the web.config file:
<add key="BPointAutoRenewBatchStartsWith" value="ab" />
In this example, it would use the 'RECURRING' flag for any batch that begins with 'AB' (again, case insensitive).
The following line can be used to force the hard coding of the TxnType parameter to either 'CALL_CENTRE' (which matches behavior before this change), or 'RECURRING' (which would prevent expire date checking for all transactions, even single payments).
<add key="BPointTxnType" value="CALL_CENTRE" />
or
<add key="BPointTxnType" value="RECURRING" />
27. If using Braintree, what is the host name for the Braintree authorization server? B (Client) Enter the host name; for example, secure.braintreepaymentgateway.com.
28. If using Braintree, what is the URL path for the Braintree authorization server? B (Client) Enter the URL path; for example, /api/transact.php. The settings of this and the previous Business Rule, when combined into one string, should point to the location where transactions are sent. For example: https://secure.braintreepaymentgateway.com/api/transact.php
29. If using Braintree, what is the local port for the Braintree authorization server? B (Client) Enter the local port. The default is 443.
30. If using Braintree, what user name should be used in authorization requests? B (Client) Enter the user name for authorization requests. The answer will be encrypted.
31. If using Braintree, what password should be used in authorization requests? B (Client) Enter the password for authorization requests. The answer will be encrypted.
32. If using Braintree, what processor ID should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client) Enter the processor ID; for example, ccprocessora.
33. If using Braintree Hosted Page, what merchant ID should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client)
34. If using Braintree Hosted Page, what hosted page ID should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client)
35. If using Braintree Hosted Page, what public key should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client)
36. If using Braintree Hosted Page, what private key should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client)
37. If using Braintree Hosted Page, what merchant account ID should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client)
38. If using Braintree Hosted Page, should transactions be processed against the production environment? BC (Client) The default is “no”.
39. If using Braintree Hosted Page, do you allow payments to be entered for expired credit cards? BC (Client) This setting indicates whether the Hosted Order Page or the credit card processor validate the credit card expire date.
Yes
Payments can be entered for expired credit cards (validation by credit card processor).
No
Payments cannot be entered for expired credit cards (validation by the HOP).
40. If using Cybersource, what currency should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client)
41. If using Cybersource, what merchant ID should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client)
42. If using Cybersource, what is the host name for the Cybersource authorization server? B (Client)
43. If using Cybersource, what is the URL path for the Cybersource authorization server? B (Client)
44. If using Cybersource Hosted Order Page, what is the merchant ID that you use? BC (Client)
45. If using Cybersource Hosted Order Page, what is the serial number that you use? BC (Client)
46. If using Cybersource Hosted Order page, what is the shared secret key that you use? BC (Client)
47. If using Cybersource Secure Acceptance, what is the profile ID that you use? BC (Client) You will be given the profile ID when configuring Secure Acceptance at the Cybersource website. You should also answer this Business Rule in the iServices admin module, if applicable.
48. If using Cybersource Secure Acceptance, what is the access key that you use? BC (Client) You will be given the access key with the profile ID when configuring Secure Acceptance.
49. If using Cybersource Secure Acceptance, what is the locale that you use? BC (Client) The default is “EN” (English).
50. If using Cybersource Secure Acceptance, what is the shared secret key that you use? BC (Client) You will be given the secret key with the profile ID when configuring Secure Acceptance. You must set this Business Rule in the Oversized Rules option.
51. If using Edgil, which version of Edgil are you using? BC (Client) Indicate which Edgil interface you are using. This setting dictates the Edgil version to which the remainder of the Edgil-related Business Rules apply.
.Net
The Edgil .Net interface is being used.
Original
The the original Edgil interface. This is the on-premises default.
Web Service
The Edgil Web Service interface is being used.
52. If using Edgil, what user name should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client) Enter the user name that should be sent for authorization requests.
53. If using Edgil, what password should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client) Enter the password that should be sent for authorization requests.
54. If using Edgil, what order entry process ID (OEP ID) should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client) The merchant and OEP IDs defined here will be exported to the Edgil file.
55. If using Edgil, what merchant ID should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client) The merchant and OEP IDs defined here will be exported to the Edgil file.
56. If using Edgil Web Service, should transactions be processed against the production environment? BC (Client) This setting indicates whether the production environment is in use when using the Web Service version of Edgil. The default setting is “no.”
57. If using EPX API, what customer number should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client) The customer number is required for authorization requests. It is provided by EPX.
58. If using EPX API, what merchant number should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client) The merchant number is required for authorization requests. It is provided by EPX.
59. If using EPX API, what DBA number should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client) The DBA number is required for authorization requests. It is provided by EPX.
60. If using EPX API, what terminal number should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client) The terminal number is required for authorization requests. It is provided by EPX.
61. If using EPX API, what merchant authorization code should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client) The merchant authorization code (MAC) is required for authorization requests. It is provided by EPX.
62. If using EPX API, what is the host name for the EPX authorization server? B (Client) Enter the host name of the EPX authorization service; for example, “https://secure.epxuap.com”. It is provided by EPX.
63. If using EPX Hosted Page, what is the KeyExchange URL that you use? BC (Client) Requests are made to the KeyExchange URL for a terminal authorization code (TAC) that is required to access the EPX Hosted Order Page. It is provided by EPX.
64. If using EPX Hosted Page, what is the Custom CSS URL that you use? BC (Client) This URL contains the custom stylesheet that will used with the hosted order page. Note: This setting is used only in testing environments. Custom CSS will reside on the server in the live environment.
65. If using EPX Hosted Page, what is the Custom JavaScript URL that you use? BC (Client) This URL contains the custom JavaScript that will used with the hosted order page. Note: This setting is used only in testing environments. Custom JavaScript will reside on the server in the live environment.
66. If using PayPal, what currency should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) Enter the currency that should be sent for authorization requests.
67. If using PayPal, what partner name should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) Enter the partner name that should be sent for authorization requests.
68. If using PayPal, what vendor name should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) Enter the vendor name that should be sent for authorization requests.
69. If using PayPal, what user name should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) Enter the user name that should be sent for authorization requests.
70. If using PayPal, what password should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) Enter the password that should be sent for authorization requests.
71. If using PayPal, what is the URL used to obtain a secure token and access the authorization server? BCP (Client) Enter the URL; for example, https://pilot-payflowpro.paypal.com/
72. If using PayPal, what is the local port for the authorization server? BCP (Client) Enter the local port; for example, 443
This section of Business Rules controls internet-based mapping features for viewing route maps, single-copy outlet maps and campaign results maps. iServices website locations are also mapped here.
1. Which system is used for presenting maps? B (Client) Specify the system you use to display maps.
Google Maps
Microsoft
Microsoft Virtual Earth
Placebase
Placebase PushPin LE
2. What is the host name for the related iServices Circulation server? B (Client)
Enter the host name; for example, “http://monolith.dti.com.
” The answer must begin with "http://
" or "https://
".
3. What is the URL path for the related iServices Circulation server’s application server messenger script? B (Client)
Enter the URL path; for example, “/cgi-bin/cmo_test.sh/
”.
This is used with e-mail confirmation messages and elsewhere.
4. What is the URL path for the related iServices Circulation server’s single sign-on PHP directory? B (Client) Enter the URL path; for example, “/cmo/php”.
5. For inbound URL parameters, what private key (character string) is used for encryption? B (Client) This business rule must be answered with a valid private key and the login information in the iServices Login page link contained in Circulation e-mail templates (eBill, digital vacation pack, etc.) must include a valid “&hash” parameter in order to pre-fill login information on the iServices Login page. If this business rule is not answered, or if the iServices Login page link does not include a valid “&hash” parameter, then the login information will not be pre-filled on the login page.
1. If using Loyalty, what is the host name for the Loyalty service? Enter the host name for the Loyalty service.
2. If using Loyalty, what is the stage of the Loyalty service? Default Value: prod Enter the stage for the Loyalty service.
3. If using Loyalty, what is the AWS API key for the Loyalty service? Enter the AWS API key for the Loyalty service.
4. If using Loyalty, what is the Newscycle API key for the Loyalty service? Enter the Newscycle API key for the Loyalty service.
5. If using Loyalty, what is the source system for the Loyalty Business service? Default Value: commerce Enter the source system for the Loyalty Business service.
6. If using Loyalty, what is the AWS Access key for the Loyalty service? Enter the AWS Access key for the Loyalty service.
7. If using Loyalty, what is the AWS Secret key for the Loyalty service? Enter the AWS Secret key for the Loyalty service.
8. If using Loyalty, what is the AWS Region for the Loyalty service? Enter the AWS Region for the Loyalty service.
9. If using Loyalty, what is the AWS IAM Role for the Loyalty service? Enter the AWS IAM Role for the Loyalty service.
The Business Rules in this section have meaning only if you have List MatchPlus, another software program created by Naviga.
1. What is the length in lines for one address card? BC (Client) The number of lines on an address card is user-defined. Enter the number of lines from one address card to the next address card. There are six lines to an inch. The default value is 18 lines.
2. What is the width for one address card? BC (Client) The width of the List MatchPlus delivery address cards in characters is determined by the number entered. There are usually 10 characters per inch, horizontally. The default value is 30 characters.
3. What is the number of cards that fit across one page? BC (Client) This defines the number of List MatchPlus address cards there are going across the page. The default value is 4.
The Business Rules in this section have meaning only if you have multi-factor authentication (MFA) enabled.
1. Which single sign on service provider do you use for character based application? Default Value: None This Business Rule defines the MFA service provider that will be utilized for user authentication in the Character User Interface (CHUI).
Press F2 button to display the available options, or enter “Auth0” or “OKTA” depending on the MFA service being used by the user.
If the value is set to "None," user authentication through MFA will be disabled in CHUI, and users can still log in to the application.
2. What is the URL of the redirect page that you use? This specifies the URL of the page where the response is intended to be received in Graphical User Interface (GUI). This is dependent on the user's environment (or login area). Example: /cgi-bin/cm43_test.sh/cmshare/http/response
3. What is the client ID for Auth0 application? This specifies the Client ID for the MFA service provider for both Character User Interface (CHUI) and Graphical User Interface (GUI).
4. What is the client secret key for Auth0 application? This specifies the Client Secret Key for the MFA service provider for both Character User Interface (CHUI) and Graphical User Interface (GUI).
5. What is the domain URL for Auth0 application? This specifies the URL path for the MFA service provider for both Character User Interface (CHUI) and Graphical User Interface (GUI).
6. What is the domain URL for OKTA application? This specifies the URL path for the MFA service provider for both Character User Interface (CHUI) and Graphical User Interface (GUI).
7. How long is the MFA security bypassed after the initial login for a character-based application? Default Value: 0 (zero) This setting determines the time duration (in minutes) for which the user would not require MFA authentication for a new session after the successful initial login through the MFA.
Note: Please contact Naviga Support (support@navigaglobal.com) for any required assistance.
1. What is the SOAP API URL to access Vindicia Retain? Enter the URL to access the SOAP API. This value is provided by the Vindicia implementation team.
2. What is the userid to access Vindicia Retain? Enter the user ID here. This value is provided by the Vindicia implementation team
3. What is the key to access Vindicia Retain? Enter the Key ID here. This value is provided by the Vindicia implementation team
4. What is the API version to access Vindicia Retain? Indicate which API version is to be used to access Vindicia Retain. For example, 1.1.
5. What is the maximum number of days Vindicia Retain will try transaction processing? Default Value: 7 This BR specifies the number of days we will allow Vindicia to attempt a failed payment on their end. When this number of days has elapsed, we consider that the payment was not successfully captured by Vindicia and make the required system updates.
6. What is the limit for records in one file sent or received from Vindicia Retain? Default Value: 200 This BR specifies the number of records we will get in a single file when we retrieve the payment records from Vindicia.
This section contains adjustment parameters and export codes for the rewards feature.
1. What is the minimum manual adjustment that can be made to a subscriber's reward account? BCP (Client)
2. What is the maximum manual adjustment that can be made to a subscriber's reward account? BCP (Client) Subscribers typically offer rewards by making payments, but their rewards amount may be modified manually. These two rules define the maximum and minimum amounts by which a customer’s rewards balance may be adjusted. The default of both is “0”.
3. What is your Air Miles Provider Code? BCP (Client)
4. What is your Air Miles Sponsor Code? BCP (Client)
5. What is your Air Miles Location Code? BCP (Client) If rewards are being tracked for an Air Miles program, enter your provider code, sponsor code, and location code in the Air Miles system.
Note: All of the credit card interfaces mentioned in the Payment Authorization sections require a separate license fee to use. Contact the Naviga Support Center for more information.
Important: If these settings are changed, you must close and relaunch all Graphical modules after the changes have been made.
1. Which off-site credit card storage and authorization service do you use? B (Client) Default Value: None This is the Business Rule that “activates” the Braintree off-site service or the Hosted Page. The possible settings are:
Braintree
You use Braintree for offsite credit card storage
Hosted Page
You use a hosted order page solution
None
You do not use offsite credit card storage
Note: Setting this Business Rule should be considered an irreversible decision. Once you activate the off-site or hosted service, you should never change the setting.
After setting this Business Rule, you must stop and restart all Circulation and other Naviga applications, such as InsertPlus, iServices, List MatchPlus, etc. All character-interface and graphical-interface sessions must be shut down and restarted.
2. Which hosted page credit card authorization service do you use? B (Client) Default Value: None A hosted order page is an offsite credit card authorization solution that works with Circulation. A credit card hosting company (such as CyberSource or Payway Complete) is interfaced directly with Circulation for data input, but credit card information never actually touches the Circulation application. In regard to PCI compliance, utilizing a hosted order page takes Circulation out of the picture entirely.
bPoint
bPoint hosted order page is used.
Beanstream
Beanstream hosted order page is used.
Braintree
Braintree hosted order page is used.
Cybersource
Cybersource hosted order page is used. Note that this product has been superseded by Cybersource SA and is no longer supported.
Cybersource SA
Cybersource Secure Acceptance is used.
Edgil
Payway Complete hosted order page is used.
EPX
EPX hosted order page is used.
None
A hosted order page is not used.
PayPalHOP
PayPal Payments Pro is used.
3. If using off-site Braintree, what key ID should be used in authorization requests? B (Client)
4. If using off-site Braintree, what key should be used in authorization requests? B (Client) The key ID (above: 3) and key are used for Braintree’s “transparent redirect” within iServices. They are access-control keys that iServices must provide, along with the Braintree user name and password (defined in other Business Rules), in order to gain access to the transparent redirect API associated with the Braintree account. This information is provided by Braintree and can be retrieved by selecting Options | Security Keys on the Braintree website after logging in. Both the key ID and key will be encrypted.
5. Should we allow authorized credit card payments to cancel in Pymt Authorization utility? Default Value: No This BR will determine whether a PymtCancel transaction for an authorized credit card payment can be created when running the Subscriber Payment Authorization (Graphical Accounting > Subscriber Payments > Pymt Authorization).
If the value of this BR is set to "Yes," the Payment Authorization utility will create a PymtCancel transaction for an authorized credit card payment.
When set to "No," the Payment Authorization utility will not create a PymtCancel for an authorized credit card payment.
6. When using Naviga Pay what site code is used for CM Account Payments? This business rule is used when we process Account Payments through Customer Service (CM). This specifies the name of the site code for the payment vendor. This value is provided by the payment vendor.
7. When using Naviga Pay, what statement descriptor should be used for one-time payments? Enter the default statement descriptor that provides an explanation of charges or payments on bank statements when making one-time payments through Naviga Pay.
8. When using Naviga Pay, what statement descriptor should be used for auto payments? Enter the default statement descriptor that provides an explanation of charges or payments on bank statements when making auto payments through Naviga Pay.
9. Will Naviga Pay be used as the payment gateway? Default Value: No This BR will determine whether Naviga Pay will be used as the payment gateway.
If the value of this BR is set to "Yes," Naviga Pay will be used as the payment gateway.
When set to "No," normal payment vendor will be used.
10. Should you use Naviga Pay for Bank Draft payments? Default Value: No When using ACH Direct Debit, this must be set to Yes; else, it should be set to No.
11. Should you use Naviga Pay for PayPal payments? Default Value: No This BR will determine whether Naviga Pay will be used as the payment gateway for PayPal payments. Set the value to Yes, if Naviga Pay is to be used as the payment gateway or else it should be set to No.
12. When using Naviga Pay what URL that should be used? This specifies the URL of the Naviga Pay Service Servlet. This value is provided by the payment vendor.
13. When using Naviga Pay what site code is used for NCS Self-Services Subscriber Payments? This business rule is used when we process Subscriber Payments through iServices or Subscription Link. This specifies the name of the site code for the payment vendor. This value is provided by the payment vendor.
14. When using Naviga Pay what site code is used for CM Subscriber Payments? This business rule is used when we process Subscriber Payments through Customer Service (CM). This specifies the name of the site code for the payment vendor. This value is provided by the payment vendor.
15. When using Naviga Pay what site code is used for NCS Self-Services Account Payments? This business rule should be used and answered in order to enable account payments through Naviga Pay Services. This specifies the name of the site code for the payment vendor. This value is provided by the payment vendor.
16. When using Naviga Pay what site key is used for Subscriber Payments? This business rule is used for Subscriber Payments iServices/Distribution or Accounting Service through CHUI/GUI. This specifies the name of the site key for the payment vendor. This value is provided by the payment vendor.
17. When using Naviga Pay what site key is used for Account Payments? This business rule is used for Account Payments iServices/Distribution or Accounting Service through CHUI/GUI. This specifies the name of the site key for the payment vendor. This value is provided by the payment vendor.
1. What is the override name for the Area reporting level? B (Client) A number of Circulation reports sort by area and region (routes belong to districts, which belong to distrib zones, which belong to regions which, finally, belong to areas). This rule and the next allow you to relabel areas and regions for reporting purposes. For example, instead of area and region, you might want your reports to print “department” and “sector”. If so, enter your label for areas here. The default is “Area”.
Note:
You should not use “region”, “zone”, “district” or “route” as labels for areas.
2. What is the override name for the Region reporting level? B (Client) If you want to rename the reporting level of region to something else, enter your label here. The default is “Region”.
3. When printing reports by district, should there be a page break between the districts? BCP (Client) There are many Circulation reports that sort by district. This setting determines whether the report should begin a new page whenever there is a new district.
Yes
Each district will start on its own page.
No
A new district will not start a new page.
4. Which sort sequence should be used for printing the Office Pay Audit report? BCS (Client) The office pay audit list may be printed in subscriber account, address, or name order.
Account
If the office pay audit should print in account order.
Address
If the office pay audit should print in address order.
Name
If the office pay audit should print in name order.
5. What is the first print position for office pay status cards? BCP (Client) This refers to the distance from the left edge of the paper to the first column on the carrier prepaid status card where printing should begin. There are 10 characters (columns) per inch horizontally. The default value is 1. Information that Circulation prints on the office pay status cards is shown in the box below. Data shown in parentheses prints without a heading (for example, subscriber name and address).
Note: You may have other information pre-printed on the office pay status cards, such as a header “PAID IN OFFICE” or “PREPAID”.
You define where the information should begin printing on the first and, if applicable, second cards.
6. What is the first print line for office pay status cards? BCP (Client) Your printer may be capable of printing on the first line of the carrier office pay status card, but you may prefer that printing begin, for example, on line 3. Enter the line number on which printing should begin on the carrier office pay status cards. There are 6 lines per inch. The default is line 4.
7. What is the last print line for office pay status cards? BCP (Client) Your printer may be capable of printing on the last line of the carrier office pay status card, but you may prefer that the last line of printing be, for example, on line 10. Enter the last line number on which printing should appear on the carrier office pay status cards. There are 6 lines per inch. The default is line 16.
8. What is the exact form length in inches for office pay status cards? BCP (Client) Account office pay status cards may not be a standard form length of 8.5 inches. They are often printed on continuous-form 3.5” x 5” cards. Indicate the exact form length here. The default form length is 4.25 inches.
9. What is the print order of the office pay status cards? BCP (Client) Office pay status cards may be printed in ascending truck or route order.
Ascending truck
If office pay status cards should be printed in ascending truck order.
Route
If office pay status cards should be printed in route order.
10. What is the number of office pay status cards across one page? BCP (Client) This defines the number of office pay status cards there are going across the page. The default value is 1.
1
There is one prepaid status card going across the page.
2
There are two prepaid status cards going across the page.
11. What is the starting print position of the second office pay status card? BCP (Client) If there are two prepaid status cards going across the page, this refers to the distance from the left edge of the first prepaid status card to the first column on the second prepaid status card where printing should begin. There are 10 characters (columns) per inch horizontally. The default value is 0.
12. What is the first print position on the collection card? BCP (Client) This refers to the distance from the left edge of the paper to the first column on the carrier collection card where printing should begin. There are 10 characters (columns) per inch horizontally. The default value is 9.
13. What is the first print line on the collection card? BCP (Client) Your printer may be capable of printing on the first line of the carrier collection card, but you may prefer that printing begin, for example, on line 3. Enter the line number on which printing should begin on the carrier collection cards. There are 6 lines per inch. The default is line 4.
14. What is the last print line on the collection card? BCP (Client) Your printer may be capable of printing on the last line of the carrier collection card, but you may prefer that the last line of printing be, for example, on line 10. Enter the last line on which printing should appear on the carrier collection card. There are 6 lines per inch. The default is line 10.
15. What is the exact form length in inches for collection cards? BCP (Client) Carrier collection cards may not be a standard form length of 8.5 inches. They are often printed on continuous-form cards. Indicate the exact form length here. The default length is 8 inches.
16. What is the print order of the carrier collection cards? BCP (Client) Carrier collection cards may be printed in ascending truck or route order.
Truck
If carrier collection cards should be printed in ascending truck order.
Route
If carrier collection cards should be printed in route order.
17. What is the number of collection cards across one page? BCP (Client) This defines the number of carrier collection cards there are going across the page.
1
There is one carrier collection card going across the page.
2
There are two carrier collection cards going across the page.
18. What is the starting print position for the second collection card? BCP (Client) If there are two carrier collection cards going across the page, this refers to the distance from the left edge of the first carrier collection card to the first column on the second carrier collection card where printing should begin. There are 10 characters (columns) per inch horizontally. The default value is 52.
19. What is the width of the address and name lines that print on collection cards? BCP (Client) This defines the maximum width available for the address line on the carrier collection cards. The default value is 30 characters.
20. Should carrier collect cards print on a label or a card? BCP (Client) Carrier collection cards may be printed on labels or cards. Depending on the design of the carrier collection cards, it may not be practical to print directly on the cards; therefore, you may print labels which can then be attached to the collection cards.
Card
If carrier collection cards are printed on cards.
Label
If carrier collection cards should be printed on labels which may then be attached to the collection cards.
Information that Circulation prints on the carrier collection card is shown in the box below. There are no headings on this card:
You define where the Circulation information should begin printing the first and, if applicable, second cards.
Note: You may have other information pre-printed on the collection cards, such as the name of your newspaper and/or receipts.
If you print collection cards on labels, Circulation prints similar information:
21. Will PostWare be used to print vacation pack labels? BCP (Client) Vacation pack labels can be used to manage vac packs (newspapers kept by the carrier or DM while the subscriber is on vacation). The labels, one for each subscriber receiving a vac pack, can be given to carriers to remind them to hold the vac pack subscriptions. Vacation pack labels can be produced via PostWare or exported to an ASCII file (which can be imported into another application, such as a word processing program, and then printed). This setting determines how vacation pack labels are produced.
Yes
PostWare should be used to produce vacation pack labels.
No
Vacation pack labels should be exported to an ASCII file.
If Yes:
22. What is the name of the job file to use for vacation packs? BCP (Client) If you are using PostWare to print vacation pack labels, you must set up a label job file for the vacation pack labels in PostWare. Enter the name of that job file here.
23. Are you reporting separate totals for a specific day on the Unearned Revenue report? BCP (Client) The revenue may be reported separately on a selected day of the week on the Unearned Revenue Report. For example, you may want Sunday unearned revenue listed separately from the other days of the week.
Yes
If you report revenue separately for one day on the Unearned Revenue Report.
No
If one revenue total is needed.
If Yes:
24. Which day of the week must be reported separately on the Unearned Revenue report? BCP (Client) Because the paper is often substantially larger on one day of the week (typically Sunday), the Unearned Revenue report will break out one day of the week as its own column. For this rule, enter the day of the week for which revenue should be reported separately. The default is Sunday.
25. Which additional day should report earned revenue separately to the General Ledger? BCP (Client) This setting determines an additional break-out day for reporting earned revenue. Select a day of the week; the default setting is Blank.
26. Should an error or warning be generated if a gap in dates is found between the last period and current period? B (Client) When running the Unearned Revenue or Grace Due report, an “Error” (the default) or “Warning” can be generated if a date gap exists between the last period and the current period. For the Unearned Revenue report, this validation occurs when the Create GL checkbox is selected; the system will check for any revenue record for the start date minus one day. For the Grace Due report, validation occurs when the Update checkbox is selected; the system will check for any grace-accrual or grace-owed records for the start date minus one day. This excludes reversals and grace accruals created from permanent stops.
27. What is the first print position on the postal walk sequence card? B (Client) This refers to the distance from the left edge of the paper to the first column on the postal walk sequence cards where printing should begin. There are 10 characters (columns) per inch horizontally. The default value is 24.
28. What is the first print line on the postal walk sequence card? B (Client) Your printer may be capable of printing on the first line of the postal walk sequence cards, but you may prefer that printing begin, for example, on line 3. Enter the line number on which printing should begin on the postal walk sequence cards. There are 6 lines per inch. The default is line 5.
29. What is the length of the postal walk sequence card in inches? B (Client) Postal walk sequence cards may not be a standard form length of 8.5 inches. They are often printed on continuous-form cards. Indicate the exact form length here. The default form length is 3.25 inches.
30. Should complimentary and third party subscribers be included on the office pay audit? BCP (Client) The office pay audit report lists each office pay subscriber and the number of days of credit that the carrier received for delivery of the paper to the subscriber. In some cases, carriers also receive credit for delivery of complimentary or third-party newspapers. This setting determines whether or not the complimentary and third-party subscribers should be included in the report.
Yes
Include complimentary and third-party subscribers on the office pay audit report.
No
Only office pay subscribers should be included on the office pay audit report.
31. Do you want to update churn history monthly or weekly? BCP (Client) If churn history should be updated, indicate if it should be done monthly or weekly. Churn history will be updated for the publishing day(s) indicated in the next rule. For example, if you want churn history updated monthly on Sunday and Wednesday, churn will be updated on the first Sunday of the month and the first Wednesday of the month when you end the publishing runs. The updating of the core and marginal subscriber counts will increase the processing time when ending the publishing run. See the User Manual for more information about churn.
Monthly
Churn history should be updated monthly.
Weekly
Churn history should be updated weekly.
32. On which days of the week should churn history be updated? BCP (Client) This setting defines on which, if any, day(s) of the week churn history should be updated. If churn history should not be updated, enter “none” (the default). Or, enter the days of the week on which churn history should be updated (press F2 to multi-select days).
33. Which subscription demographic should be updated during churn history processing? BCP (Client) Subscription demographics can be updated during churn history processing to identify core and marginal subscribers. Identify which demographic should be updated.
34. Which demographic answer should be used to identify core subscribers? P (Client) Identify the demographic answer (to the demographic defined above) that should be created for core subscribers.
35. Which demographic answer should be used to identify marginal subscribers? P (Client) Identify the demographic answer (to the demographic defined above) that should be created for marginal subscribers.
36. Should the Route Delivery List show the last expire date for subscribers who were office pay but are now carrier collect? BCP (Client) The last expire date may print on the Route Delivery List for subscribers who were formerly office pay but are now carrier collect. This helps carriers determine when they should begin collecting from the subscriber.
Yes
The last expire date should print for formerly office pay subscribers.
No
The last expire date should not print for these subscribers.
37. Should the subscriber’s address, credit status, and grace dates show on top of the Grace Due Report? BCP (Client) This Rule controls whether this specific information is printed along the top of the Grace Due report. If you do not need this information, enter “no”.
Yes
Print the subscriber’s address, credit status, and grace dates on the report.
No
Do not print this information.
38. What is the maximum number of days a subscription may be stopped and then started to be considered continuous? BCP (Client) This Business Rule determines the default value in the Max Days Stopped field in the Retention Analysis report. Any subscriber who has been stopped for less than or equal to the number of days entered in this field will be considered a continuing subscription and not a new start. The default is 0.
39. Should the Return Draw Analysis report create sellout draw adjustments when other returns exist in the report period? BCP (Client) This setting allows you to control how sellouts are identified. If you set this Business Rule to “yes”, then a blank value is considered a sellout if returns are entered for the same reporting period. For example, if returns are entered for each day of the week from Sunday through Friday, but Saturday’s returns field is blank, then the system will assume that zero returns were received for Saturday (i.e., that Saturday was a sellout). If this Business Rule is set to “no” (the default), then an actual zero must be entered to indicate a sellout.
40. Which draw adjust code should be used to create the sellout draw adjustment? BCP (Client) This setting identifies the draw adjustment code to be used for the draw adjustment when the previous Business Rule is set to “yes”.
41. Which messages should display on processing reports? B (Client) When running Subscriber Payment Processing or Transaction Processing you may, optionally, create an alternate report that contains only errors, warnings or info messages, based on this Business Rule. If so, the standard Transaction Processing or Payment Processing report will still be generated. The two reports will automatically be saved in the spool directory and cannot be viewed or printed until after they have been created. The View/Print options should be used to set the report name prior to generating the report, as the report will not be saved if the default "TEMP" name is used. The reports will have the same file name save that the alternate report will have a “2” added (for example, “TRANREPORT.16” and “TRANREPORT2.16”).
All
All messages should display on the processing reports, and no alternate report is needed.
Error+Fatal
The alternate processing report should contain only error and fatal messages.
Info
The alternate processing report should contain only info messages.
Warning
The alternate processing report should contain only warning messages.
Note: All of the credit card interfaces mentioned in the Payment Authorization sections require a separate license fee to use. Contact the Naviga Support Center for more information.
Important: If these settings are changed, you must close and relaunch all Graphical modules after the changes have been made.
1. Are credit card validation values (CID, CVV, CVV2) required when entering credit card payments? BCP (Non) A credit card validation value is a 3- or 4-digit security code found on the back of a credit card in the signature area. This setting can be overridden in Security.
2. Should credit card validation values be retained until payment authorization is obtained? BCP (Non) A credit card validation value cannot, by law, be stored after the credit card is authorized. This setting determines if you will store these values long enough to obtain authorization.
3. When not using real-time payment authorization, should authorized payments be exported by the batch export process? BCP (Non) This setting does not apply to real-time credit card authorization. Rather, it indicates whether you export credit card payments to a file that will be read by third-party software.
4. Which product integration is used for real-time payment authorization? BCP (Non) Select the name of the system you use to authorize credit cards in real time. Currently, the possible settings s are “viaWARP”, “DTI”, and “None”.
5. When auto-accepting subscriber payments, should batches with unauthorized credit card payments be processed? B (NCS) If the Business Rule Should batches that are imported or created by the system be accepted automatically? (Subscriber Payments section) is answered “yes”, system-generated or imported batches will be accepted automatically when running the Auto Accept Batches utility (see the User Manual). When that happens, this parameter determines whether payment batches with unauthorized credit card payments should be auto-accepted.
6. Should pre-authorized payments be sent to the authorization service as a forced transaction? BCP (Client) A Customer Service associate may be required to call the credit card company to obtain authorization. If the credit card company authorizes the card, they will give the associate an authorization number to enter in the credit card window. This type of transaction is considered a “forced” transaction.
7. After how many seconds should the validation process stop trying to communicate with the authorization server? BCP (Client) When attempting to communicate with the authorization server, the validation process will eventually time-out. Enter the maximum number of seconds that validation should be attempted before timing out. The default is 60.
8. Should unprocessed unauthorized declined real-time credit card payments create GL transactions? BCP (Client) This Business Rule provides the option not to create GL transactions for unprocessed, unauthorized, declined real-time credit card payments.
9. Should authorized real-time credit card payments in suspended batches be processed? BCP (Client) This setting determines whether payments within suspended batches that have been authorized should be processed.
10. If using DTI Payment Authorization, which third party payment authorization product integration is being used? BCP (Client) If you are using the DTI Authorization Service, select the third-party authorization product you will use along with it. All vendors are licensed add-ons—contact Naviga Support for more information.
The settings of the next 3 Business Rules, when combined into one string and entered in a web browser’s address bar, should open an XML document.
See the following example:
http://<iiS Host Name>/wspaymentauthorization/wspaymentauth.asmx?WSDL
In this example:
http://<iis Host Name>
is the host name,
/wspaymentauthorization/
is the URL path, and
wspaymentauth.asmx?WSDL
is the WSDL name.
11. If using DTI Payment Authorization, what is the host name for the DTI Payment Authorization server? BCP (Client)
Enter the host name of the authorization service; for example: “http://qatest” or “http://10.121.1.186
”.
12. If using DTI Payment Authorization, what is the URL path for the DTI Payment Authorization service? BCP (Client) Enter the URL path of the authorization service. This setting defaults to “/wspaymentauthorization/”.
13. If using DTI Payment Authorization, what is the WSDL name for the DTI Payment Authorization service? BCP (Client) Enter the WSDL name. This setting defaults to “wspaymentauth.asmx?WSDL”
14. If using DTI Payment Authorization, do you want to prevent transactions from being processed against this database? BCP (Non) Set this Business Rule to “yes” during the initial setup of payment authorization while testing with a demo or test account. When switching over to live mode or when testing against a real merchant account, set this Business Rule to “no” (the default).
15. If using Hosted Order Page, what is the host name of the service that you use? B (Client) If using the Hosted Order Page, enter the name, URL and redirect URL in these parameters. They will vary based on your payment authorization vendor.
16. If using Hosted Order Page, what is the host URL of the service that you use? B (Client)
17. If using Hosted Order Page, what is the host URL of the redirect page that you use? B (Client)
The default redirect is “cmshare/http/echo.html
”.
The settings of the first two Business Rules, when combined into one string, should point to the location where transactions are sent.
See the following example.
https://secure.authorize.net/gateway/transact.dll
In this example:
secure.authorize.net
is the host name,
gateway/transact.dll
is the URL path
Note:
The https://
portion of the string is hard-coded and should not be entered in these Business Rules.
18. If using Authorize.Net, what is the host name for the Authorize.Net authorization server? BCP (Non) Enter the host name of the authorization service; for example, “secure.authorize.net”.
19. If using Authorize.Net, what is the URL path for the Authorize.Net authorization server? BCP (Non) Enter the URL path of the authorization service; for example, “gateway/transact.dll”.
20. If using Authorize.Net, what is the local port for the Authorize.Net authorization server? BCP (Non) Enter the port for the http connection. Normally, this Business Rule is set to “443” for https (secure) communications.
21. If using Authorize.Net, what API login ID should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) The authorization service requires a user ID for access. Enter the required user ID here.
22. If using Authorize.Net, what transaction key should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) This is an alphanumeric string used for encryption. It is generated by the Authorize.Net web account, and you will receive it from Authorize.Net.
23. If using Authorize.Net, what hash key should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) The hash key is used to add security to the process by verifying that communications are taking place with the real authorization site and not a fraudulent site. You will receive the hash key from Authorize.Net.
26. If using Beanstream Hosted Page, what merchant ID should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client) This will be provided by Beanstream.
27. If using Beanstream Hosted Page, what API access passcode should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client) This will be provided by Beanstream.
28. If using Beanstream Hosted Page, what hash key should be used in authorization requests? BC (Client) This will be provided by Beanstream.
See FAQ #125: bPoint Hosted Order Page Setup
for more information about bPoint.
29. If using bPoint API, what merchant ID should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client)
30. If using bPoint API, what billing code should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client)
31. If using bPoint API, what user name should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client)
32. If using bPoint API, what password should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client)
33. If using bPoint API, what is the full URL for the bPoint authorization service? BCP (Client)
34. If using bPoint API, what is the full URL for the bPoint token lookup service? BCP (Client).
35. If using bPoint Hosted Page, should transactions be processed against the production environment? BCP (Client)
36. If using Braintree, what is the host name for the Braintree authorization server? B (Client)
Enter the host name; for example, secure.braintreepaymentgateway.com
.
38. If using Braintree, what is the local port for the Braintree authorization server? B (Client) Enter the local port; for example, 443.
39. If using Braintree, what user name should be used in authorization requests? B Enter the user name for authorization requests. Note:
40. If using Braintree, what password should be used in authorization requests? B Enter the password for authorization requests. Note:
41. If using Braintree, what processor ID should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) Enter the processor ID; for example, ccprocessora.
42. If using Braintree Hosted Page, what merchant ID should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client)
43. If using Braintree Hosted Page, what hosted page ID should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client)
44. If using Braintree Hosted Page, what public key should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client)
45. If using Braintree Hosted Page, what private key should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client)
46. If using Braintree Hosted Page, what merchant account ID should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client)
47. If using Braintree Hosted Page, should transactions be processed against the production environment? BCP (Client) The default is “no”.
48. If using Braintree Hosted Page, do you allow payments to be entered for expired credit cards? BCP (Client) This setting indicates whether the Hosted Order Page or the credit card processor validate the credit card expire date.
49. If using Braintree Hosted Page, do you allow refunds that are not associated with a payment (i.e. credits)? BCP (Client) The settings for this and the following Business Rule will override values from the web.config file.
50. If using Braintree Hosted Page, do you allow refunds to be entered for payments that aren't settled in Braintree? BCP (Client)
51. If using Cybersource, what currency should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client)
52. If using Cybersource, what merchant ID should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client)
53. If using Cybersource, what is the host name for the Cybersource authorization server? B (Client)
54. If using Cybersource, what is the URL path for the Cybersource authorization server? B (Client)
55. If using CyberSource Payment Manager (CPM), what user name should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) Enter the user name that should be sent for authorization requests. The answer will be encrypted.
56. If using CyberSource Payment Manager (CPM), what password should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) The authorization service request must contain the user ID and password assigned to the CPM gateway. Locate this information in CyberSource Payment Manager. The answer will be encrypted.
57. If using CyberSource Payment Manager (CPM), what is the server IP address for the CyberSource authorization server? BCP (Client) Enter either the host name or the IP address of the server where CyberSource is installed. You can find this information by starting a command shell on that server (Start | Run: Command) and entering “hostname” or “ipconfig”. Hostname will return the hostname needed. ipconfig will return the IP configuration of the server; what is needed is the IP address listed for the ethernet adapter for the local area connection.
58. If using CyberSource Payment Manager (CPM), what is the server port for the CyberSource authorization server? BCP (Client) Locate this information in CyberSource Payment Manager.
59. If using CyberSource Payment Manager (CPM), what merchant ID should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) Locate this information in CyberSource Payment Manager. Note: Merchant IDs are case-sensitive. The answer will be encrypted.
60. If using CyberSource Payment Manager (CPM), is a secure (SSL) connection required by the CPM authorization server? BCP (Client) Indicate if a secure connection is required by CyberSource Payment Manager. The default is “no”.
61. For Cybersource Hosted Order Page, what is the merchant ID that you use? BCP (Client)
62. For Cybersource Hosted Order Page, what is the serial number that you use? BCP (Client)
63. For Cybersource Hosted Order page, what is the shared secret key that you use? BCP (Client)
64. If using Cybersource Secure Acceptance, what is the profile ID that you use? BCP (Client) You will be given the profile ID when configuring Secure Acceptance at the Cybersource website. You should also answer this Business Rule in the iServices admin module, if applicable.
65. If using Cybersource Secure Acceptance, what is the locale that you use? BCP (Client) The default is “EN” (English).
66. If using Cybersource Secure Acceptance, what is the shared secret key that you use? BCP (Client) You will be given the secret key with the profile ID when configuring Secure Acceptance. You must set this Business Rule in the Oversized Rules option.
67. If using Cybersource Secure Acceptance, what is the access key that you use? BCP (Client) You will be given the access key with the profile ID when configuring Secure Acceptance.
68. If using Edgil, which version of Edgil are you using? BCP (Client)
69. If using Edgil, what user name should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) Enter the user name that should be sent for authorization requests. The answer will be encrypted.
70. If using Edgil, what password should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) Enter the password that should be sent for authorization requests. The answer will be encrypted.
71. If using Edgil, what order entry process ID (OEP ID) should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) The merchant and OEP IDs defined here will be exported to the Edgil file.
72. If using Edgil, what merchant ID should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) The merchant and OEP IDs defined here will be exported to the Edgil file.
73. If using Edgil, what keystore password should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) The keystore password defined here will be exported to the Edgil file. The answer will be encrypted.
74. If using Edgil, what certification password should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) The certification password defined here will be exported to the Edgil file. The answer will be encrypted.
75. If using Edgil, what certification alias should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) The certification alias defined here will be exported to the Edgil file.
76. If using Edgil Hosted Order Page, what authmode should be used in hosted order page requests? B (Client) “Key,” “User,” and “None” are the valid settings. “User” defaults.
77. If using Edgil Hosted Order Page with authmode of ‘key,’ what key ID should be used in hosted order page requests? B (Client) If the setting of the previous Business Rule is “Key,” enter the Edgil key ID here.
78. If using Edgil Hosted Page, what is the URL of your test payment server? B (Client) Enter the URL of your Edgil test payment server, if using one. The default is “https://www.testedgilpayway.net/ecco_ws/”.
79. If using Edgil Web Service, should transactions be processed against the production environment? BCP (Client) This setting indicates whether the production environment is in use when using the Web Service version of Edgil. The default setting is “no.”
80. If using EPX API, what customer number should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) The customer number is required for authorization requests. It is provided by EPX.
81. If using EPX API, what merchant number should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) The merchant number is required for authorization requests. It is provided by EPX.
82. If using EPX API, what DBA number should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) The DBA number is required for authorization requests. It is provided by EPX.
83. If using EPX API, what terminal number should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) The terminal number is required for authorization requests. It is provided by EPX.
84. If using EPX API, what merchant authorization code should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) The merchant authorization code (MAC) is required for authorization requests. It is provided by EPX.
85. If using EPX API, what is the host name for the EPX authorization server? BCP (Non) Enter the host name of the EPX authorization service; for example, “https://secure.epxuap.com”. It is provided by EPX.
86. If using EPX Hosted Page, what is the KeyExchange URL that you use? BCP (Non) Requests are made to the KeyExchange URL for a terminal authorization code (TAC) that is required to access the EPX Hosted Order Page. It is provided by EPX.
87. If using EPX Hosted Page, what is the Custom CSS URL that you use? BCP (Non) This URL contains the custom stylesheet that will used with the hosted order page. Note: This setting is used only in testing environments. Custom CSS will reside on the server in the live environment.
88. If using EPX Hosted Page, what is the Custom JavaScript URL that you use? BCP (Non) This URL contains the custom JavaScript that will used with the hosted order page. Note: This setting is used only in testing environments. Custom JavaScript will reside on the server in the live environment.
89. If using ICVerify Enterprise Edition, what is the host name for the ICVerify authorization server? BCP (Non) Enter either the host name or the IP address of the server where ICVerify Enterprise Edition is installed. You can find this information by starting a command shell on that server (Start | Run: Command) and entering “hostname” or “ipconfig”. Hostname will return the hostname needed. ipconfig will return the IP configuration of the server; what is needed is the IP address listed for the ethernet adapter for the local area connection.
90. If using ICVerify Enterprise Edition, what is the local port for the ICVerify authorization service? BCP (Non) Enter the number of the local port used for the authorization service. Example: “54321”
91. If using ICVerify Enterprise Edition, what user name should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) The authorization service requires a user ID for access. Enter the required user ID here. Example: “icverify”.
92. If using ICVerify Enterprise Edition, what password should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) In addition to a user ID, the authorization service also requires a password for access. Enter the password here.
93. If using ICVerify Enterprise Edition, what merchant ID should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) The merchant ID is included in the ICVerify export file. Example: “123456”.
94. If using ICVerify Enterprise Edition, what industry type should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) Enter your company’s industry type, or leave the default or “Retail”. Press F2 for a list of available industry types.
95. If using ICVerify for Windows, where should the request/response files be written? BCP (Non) Enter the full path to the shared “ICVerify Request Directory”. This directory must be accessible on the DTI Payment Authorization web service server. For example: “//MONFILE2/SAC$/JOP/ICVERIFY”.
96. If using ICVerify for Windows, what terminal ID should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) Enter the merchant ID surrounded by “~” characters (e. g., ~0001~).
97. If using ICVerify for Windows, what processor receives the authorization requests? BCP (Non) Enter the processor you are using, or leave the default of “FdmsFdrType7”. Press F2 for a list of supported processors.
98. If using ICVerify for Windows, what industry type should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) Enter your company’s industry type, or leave the default or “Retail”. Press F2 for a list of available industry types.
99. If using ICVerify for Windows, what file response type is being used by ICVerify? BCP (Non) One-line or two-line response files can be used. This setting can be “Y” (the default), which means that ICVerify is using a one-line response file, or “B”, which means that ICVerify is using a two-line response file (one line consisting of the request text, and the second line consisting of the response). Note that you must also set the SDK Response Type in your ICVerify software to either “Y” or “B” to indicate the type of response file you would like to use, and that this value must match the setting of this Business Rule.
100. If using ICVerify for Windows, what is the starting value for the substation number? BCP (Non) This Business Rule identifies the substation number to use when issuing real-time ICVerify for Windows authorizations. Each substation may require an ICVerify license, so if a substation number for which there is no license is used, an “Invalid Substation” message will be returned. Enter a starting value from “001” (the default) to “999”.
101. If using ICVerify for Windows 4.0.4 and newer, should encryption be used? BCP (Non) This setting indicates if encryption is being used. The default setting is “Yes.”
102. If using ICVerify for Windows 4.0.4 and newer, what is the shared directory used for encryption? BCP (Non) If encryption is in use (i.e., the previous Business Rule is set to “yes”), this setting identifies the location of the shared directory that is needed. For example, \\monfile\qa\CreditCardInterface\ICV4S.
103. If using Moneris, what store ID should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) The store ID is provided by Moneris.
104. If using Moneris, what API token should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) The API token is provided by Moneris.
105. If using Moneris, what is the host name for the Moneris authorization server? BCP (Non) Enter the host name, for example, “esqa.moneris.com”.
The settings of the first two Business Rules, when combined into one string, should point to the location where transactions are sent.
See the following example.
https://wsvar.paymentech.net/PaymentechGateway/
In this example:
https://wsvar.paymentech.net
is the host name,
/PaymentechGateway/
is the URL path
Note:
The https://
portion of the string is hard-coded and should not be entered in these Business Rules.
106. If using Paymentech, what is the host name for the Paymentech authorization server? BCP (Non) Enter the host name, for example, “wsvar.paymentech.net”.
107. If using Paymentech, what is the URL path for the Paymentech authorization server? BCP (Non) Enter the URL path, for example, “/PaymentechGateway/”.
108. If using Paymentech username/password authentication, what user name should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non)
109. If using Paymentech username/password authentication, what password should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) These are the user name and password to authenticate with Chase Paymentech. These values are used only if you are not set up for IP-based authentication (i.e., if either of these Business Rules is set, then username/password authentication will be used). If you want to use IP-based authentication, then leave these Business Rules blank.
110. If using Paymentech, what transaction routing number should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) The routing number is provided by Paymentech. It represents the bank identification number (BIN).
111. If using Paymentech, what terminal ID should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) This value is a number given by Paymentech. It represents the ID of the terminal (Virtual Terminal).
112. If using Paymentech, what merchant ID should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) The merchant ID is provided by Paymentech.
113. If using Paymentech, are customer profiles used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) This setting determines whether the profile customer reference number will be sent to Paymentech. The default is “no.”
114. If using PayPal, what currency should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) Enter the currency that should be sent for authorization requests.
115. If using PayPal, what partner name should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) Enter the partner name that should be sent for authorization requests.
116. If using PayPal, what vendor name should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) Enter the vendor name that should be sent for authorization requests.
117. If using PayPal, what user name should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) Enter the user name that should be sent for authorization requests.
118. If using PayPal, what password should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Client) Enter the password that should be sent for authorization requests.
120. If using PayPal, what is the local port for the authorization server? BCP (Client) Enter the local port; for example, 443
121. If using PayPal for hosted order page, how many days old can a vault ID be before getting a new one in auto renew? BCP (Client) Enter the number of days old that a vault ID can be before it is replaced in auto renew.
122. If using PayPal Express Checkout, should the 'live' or 'test' environment be used for payment entry? BCP (Client) Enter 'live' or 'test'.
123. If using TNS, what is the host name for the TNS authorization server? BCP (Non) Enter the host name, for example, “credit.card.tns.com.au”.
124. If using TNS, what subsystem name should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) Enter the subsystem, for example, “TNS_prod”.
125. If using TNS, what merchant ID should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) The merchant ID is provided by TNS.
Note: Circulation communicates with the local installation of viaWARP using the http-based viaWARP gateway. The local server where viaWARP is installed is referred to as the “authorization server” in this document. The copy of viaWARP running on this server (the WARPservice) is referred to as the “authorization service” in this document. The settings of the rules starting with “If using viaWARP...” define the information that Circulation needs to communicate with viaWARP.
126. If using viaWARP, what is the host name for the viaWARP authorization server? BCP (Non) Enter either the host name or the IP address of the server where viaWARP is installed. You can find this information by starting a command shell on that server (Start | Run: Command) and entering “hostname” or “ipconfig”. Hostname will return the hostname needed. ipconfig will return the IP configuration of the server; what is needed is the IP address listed for the ethernet adapter for the local area connection.
127. If using viaWARP, what is the URL path for the viaWARP authorization server? BCP (Non) Enter the URL path of the http-based viaWARP gateway for the location installation of viaWARP. This setting defaults to /cgi-bin/auth.cgi, which will be correct unless it was changed during the installation of viaWARP.
128. If using viaWARP, what is the local port for the viaWARP authorization service? BCP (Non) Enter the number of the local port used to communicate with the local installation of viaWARP. This setting defaults to “80”. Be sure that it matches the entry in the HTTP PORT field in viaWARP Setup (File | General Configuration)
129. If using viaWARP, what user identification should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) The authorization request must contain the user ID assigned to the viaWARP gateway. Enter the required user ID here. The user ID is typically “__GATEWAYUSER__” (two underscores at the beginning and end). You should use this ID unless you have changed it during installation, or unless you are advised to change it by DTI or viaWARP support staff.
130. If using viaWARP, what password should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) In addition to a user ID, the authorization service also requires the password assigned to that user. Enter the password here. It is typically defaulted to __GATEWAY*USER__ (two underscores at the beginning and end, and an asterisk between “GATEWAY” and “USER”). The password entered for this Business Rule must be the same as the value in the PASSWORD field in viaWARP Setup.
131. If using viaWARP, what profile name should be used in authorization requests? BCP (Non) Enter the profile name required by the authorization service. This must be one of the valid profile IDs set up under Profile Config in viaWARP Setup, such as “default”.
1. How should returns that exceed the quantity received on that day be handled? BCD (Client) This setting determines how Circulation deals with returns that exceed the draw amount for that day. If the returns exceed the draw, it may be useful to display a warning message to that effect on the screen during returns entry. This Business Rule can be set at the Business, Company, or Deliverable level.
2. Should returns that exceed the quantity received be split into authorized and unauthorized returns? BCD (Client)
if Yes:
3. If returns that exceed the quantity received are split should the unauthorized returns be in a separate batch? BCD (Client) If the previous Business Rule is set to “yes,” the excess returns will be placed in a separate returns batch with a “+” symbol indicating that the batch contains excess returns.
4. Should payments be automatically created when a collection amount is entered? B (Client) The amount collected may be entered with the returns entry. This is primarily used when posting returns from racks. A payment may be automatically generated for the amount collected and applied to the bill-to account for the route.
5. Should a warning display if returns or adjustments have already been entered for the same route on this day? BCP (Client) This option is helpful in warning of duplicate entry of returns.
6. When entering returns or adjustments for a week should the draw date represent the start or end of that week? B (Client) This Business Rule controls the Period End Date / Period Start Date field in the Returns for a Week window. If “End” is the setting for this Business Rule, the prefill dates are selected backward from the Period End Date. The other possible setting is “Start” (the default), which will change the field label to Period Start Date, and the prefill dates will be selected forward from this date.
7. Which method should be used to determine the number of days to include in the returns entry prefill? BCD (Client) This Business Rule controls how the days to include in the prefill are selected. No matter which option is selected, the prefill days will be affected by the period start/end date entered in the header, as well as the returns rules defined in the Deliverable record (Returnable After and Return Days fields).
8. Should days that did not have any draw be enabled for entering returns? BCD (Client) Indicate whether returns can be entered on days in which there was no draw.
9. Which unauthorized draw adjust code should be used for returns imported with an invalid edition? BCP (Client) An edition can be included in the returns import file, so that it may be validated during the import process. If returns are imported for an invalid edition, this draw adjust code will be assigned to the unauthorized returns. Note:
Unauthorized returns must be assigned a draw adjustment code. This Business Rule and several that follow are used to assign a code to imported and/or entered returns that are unauthorized for various reasons. These codes must be set up in advance, and each Business Rule setting must be unique (i.e., the code used for one unauthorized reason can not be re-used for different unauthorized reasons).
10. Which unauthorized draw adjust code should be used for returns that had no draw for the draw date? BCD (Client) If returns are imported or entered on a day with no draw, this draw adjust code will be assigned to the unauthorized returns.
11. Which unauthorized draw adjust code should be used for returns that exceed the original draw? BCD (Client) If the imported or entered returns amount exceeds the original draw for a given day, this draw adjust code will be assigned to the unauthorized returns. The amount exceeding the original draw will not be credited to the account.
12. Which unauthorized draw adjust code should be used for returns that are not received on time? BCD (Client) If imported or entered returns are not received on time, this draw adjust code will be assigned to the unauthorized returns.
13. Which unauthorized draw adjust code should be used for returns that exceed the maximum return percentage? BCP (Client) If entered returns exceed the maximum return percentage defined in Setup, this draw adjust code will be assigned to the unauthorized returns. This Business Rule is used by the Returns for a Day and Returns for a Week options; it is not used by the Returns Import.
14. When an imported return is unauthorized should a billing message be created for the route? B (Client) A billing message for the route can be generated automatically when an unauthorized return is identified during the import process.
15. When processing a batch, how many records should be visible before the action changes to Accept/Reject/Suspend only? B (Client) This setting limits the number of rows visible when using Route Adjust. When a file is imported or a batch is created which is over the limit set here, the batch can only be accepted, rejected, or suspended. There is no option to modify any records if it is over the limit. Regardless of size, the accepted batch will be processed in the background. The default answer is “2000”.
1. Should coupon only or adjustment only payments skip the step-up rating process? BCP (Client) Subscribers on promotional rates will step up to another rate when a payment is made (for example, a “DS half-off” promo might step up to a “DS regular” rate). However, if a payment with only an adjustment or coupon is entered (no payment amount), you may not want the payment to step up the subscriber’s rate. Enter “yes” here if the rate step-up should be skipped in cases where there is no payment amount.
2. Is a check number required for a subscriber payment? BCP (Client) Entry of a payment-related tracking ID or number for each subscriber payment entered may be required, if desired, using this rule. Entry of the tracking ID or number may always be required, never required, or optional at the discretion of the operator. Examples would be a check number for a payment by check.
3. Is a source code required for a subscriber payment? B (Client) It may be desirable to require entry of a source code for each subscriber payment to reflect the general source of the payment.
4. What is the default source code for a subscriber payment? B (Client) The default source code assigned during subscriber payment entry may be set up here, if desired. This default may be overridden by the operator during subscriber payment entry.
5. Is a reason code required for a subscriber payment? B (Client) Indicate here whether entry of a reason code should be required when a subscriber payment is entered.
6. What is the default reason code for a subscriber payment? B (Client) The default reason code assigned during subscriber payment entry may be set up here, if desired. This default may be overridden by the operator during subscriber payment entry.
7. Which draw adjust code should be used when a subscriber payment converts from “Carrier Collect” to “Office Pay”? BCP (Client) When a carrier collect subscriber makes a payment to the office, a draw adjustment must be created to credit the carrier for any papers delivered since the start of the office pay period to the current publishing day. The user-defined draw adjustment code to be used for this type of draw adjustment should be entered here. This draw adjustment code must be set up in advance.
8. How many days will you allow a subscriber payment to be backdated? BCPD (Client) It may be desirable to backdate subscriber payments if, for example, payments are made directly to a lock box and are received by the paper at a later date. Indicate here the maximum number of days a subscriber payment may be backdated. The default number of days is 5.
9. What is the default bank for subscription payments? B (Client) The default bank is used during subscriber payment entry to define the bank on the payment batch screen. This default may be changed during payment entry. Enter the user-defined bank that is most commonly used for subscriber payment deposits.
10. Should payments validate subscription and bank to company? B (Client) Indicate whether you want to verify that the bank’s company is the same company as the subscriber’s publication for subscriber payments, batch payments, payment imports and auto payments.
11. Should customer service payments create separate payment batches by publication? P (Client) This setting determines whether payments for different publications should be in separate batches, or in one batch. If this rule is set to “yes”, payments will be separated into different batches by product. The description will be “<ProductID> Credit Card Pmts” or “<ProductID> <BankID> CustServPmts”. If this rule is set to “no”, all credit card payments will go into a single batch with a description of “Credit Card Pmts”, and all bank draft payments will go into a single batch with a description of “<BankID> Customer Service Pmts”.
12. Should a payment auto-start a former subscriber? BCP (Client) Circulation has an auto-start feature which will automatically start the subscription of a permanently stopped subscriber if a payment is received and entered into the database. You may elect to always have this automatically happen, to simply allow entry of the payment only, with the entry of the start as a separate step, or to not allow the payment to be entered. Note that in order for the auto-start to occur, the reason code for the subscriber’s stop transaction must also allow auto-starting.
If Always:
13. When the grace payment percentage is defined at 100%, should subscriptions be automatically started? BCP (Client) If a payment is sent by a former subscriber with grace owed, a start will only be created if the payment pays a certain percentage of the grace, defined by the stop reason code. If a former subscriber sends a payment and the grace percentage for their stop reason code is 100%, this setting determines whether the subscriber will be auto-started. For example, you could define a stop reason code to be used only for subscriber who expire-stop at the end of their grace period; you could set the grace percentage for this reason code at 100% and set this rule to “no”, which would prevent these subscribers from auto-starting if a payment is sent.
14. What is the reason code for subscriptions that are auto-started by payments? BCP (Client) This is the start reason code to be assigned when a subscription start is automatically created when a payment is entered.
15. How many days old can the expire date be to default as the effective date for payment from a carrier collect sub? BCP (Client) When a payment is entered for a current carrier collect subscriber, the operator must specify the effective date of the office pay billing method change. If the effective date is prior to the last publishing date, draw adjustments will be generated for the carriers on the route so that they receive credit for delivery. If the subscriber was formerly an office pay subscriber (office pay subscribers may be turned over to carrier collect when their subscription expires for lack of payment), the previous expiration date may be defaulted as the effective date. This setting defines the time period which the old expiration date must fall in before it is defaulted. Otherwise, the batch date is used as the default effective date. For example, if the previous expiration date was 08/31 and a payment is entered 11/15, Business Rules would default to 08/31 as the effective date as long as the rules state that the number of days after expire was 76 or more. The default value is zero days. Note that if the subscriber was in grace prior to being turned over to carrier collect, the end grace date will be used rather than the expire date.
16. Should subscriber lockbox files verify the scan line against the check digit? B (Client) The lockbox feature allows subscribers to send payments directly to a bank. The bank uses the renewal notice scan line to retrieve subscriber information. These payment transactions are periodically sent from the bank to the newspaper (on magnetic tape or other medium) and read by Circulation. The check digit is part of the scan line, and its purpose is to verify that the payment information is correct. Some banks can supply check digits, and others cannot.
17. Should the bank number be validated during subscriber lockbox processing? BCP (Client) US banks have a standard formula for valid bank numbers. When lockbox payments are imported, Circulation will verify that the bank number is valid based on this formula, if this rule is set to “yes”.
18. What subscription ID should be assigned to a payment when the supplied subscription ID is invalid? B (Client) This setting enables a valid subscription ID to be used as a default entry instead of zero in the event that the subscription ID in a lockbox file is invalid. The original subscription ID and the line number from the lockbox file will be written to the Remarks field in the payment transaction. The default setting is zero.
19. What is the source code for payments created for credit card auto renewed subscriptions? BCP (Client) This defines the source code to be used for the credit card payments generated for auto renew subscriptions. The source code must be a valid source code.
20. What is the reason code for payments created for credit card auto renewed subscriptions? BCP (Client) This defines the payment reason code to be used for the credit card payments generated for auto renew subscriptions. The reason code must be a valid reason code for a payment.
21. What is the source code for payments created for bank draft auto renewed subscriptions? BCP (Client) This defines the source code to be used for the bank draft payments generated for auto renew subscriptions. The source code must be a valid source code.
22. What is the reason code for payments created for bank draft auto renewed subscriptions? BCP (Client) This defines the reason code to be used for the bank draft payments generated for auto renew subscriptions. The reason code must be a valid reason code for a payment.
23. What is the source code for payments created for PayPal auto renewed subscriptions? BCP (Client) This defines the source code to be used for the PayPal payments generated for auto renew subscriptions. The source code must be a valid source code.
24. What is the reason code for payments created for PayPal auto renewed subscriptions? BCP (Client) This defines the reason code to be used for the PayPal payments generated for auto renew subscriptions. The reason code must be a valid reason code for a payment.
25. Do you want to generate statements for auto renew subscribers? BCP (Client) Auto renew subscribers can receive statements, similar to renewal notices, summarizing subscriber activity. This setting determines what type of auto renew subscribers should receive statements: “credit card” (only credit card auto renews); “bank draft” (only bank draft auto renews); “both” (all auto renews); or “never” (no auto renew statements will be produced). If statements are to be produced, the auto renew information will be exported to an ASCII file when processing auto renews. The file can then be imported into word processing software to produce the statements.
26. Which format should be used to create the auto renew statement export? BCP (Client) If you use file mapping for the auto renew statement export, select “File Map”. The default setting, “DTI Standard”, is the standard format.
If File Map:
27. Which file map should be used to create the auto renew statement export when the file map format is selected? BCP (Client) If you set the Business Rule, Which format should be used to create the auto renew statement export?, to “File Map”, enter the name of the file map here. It must have a file map usage of “SubBilling”.
28. Should auto renew payments include perm stopped subscribers with balances due? BCP (Client) Setting this rule to “yes” allows auto renew subscribers with a balance to request a final payment.
29. If a matching rate term cannot be found, should an auto renew payment be created? B (Client) This parameter determines what happens if there is no matching rate terms set up for an auto renew term and length.
30. If no billing change is made, how many days should be skipped before a declined auto renew is selected again? BCP (Client) This setting controls the number of days after a credit card decline that a subscriber should once again be selected for auto renewal. The default is zero.
31. How many auto renew declines without an accepted auto renew can a subscriber have before being removed from auto renew? BCP (Client) This Business Rule controls how many auto-renew payments can be declined before a subscriber is taken off auto renew, has their rate changed, and is included in the next subscriber billing process. It can be set to 0-99. If the answer is set to 0, a single auto renew decline will create a billing change to remove the subscriber from auto renew. If the answer is 1, two consecutive auto renew payment declines or cancellations are required create a billing change. If the answer is 999, then a billing change will never be created. The Cloud default is 0, and the on-premises default is 999.
32. For payments that put a subscriber on credit card auto pay, which billing group should be assigned to the subscriber? BCP (Client)
33. For payments that put a subscriber on bank draft auto pay, which billing group should be assigned to the subscriber? BCP (Client) When a system-generated billing transaction (such as a lockbox payment or renewal offer) changes a subscriber to automatic renewal, the subscriber must have an auto-renew billing group assigned. If more than one auto-renew billing group (defined in Setup) could apply to a subscriber, then the setting entered here will be used. Note: Separate Business Rules are used for credit card and bank draft auto renewals. The default is “All” for both of them.
34. Do you allow alternate values in the credit card field? B (Client) This parameter determines whether you can store alternate credit card numbers (tokens) for subscriber payments. This is not the same as a vaulted token, but is an alternate number provided by a third party application such as ISD (Chatterbox) through the Customer Service API.
35. What is the subscriber adjust code used for storing subscriber credit card surcharges? BCP (NCS) If you add a small surcharge percentage to payments made by credit card to cover processing fees, specify the subscriber payment adjustment code to use for credit card surcharges here. Surcharges are currently only supported for Australian sites.
36. To which system are you interfacing credit card payments? BCP (Non) Note:
All of the credit card interfaces require a separate license fee to use. Contact the Naviga Support Center for more information.
Both regular and auto renew subscribers can make payments by credit card. You can optionally export credit card information to an ASCII file, which can then be imported to credit card distribution software.
If ICVerify:
37. If exporting to ICVerify, should the credit card expire date be formatted MMYY or YYMM? BCP (Non) The credit card month and year may be required in different formats, depending on the ICVerify version.
38. If exporting to ICVerify, how many blank fields should be at the end of each credit card payment? BCP (Non) This setting is used to handle version 3.1 of ICVerify. The trailing blanks after the payment record are not allowed in version 3.1. However, some sites need to use trailing blanks. Enter the number of trailing blanks that should be exported at the end of each payment record. The default on-premises answer is 14 (blank at Cloud sites).
39. If exporting to ICVerify, is the ST field required in the output file? BCP (Non) The ICVerify system might require an “ST” field to denote the beginning of the close batch record. This setting determines whether “ST” is exported.
40. If exporting to ICVerify and using the ST field, how many blank fields should follow the ST field? BCP (Non) This setting is used to handle version 3.1 of ICVerify. The trailing blanks after the ST record are not allowed in version 3.1. However, some sites need to use trailing blanks. Enter the number of trailing blanks that should be exported at the end of each ST record. The default is 21 for on-premises sites, and blank for Cloud sites. Note that not all sites use the ST field. If you have already indicated in Business Rules that you do not use the ST field, this setting will be ignored.
41. If exporting to ICVerify, which export file format should be used? BCP (Non) If you use ICVerify, you can select “Retail” to use the original file format or “MOTO” to use the MOTO format. Otherwise, enter “None”.
If EIGEN:
42. If you interface credit card payments to EIGEN, what is your term ID group? B (Non) This setting determines the term ID that is exported to the ASCII file interfaced to EIGEN.
If VISANET:
43. If you interface credit card payments to VISANET, what is your merchant ID? BCP (Non) The merchant ID is included in the VISANET export file.
If POS-Partner 2000:
44. If you interface credit card payments to POS-partner 2000, what is your V number? BCP (Non) Enter the V number.
If Paymentech:
45. If you interface credit card payments to Paymentech, what is your format version? BCP (Non) Enter the version number (defaults to “2_0_0”).
46. If you interface credit card payments to Paymentech, what is your user name? BCP (Non) Enter your user name (defaults to [blank]).
47. Should American Express credit card data be separately exported? BCP (Non) American Express credit card payments may be processed through a separate clearing house than other credit card types. In order to separate American Express payments from other credit card payments, carrier and subscriber payments with American Express (whether a single payment or an auto renew) may be sent to a separate file in /dti/exchange/cm. If Business Rules are set to export American Express payments separately, payments with credit cards other than American Express will go to the standard export file (ICVerify, Payway Complete, VISANET, etc.). American Express payments will be exported to their own file, rather than the standard file.
If Yes:
48. If you export credit card payments for American Express, what is your merchant ID? BCP (Non) The merchant ID is included in the American Express export file.
If Edgil or EdgCapture:
49. If you export payments using the Edgil/EdgCapture format, what is your merchant ID? BCP (Client) The merchant and OEP IDs defined here will be exported to the Edgil or EdgCapture file.
50. If you export payments using the Edgil/EdgCapture format, what is your OEP ID (order entry process ID)? BCP (Client)
51. If you export payments using the Edgil/EdgCapture format, what is your OEP ID for recurring (auto-pay) payments? BCP (Client)
If Skipjack:
52. If you interface credit card payments to Skipjack, what is your merchant serial number? BCP (Non) The merchant serial number is included in the Skipjack export file.
53. Should the payment amount default from the previous payment in Subscriber Batch Payments? B (Client) Defaulting the amount from the previous payment can speed up payment entry, especially if you sort your payments by amount.
54. Are group payments applied only to subscriptions that have received a renewal notice but have not sent a payment? BC (Client) Group payments are payments spread across multiple subscriptions, all of which are billed to the same occupant. When entering group payments, all subscribers that have subscriptions billed to this occupant may be listed, or only office pay subscribers who have not made a payment for their last renewal, depending on how this rule is set.
55. When entering a new group payment how should the payment amount be distributed? BC (Client) When entering a group payment, this setting governs whether the payment is initially split evenly among all subscriptions billed to the occupant, or whether each subscription begins with a zero amount.
56. Should refunds be made to credit card if most recent payment was by credit card? BCP (Client) When entering refunds, you indicate in the Credit Card field whether the refund should be to a credit card. If this setting is “yes”, Credit Card will default to “y” during refund entry if the subscriber’s most recent payment was by credit card. The credit card number and expiration date from the last payment will also be defaulted.
57. Should refunds be made to bank draft if most recent payment was by bank draft? BCP (Client) This setting works the same way as the previous Business Rule for credit cards.
58. Should refunds be made to PayPal if most recent payment was by PayPal? BCP (Client) This setting works the same way as the previous Business Rules for credit cards and bank drafts.
59. How should grace be paid off when a payment is received? BCP (Client) When a payment is processed for a subscriber with a grace owed transaction, the grace owed is subtracted from the payment, resulting in a grace paid transaction. This setting determines whether the grace paid is calculated using the dollar value of the grace owed, or the number of days in grace, and whether the grace paid is deducted from the payment before or after payment terms are found.
60. If a payment is less than or equal to the subscriber's grace owed, should the grace period be extended? BCP (Client) This setting determines whether the end grace date is pushed back for a payment that does not buy a new subscription term (only pays off grace owed). If this rule is set to “yes”, the grace period will be extended by the number of days bought with the payment. A new expire transaction will also be created to reflect the new “paid through” date. This scenario is common if the newspaper has long grace periods but short subscription terms; subscribers can remain in grace indefinitely.
61. Should payments with invalid rates be rerated during payment processing? BCP (Client) If a subscriber’s rate changes between the time a payment is entered and processed, the number of days bought by the payment (term and length) will most likely change. When this happens, the payment can either be rerated automatically by Payment Processing, or error out and require manual modification to reenter the term and length. This setting determines whether the automatic rerate method is used.
62. What is the default payment type for subscription payments? BC (Client) This setting determines the payment type (cash, check, credit card or bank draft) that defaults when payments are entered in Customer Service or Batch Payment Entry.
63. What is the valid bank account type? BC (Client) Bank draft payments can be made to the subscriber’s savings or checking accounts, but only one of these bank account types may be valid at your newspaper. Indicate here whether bank drafts can be made to savings accounts, checking accounts, or both.
64. Should the bank client type be entered by the user? BC (Client) The bank client type indicates whether the bank account is a personal or business account. Client type information may or may not be required when entering a bank draft payment, depending on the policy of your newspaper. This setting governs whether the Client Type field is active when entering bank draft payments.
65. Should bank draft payments be exported using the Edgil/EdgCapture file format? BCP (Client) If your credit card payments are interfaced to an Edgil or EdgCapture system (as determined by the Business Rule, To which system are you interfacing credit card payments?, above), you may also include auto renew and one-time bank draft payments in the export. If so, enter “yes” here. Otherwise enter “no”.
66. Should one-time bank draft payments be exported using the Intell-A-Check file format? BCP (Client)
67. If interfacing bank draft payments to Intell-A-Check, what text should be exported in the ‘Check Pay To Name’ field? BCP (Client) Enter the text be exported in the Check Pay To Name field for each bank draft payment. The text will be stored in the 40-character Check Pay To Name field in Intell-A-Check export files, which are created when batches of bank draft payments are accepted.
68. For one-time bank draft payments, should a new batch be created daily? BCP (Client) This setting (when set to “no”) allows bank draft payments to be added to the most recent prior suspended bank draft payment batch. When set to “yes” (the default), a new payment batch will be created daily.
69. Which subadjust code is used when exporting the NIE amount with BillServ Renewals? BCP (Client) If you generate renewal notices in the BillServ format, a subadjust code is required for NIE amounts. The code you enter here will be exported.
70. How many days should be added to the payment date for cash/check payments imported through subscriber activity? B (Client) A predefined number of days can now be added to the payment date for cash or check payments imported via the Subscriber Activity Import, as governed by this setting. For example, if a check payment is imported with a payment date of 5/12, and this rule is set to “1”, the payment will be created in Circulation with a payment date of 5/13. The default is zero.
71. What date should be used when creating route activity messages during payment processing? BCP (Client)
72. Should batches that are imported or created by the system be accepted automatically? B (Client) This setting determines if system-generated or imported batches should be accepted automatically when running the Auto Accept Batches utility (see the User Manual). The default setting is “No.”
If Yes:
73. Should payment batches containing one-time bank draft payments be auto accepted? B (Client) You can exclude one-time bank draft batches from being automatically accepted by setting this parameter is set to “No.”
74. Do you allow payment batches with payments that have blank rates to be accepted? B (Client) Subscriber Lockbox Processing and the Subscriber Activity Import allow payments with blank rate codes. It is possible to enter an unroutable start, enter a payment for that start through Lockbox Processing or the Subscriber Activity Import, and accept the batch of payments. Payment Processing will not process the payment as long as the start remains unrouted. Once the start has been routed and that start has been processed through Transaction Processing, it is possible to run Payment Processing for the payment. The payment is re-rated using the subscriber's current rate.
75. What is the maximum number of payments to include in an auto renew credit card batch?
Default Value: 0
This setting determines the maximum number of payments that can be processed in a single auto-renew credit card batch.
Note:– When the value is set to 0
, the BatchID must be entered manually. If set to a number greater than 0
, the system automatically assigns the BatchID in the format "AU," followed by a date parameter and a sequence number (e.g., AU24090603).
76. How many days must be purchased by an adjustment only payment before the number of renewals is reset? BCP (Client) This setting identifies the number of days an adjustment-only payment must purchase in order to reset the number of renewals sent to the subscriber. The default is zero.
77. Should temp-stopped subscribers who are not in their grace period be selected for auto renew? BCP (Client) Temp stopped subscribers who are not in grace may be skipped from auto renew processing.
78. Should Auto Payments/Auto Notice be generated for Subscriptions with unprocessed Perm Stop on expire? Default Value: Yes This setting identifies whether Auto Payments or Auto Notice should be raised if there is a future Unprocessed Permanent Stop in the subscriber's Expire date. If the value is set to No, raising invoices or generating Auto-Renew Payments will be suppressed if the subscriber's Expire date has a future Unprocessed Permanent Stop.
79. If a subscriber owes a fee, should an auto renew payment be increased to cover the fee? Default Value: No This setting determines whether to include the unpaid fee amount in the payment amount for a subscriber when processing AutoRenew payments.
1. Should the publication name print on renewals and invoices? BCP (Client) If special forms for renewal notices and invoices have been pre-printed with the publication name, you will not need Circulation to print the publication name on these forms when the renewal notices and invoices are printed. However, it may be useful for the publication name to be printed by Circulation in a multi-publication environment where the same renewal form is used for all publications.
2. What format should be used for subscriber billing notices? BCP (Client) This rule allows you to specify the default renewal notice format. The envelope types require that the renewal is stuffed into an envelope. For more information on the formats that export information to ASCII files, see the User Manual. Invoices also use the format selected here.
Examples of these renewal notice formats are given below. Note that these examples are merely approximations—their measurements are not exact. The information that appears in courier font are printed by Circulation
. The remainder is the preprinted notice, which will vary from newspaper to newspaper.
3. Which file map should be used to create the subscriber billing export when the file map format is selected? BCP (Client) If you set the Business Rule, What format should be used for subscriber billing notices?, to “File Map”, identify the name of the file map here. The usage of the file map must be “SubBilling”.
4. Should eBill emails be sent from Circulation to eBill subscribers? BCP (Client) This setting determines whether renewal notices should be e-mailed to eBill subscribers. The eBill notices can be in HTML or text format. The e-mails are sent by the Send eBill option.
5. What format should be used for subscriber billing eBills? BCP (Client)
6. Which subscribers should be included in the eBill export file? BCP (Client) This parameter determines which eBill subscribers are exported to the standard eBill export file, used to generate PDF or other renewal notices outside of Circulation. “Promotional eBills” refer to subscribers who are not on eBill but who are receiving a notice number specified in the Also Include Renewal Periods field for the eBill delivery method in Renewal Delivery Publ setup. For example, you might want to export promotional eBills to the eBill file but send actual eBills directly from Circulation. In that case, you would set this Business Rule to “Promotional eBills Only.”
7. Which file map should be used to create the subscriber eBill export when the file map format is selected? BCP (Client) If the eBill export uses file mapping, identify the specific file map here (“SubBilling” usage).
8. What format should be used for the auto notice export? BCP (Client)
9. What is the maximum number of characters for each address line? B (Client) Specify the maximum number of characters that should be output for an address line in the renewal notice exports. This Business Rule was added to resolve an issue in which longer address lines caused the city to be truncated. If the address line is longer than the setting of this Business Rule, the city will still be truncated. Valid settings are between 28 and 45, with the default being 30.
10. Should subscriber billing files include the product when only one product is selected on input? B (Client) Setting this rule to “y” will cause the subscriber billing output files (renewals999999-999, ebill999999-999, and autorenew999999-999) to be prefixed with the product ID when the selection includes a single product. If the selection includes multiple products, the output files will not include the product ID.
11. Should subscriptions with the same bill-to address/occupant be grouped together when using the Detailed Export 2 format? BCP (Client) Some customers pay for multiple subscriptions, and prefer that all of their subscriptions appear on one renewal notice. For example, Mark Jones might pay for his own subscription and a subscription for his daughter at college. He would like both subscriptions to appear on one renewal notice, so that he can pay for them at the same time. If the Detailed Export 2 format is used, Circulation can group subscriptions with the same bill-to occupant and address. Note that both subscriptions must be selected for renewals. If Mark Jones’ own subscription is selected for renewal, but his daughter’s is not (it has a later expire date), then he will receive one renewal notice now and a separate one at some later date.
12. Should the ZIP POSTNET barcode print on the renewal notice? BCP (Client) The USPS gives discounts for barcoded mail. Barcodes print the ZIP, ZIP extension, and delivery point. Only those addresses that have this information (through Quadient address cleansing software or another product) will print the barcode.
13. When should the carrier route sort print on the renewal notice? BCP (Client) In addition to the ZIP information, you may receive discounts for putting the postal carrier route on the renewal notice. This will not be part of the barcode, if barcoded.
14. Will Postalsoft Presort be used to sort mailed renewals? BCP (Client) You may use Postalsoft’s Presort software to sort your mailed renewal notices according to the latest USPS regulations, which could result in mailing discounts.
If Yes:
15. What is the name of the job file to use for renewals? BCP (Client) In order to sort mailed renewal notices in Presort, you must set up a “job file”, which contains information about the sorting (see the Postware and Label Studio documentation for more information). You specify the name of the job file(s) here—you may have a different one for each publication, or one for the entire business or company. When running renewal notices, you may multi-select products that use the same job file, but you must print renewals for products with different job files separately. We recommend that you make the job file ID different from your product IDs, so as not to come into conflict with job files used with mail labels.
16. Should the optional endorsement line, produced by Postalsoft Presort, be printed on the renewal notice? BCP (Client) The “endorsement line” contains PO route information and can print on the top line of the address block on the renewal notices. This line is necessary for receiving presort discounts. We recommend that you have this set to “yes”.
17. Is full service mailing being used with renewals? BCP (Client) Tray labels can be created when using Postalsoft Presort to sort renewal notices, using Label Studio. This is a requirement if using for Full-Service Intelligent Mail for postal discounts.
18. How many days do you wish to retain Postalsoft data and work files for renewals? BCP (Client) If you are sorting your mailed renewals and invoices through Postalsoft Presort, specify the number of days sort information should be kept. The default is 7 days.
19. Should renewals continue to print for subscriptions that have automatically been switched to carrier collect? BCP (Client) If a subscriber does not renew before their expiration date, many newspapers switch the subscriber to carrier collect (rather than ending the subscription or having the subscriber go into grace). This setting indicates whether renewal notices should print for these carrier collect subscribers who were previously office pay.
20. Which days of the week are valid for delivering renewals via route? BCP (Client) Renewal notices for route-delivered subscriptions can be delivered by the route’s carrier, if the route is set up to deliver renewal notices and the notices are sorted in route order. This setting determines the days of the week on which renewals can be delivered by the carrier. Route sorting will not be allowed for renewal notices delivered on days not defined here. Press F2 to multi-select days. By default, all days are selected.
21. Should grace owed be added into the rate term amounts? BCP (Client) If you will be exporting renewal notices, indicate whether grace owed amounts should be included in the rate terms. For example, if the rate term is normally 18.00, but a subscriber owes 1.50 in grace, the term will be exported as 19.50 if this rule is set to “yes”.
22. Should the rate term amounts be calculated starting at the last expire date or the effective date of the payment? BCP (Client) The rate term amounts that print on renewal notices can be calculated based on the subscriber’s last expire date or the last payment effective date. The payment effective date will be the expire date for all subscribers except those with grace owed in the current subscription period. If a subscriber does have a current grace owed, the payment effective date is the date of the last grace owed. We recommend using the payment effective date only if you recognize revenue for grace during the grace period, and offer short subscription terms (4 weeks or less). If you do use the payment effective date to calculate rate term amounts, you will need to either add the subscriber’s grace owed to the terms (see the previous rule) or factor in the grace owed as a separate line on the renewal notices (if the Detailed Export or Detailed Export 2 formats are used). Also note that the new expire date may only match if the method for paying off grace (see Business Rule in Subscriber Payments section— How should grace be paid off when a payment is received?) is “Before Purchase”. Otherwise, the new expire date may be several days farther out than the new expire date exported in the Detailed Export and Detailed Export 2 formats.
If Expire Date:
23. When using expire date to determine the rate term amount, should the new expire date include lapse-in-service? BCP (NCS) When generating renewal notices and invoices, the subscriber’s expire date can be adjusted for temp stopped periods (lapse in service), based on this parameter. For example, imagine a subscriber’s expire date was 10/1/12 and they temp stopped on 10/5/12, restarting on 4/1/13. With this Business Rule set to “No,” the expire dates for the different rate terms would not be recalculated, and would display on the invoice as (for example) 10/29/12, 11/26/12, and 12/31/12. With the Business Rule set to “Yes,” the expire dates will be recalculated as (for example): 4/24/13, 5/22/13, and 6/26/13. This method of determining the rate term expire dates will probably make more sense to renewing subscribers.
24. Which scan line format should be used when exporting renewals/invoices? BCP (Client) Renewal notices and invoices may contain scan lines, which can then be read in by the newspaper or bank when the notice is returned with a payment. Scan lines do not print on renewal notices, but scan line information is included in all renewal notice exports. This setting determines the scan line format that is used.
25. Should a renewal offer be included in the scan line? BCP (Client) This setting determines if a renewal offer is included in the scan line along with other renewal information.
26. How many rate terms do you export and include in the scan line? BCP (Client) This setting determines how many rate terms are included in the scan line. Four is the default, although between one and ten can be exported.
27. What should the sort order be for exporting rate terms on subscriber renewal notices? BCP (Client) This rule allows you to determine the sort order when exporting rate terms on renewal notices.
28. Limit renewal and invoice payment terms to last paid term and rates with longer terms? BCP (Client) When this rule is set to “yes”, the only terms that will appear are those for which the number of days is equal to or greater than the number of days of the last payment.
29. To which subdirectory under the ‘exchange’ directory should renewals generated from customer service be exported? BCP (Client) The Export Renewal option in Customer Service allows you to export renewal notices and invoices. This setting controls where these transactions are exported. For example, if your exchange directory is /dti/exchange/cm, and you enter “renewals” here, the files will be exported to the /dti/exchange/cm/renewals directory. If no subdirectory is entered here, the file will be exported to the default exchange directory itself. It will have the standard renewal file name plus the subscriber ID.
30. To which subdirectory under the ‘exchange’ directory should grace owed generated from customer service be exported? BCP (Client) An Export Grace button appears on the Transactions tab for grace export transactions. When this button is clicked, the grace export information will be exported to a file located in the default exchange directory and a rebill transaction will be created. This Business Rule identifies the subdirectory within the exchange directory where information is exported.
31. Should invoices and renewals be created for system generated permanently stopped subscribers? BCP (Client) Normally, only customers with current subscriptions are selected for invoices and renewals. This Business Rule allows you to also select subscribers who are permanently stopped.
32. Should subscribers get separate records exported for each rate code they are on while in grace? BCP (Client) This setting affects the “Detailed Export” renewal notice export format. If you set it to “yes”, two additional record segments (Q1 and Q2) will be exported for in-grace subscribers who have a rate change during the grace period. The Q1 segment will contain summary information for all rates up to the rate change. The Q2 segment will contain detailed information for the current rate/delivery schedule.
33. How many days before a start should a subscriber be picked up for an auto renew? B (Client) This setting determines the number of days in advance of a pending new start that an auto-renew subscriber should be selected for auto-renewal. The default is 365 days.
34. Do you bill subscribers in advance for premium days? BCP (Client) Set this Business Rule to “yes” if you charge for bonus days and want to deduct the bonus day premium in advance from subscriber payments, rather than adjusting the subscriber’s expire date once the bonus day paper is delivered.
Note: In the current version, this Business Rule is set to “no” and locked. Contact Naviga Support to change it to “yes” if you wish to bill premium days in advance.
If Yes:
35. Should premium day detail be exported in renewals? BCP (Client) If charging for bonus day premiums in advance, indicate whether premium details should be exported in the Detailed Export 2 format. The default is “no”.
36. How many days should elapse before a subscriber is eligible to receive another printed bill fee? Default Value: 0 This rule determines the number of days allowed before charging the customer with another printed bill fee. Since each renewal term may only have one printed bill fee, this rule will only apply if the specified number of days exceeds the end of the current renewal period.
24. If using Beanstream, what is the web service URL for the authorization server? B (Client) The default is “”.
25. If using Beanstream Hosted Page, what is the web service URL for the lookup request? B (Client) The default is “”.
37. If using Braintree, what is the URL path for the Braintree authorization server? B (Client)
Enter the URL path; for example, /api/transact.php
. The settings of this and the previous Business Rule, when combined into one string, should point to the location where transactions are sent.
For example:
If you are using a test environment prior to go-live, enter the test user name here so that credit cards are not actually charged. Contact to obtain test credentials. The answer will be encrypted.
If you are using a test environment prior to go-live, enter the test password here so that credit cards are not actually charged. Contact to obtain test credentials. The answer will be encrypted.
119. If using PayPal, what is the URL used to obtain a secure token and access the authorization server? BCP (Client) Enter the URL; for example,
Note: If this Business Rule is changed to “Yes,” only credit card numbers with prefixes that match a CC Token Prefix code can be entered. See for more information.
Yes
The validation value is required when entering credit card payments.
No
The validation value is not required.
Yes
Store the validation value until the credit card is authorized; then remove it.
No
Do not store validation values at all.
Yes
Export payments to a file. This is the on-premises default.
No
Do not create an export file.
None
You do not perform real-time credit card authorizations. This is the on-premises default.
viaWARP
You use the viaWARP authorization service without the DTI Authorization Service.
DTI
Select “DTI” if you use a real-time authorization process that utilizes the DTI Payment Authorization web service. This encompasses all supported authorization services other than viaWARP, which can be used in either mode.
Yes
Batches with unauthorized credit card payments can be auto-accepted.
No
Batches with unauthorized credit card payments must be manually accepted.
Yes
“Force” transactions are allowed.
No
“Force” transactions are not allowed.
Yes
Real-time credit card payments that are unprocessed, unauthorized and declined should create GL transactions.
No
Do not create GL transactions for these payments.
Yes
Process authorized credit card payments in suspended batches.
No
Do not authorize these payments.
Authorize.Net
You use Authorize.Net.
Beanstream
Payments will be authorized by Beanstream.
bPoint
You use bPoint.
Braintree
You use Braintree.
Cybersource
Payments will be authorized by the Cybersource Hosted Order Page. Note that this product has been superseded by Cybersource SA and is no longer supported.
Cybersource CPM
Payments will be authorized by Cybersource Payment Manager. Note that this product is no longer supported.
Cybersource SA
Payments will be authorized by Cybersource Secure Acceptance
Dow Jones CCCP
Edgil
You use Edgil EdgCapture.
EPX
You use EPX.
ICVerify Enterprise
You use ICVerify Enterprise Edition.
ICVerify Windows
You use ICVerify Windows Edition.
Moneris
You use Moneris.
None
You do not perform real-time credit card authorizations.
Paymentech
You use Paymentech to perform real-time credit card authorizations.
PayPalHOP
You use PayPal Payments Pro.
TNS
Transaction Network Services
viaWARP
You use viaWARP to perform real-time credit card authorizations.
Yes
Payments can be entered for expired credit cards (validation by credit card processor).
No
Payments cannot be entered for expired credit cards (validation by the HOP).
Yes
Refunds not associated with a payment can be entered.
No
Refunds must be associated with a payment.
Yes
Unsettled refunds can be entered.
No
Unsettled refunds cannot be entered.
.Net
The Edgil .Net interface is being used.
Original
The the original Edgil interface. This is the on-premises default.
Web Service
The Edgil Web Service interface is being used.
Warn
If a warning message should be displayed when the number of returns entered is greater than the number of papers received that day.
Allow
If no warning message should appear when the number of returns entered is greater than the number of papers received that day.
Deny
If no warning message should appear when the number of returns entered is greater than the number of papers received that day.
Yes
Any amount of returns that exceed the original draw amount (upon accepting the batch) will be considered unauthorized.
No
Returns that exceed the original draw amount will still be considered authorized.
Yes
Excess returns should be placed in a separate returns batch.
No
Excess returns should be in the same batch as other returns.
Yes
Create a payment for the collection amount entered.
No
Do not create a payment for the collection amount entered.
Yes
Display a warning if returns have already been entered for the same route on this date.
No
Do not display a warning if returns have already been entered for the same route on the same draw date.
All Allowable Days
All allowable return days will be prefilled.
Allowable Days Not Entered
All allowable return days, except those days for which returns have already been entered, will be prefilled.
First Week Allowable
All allowable return days, up to 7 days, will be prefilled.
Standard
Seven days will be prefilled.
Yes
Returns can be entered for days on which there was no draw.
No
Returns can only be entered for days on which there was draw.
Yes
All accounts on the route for a given imported draw date will receive a billing message when a return is unauthorized (since the account who initiated the unauthorized return cannot be determined).
Also, if the return is unauthorized because of an invalid publication, if accounts are set up to deliver different publications on the route, the billing message will be produced for each publication (since correct publication cannot be determined).
No
An imported return that is unauthorized should not create a billing message.
Yes
The rates should not step up if the payment contains only a coupon or payment adjustment.
No
The rates should step up as normal even if the payment contains only a coupon or payment adjustment.
Always
If entry of a payment-related tracking ID or check number for a subscriber payment should always be required.
Never
If entry of a payment-related tracking ID or number for a subscriber payment is never required. The Check Number field will not be active for entry if this option is selected.
Optional
If entry of a payment-related tracking ID or number for a subscriber payment is optional; it may be entered at the discretion of the operator.
Yes
If entry of a source code is required when a subscriber payment is entered.
No
If entry of a source code is optional when a subscriber payment is entered.
Yes
If entry of a reason code should be required when a subscriber payment is entered.
No
If entry of a reason code should be optional when a subscriber payment is entered.
Yes
Payments will validate subscription and bank to company.
No
This validation will not be performed.
Yes
Payments for different publications should be in separate batches.
No
All payments entered in Customer Services on a given day should be in one batch.
Always
If the entry of a payment should automatically start the subscription of a former permanently stopped subscriber.
Never
If the entry of a payment is not allowed for a former permanently stopped subscriber without a start transaction for that subscriber having been previously entered.
Take Payment Only
If payment entry and subscription starts should be treated as two separate operations, perhaps performed by two different operators. The payment may be entered before or after the start transaction is entered, but the start transaction must be entered before the payment can be processed.
Yes
Former subscribers should be auto-started if they send a payment and the grace percentage of their stop reason code is 100% (if the payment pays off all grace).
No
Former subscribers should not be auto-started if they send a payment and the grace percentage of their stop reason code is 100%.
Yes
The bank can supply the check digit (and so it should be verified).
No
The bank cannot supply the check digit and Circulation should not try to verify it.
Yes
The bank number should be verified against the US banking formula.
No
The bank number should not be verified.
Bank Drafts
Statements will be produced for bank draft auto renew subscribers only.
Both
Statements will be produced for all auto renew subscribers.
Credit Cards
Statements will be produced for credit card auto renew subscribers only.
Never
No auto renew statements will be produced.
Yes
Auto renew subscribers may request a final payment.
No
Auto renew subscribers may not request a final payment.
Yes
The subscriber will still be included in the auto notice export and/or auto renew batch.
No
A message will be logged, and the subscriber will not be included in the auto notice export and/or auto renew batch.
Yes
Alternate credit card numbers can be interfaced for subscriber payments.
No
Alternate credit card numbers are not used with subscriber payments.
EdgCapture
Credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in EdgCapture format.
Edgil
Credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in Payway Complete format. In order to select this option the Payway Complete add-on (a licensed option) must be installed.
EIGEN
Credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in the EIGEN format.
ICVerify
Credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in ICVerify format.
None
Credit card payments will not be interfaced.
Paymentech
Credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in Chase Paymentech format.
PC Charge
Credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in PC Charge format.
POS-Partner 2000
Credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in POS-Partner 2000 format.
Skipjack
Credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in Skipjack format.
TrnsFirst TrnsCentrl
Credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in TransFirst Transaction Central format.
viaWarp
Credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in viaWarp format.
VirtualTerminal
Account credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in Virtual Terminal format.
VISANET
Credit card payments should be exported to an ASCII file in VISANET format.
MMYY
The month should be exported, then the year.
YYMM
The year should be exported, then the month.
Yes
An “ST” field should be exported to the ICVerify file.
No
The “ST” field should be omitted from the export.
MOTO
The MOTO format is used.
None
ICVerify is not used.
Retail
The original, retail format is used.
Yes
American Express credit card payments should be exported to a separate file.
No
American Express credit card payments should be exported with other credit card payments in the ICVerify, Payway Complete, VISANET, etc. file.
Yes
Payment amounts should default from the previous payment.
No
No payment amount should default.
Yes
Only subscriptions billed to the occupant that have not made a payment for their last renewal should be listed when entering group payments.
No
All subscriptions billed to the occupant should be listed when entering group payments.
Automatic
The payment should be automatically split among the subscriptions billed to the occupant.
Manual
No payment amounts should initially default for the subscriptions.
Yes
Refunds will default to credit card if the most recent payment was by credit card. Note that if refunds are being automatically selected (Selected Option is “All” or “Requested”), then refunds for expired credit cards will be treated as cash refunds instead of credit card refunds.
No
Refunds will not default to credit card.
Yes
Refunds should default to bank draft if the most recent payment was a bank draft.
No
Refunds will not default to bank draft.
Yes
Refunds should default to PayPal if the most recent payment was by PayPal.
No
Refunds will not default to PayPal.
Before Purchase
If the grace owed amount should be deducted from the payment before the subscription terms are found. For example, if a subscriber sends in 21.00 for 13 weeks, and has 1.00 grace, the 20.00 remaining in the payment will not be enough to buy 13 weeks and so smaller terms will be bought. If you have term discounts (e.g. a 13 week term is a better deal than a 1 week term) this might result in a significantly shorter subscription period.
After Purchase
If the subscription terms should be found using the full payment amount. The grace amount will then be valued (using the rate the subscriber had while in grace) and the days deducted from the subscription period.
Best Deal
If the subscriber should receive the best deal. This works like “After Purchase”, except that the days valued by rating the grace amount are compared to the actual days the subscriber was in grace; whichever is the best deal for the subscriber (i.e. the lesser number of days) will be deducted from the subscription period.
Best Deal if Rate Chg
If the subscriber should receive the best deal, but only if the subscriber rate was changed via a billing change. The current rate will be used to value the grace amount. If there was no billing change, the “After Purchase” method will be used.
Yes
If the payment is less than or equal to the grace owed amount, extend the grace period.
No
Do not extend the grace period for payments less than or equal to the grace owed amount.
Yes
Payments that have a rate change between entry and processing should be automatically rerated, changing the term and length.
No
Payments that have a rate change between entry and processing should error out, requiring manual modification to set the term and length.
Cash
The default payment type should be cash.
Check
The default payment type should be check.
Credit Card
The default payment type should be credit card.
Bank Draft
The default payment type should be bank draft. Use this setting only if the majority of your addresses are in the United States.
Checking
Bank draft payments can only be made to checking accounts.
Savings
Bank draft payments can only be made to savings accounts.
All
Bank draft payments can be made to both checking and savings accounts.
None
Bank draft is not a valid payment option.
Yes
The client type should be supplied when entering bank draft payments.
No
The client type does not need to be supplied, and the field can be skipped.
None
Bank draft payments should not be interfaced with Edgil or EdgCapture.
EdgCapture
Bank draft payments should be included in the EdgCapture credit card export.
Edgil
Bank draft payments should be included in the Edgil credit card export.
Yes
One-time bank payments should be exported using the Intell-A-Check format.
No
One-time bank payments should not be exported using the Intell-A-Check format.
Effective Date
The effective date will be used.
Publishing Date
The publishing date will be used.
Yes
Imported batches should be accepted automatically by Auto Accept Batches.
No
Imported batches should not be accepted automatically by Auto Accept Batches.
Yes
One-time bank draft payments imported or created by the system should be automatically accepted when running Auto Accept Batches.
No
One-time bank draft payments will not be automatically accepted, but must be accepted in Batch Payments. This will allow bank draft payments for multiple days to be in the same payment batch.
Yes
Allow payment batches to be accepted if they contain payments with blank rates.
No
Do not allow payment batches to be accepted if they contain payments with blank rates.
Yes
Temp-stopped subscribers are included in auto renew processing even if they are not in grace.
No
Temp-stopped subscribers are skipped in auto renew processing unless they are in grace.
Yes
If the publication name should print on renewal notices and invoices.
No
If the publication name is pre-printed on renewal notices and invoices.
Canadian Mailer
If the Canadian mailer format should be used as the default format for renewal notices.
Custom
This option is no longer in use.
Detailed Export
If you wish to export renewal information to an ASCII file in the Detailed Export format. This is similar to the Export Delimited format below, but more information is exported.
Detailed Export 2
If you wish to export renewal information to an ASCII file in the Detailed Export 2 format, which differs somewhat from the Detailed Export. This format allows subscriptions with the same bill-to occupant and address to be grouped on one renewal notice, as described in the next rule.
Envelope
If the standard envelope format should be used as the default format for renewal notices.
Export
If, rather than printing a renewal notice, renewal information should be sent to an ASCII file. The renewal information will be exported in a fixed length format.
Export Delimited
If you wish to export the renewal information into a pipe (|) delimited format rather than fixed length. This is useful if the ASCII file will be imported into word processing software to create the renewal notices.
File Map
If the format of renewal notices is defined in File Map with a usage of “SubBilling”.
Mailer
If the standard mailer format should be used as the default format for renewal notices.
Old Post Card
If the post card format without barcode should be used as the default format for renewal notices.
Other Envelope
If the other envelope format should be used as the default format for renewal notices. The delivery schedule and copies will print where the publication would print on the standard envelope form. Four rates can print on this envelope (as opposed to three on the standard envelope).
Other Mailer
If the other mailer format should be used as the default format for renewal notices. The size and print positions on this mailer are significantly different from the standard mailer.
Post Card
If the post card format with barcodes should be used as the default format for renewal notices.
Tax Envelope
If the standard tax envelope should be used as the default format for renewal notices.
Tax Envelope (Paged)
This is the same format as the Tax Envelope, but a page break occurs after each renewal (so that the notices can be printed on a laser printer).
Two Tax Envelope
If the two tax envelope should be used as the default format for renewal notices. This envelope format is used in Canada and has columns for GST (Goods and Services Tax) and PST (Provincial Sales Tax).
Yes
Renewal notices should be e-mailed to eBill subscribers by Naviga Circulation.
No
Renewal notices will be sent to eBill subscribers outside of Naviga Circulation.
Detailed Export 2
eBills will use the Detailed Export 2 format. Note that this option should only be used when the business rule “What format should be used for the auto notice export?” (#8 in this section) is also set to Detailed Export 2.
File Map
eBills will use file mapping.
eBill
eBills will use the eBill (standard) format.
Both
Both active eBill and promotional eBill subscribers should be exported to the eBill file.
eBill Subscribers Only
Only active eBill subscribers should be exported to the eBill file.
None
No subscribers will be exported to the eBill batch.
Promotional eBills Only
Only promotional eBill subscribers (not currently on eBill) will be exported to the eBill batch.
Detailed Export 2
Auto notice export will use the Detailed Export 2 format.
DTI Standard
Auto notice export will use the DTI Standard format.
Yes
Output files will be prefixed with the product ID.
No
Output files will not include the product ID.
Yes
If subscriptions with the same bill-to address and occupant should be grouped in the renewal notice export.
No
If no grouping should occur.
Yes
If the barcode should print on renewal notices, when possible.
No
If the barcode should not print on renewal notices.
Always
The carrier route should always print on renewal notices.
Never
The carrier route should never print on renewal notices.
Barcoded
The carrier route should print on renewal notices only when barcoded.
Yes
Use Presort to sort mailed renewal notices and invoices.
No
Use Circulation to sort mailed renewal notices and invoices.
Yes
Print the endorsement line on mailed renewals and invoices.
No
Do not print the endorsement line on mailed renewals and invoices.
Yes
Renewal tray labels should be generated by Postalsoft Presort.
No
Postalsoft Presort should not generate tray labels for renewal notices.
Yes
Renewal notices should print for subscribers who have been switched to carrier collect from office pay.
No
Renewal notices should not print for any carrier collect subscribers.
Yes
Grace owed should be included in rate terms in export files.
No
Grace owed should not be included in exported rate terms.
Effective Date
The term amounts should be calculated using the subscriber’s payment effective date.
Expire Date
The term amounts should be calculated using the subscriber’s last expire date.
Yes
The expire date printing on renewal notices will be adjusted for lapse in service.
No
The expire date printing on renewal notices will not be adjusted.
iPost
Scan lines will be in the iPost format.
NCR
Scan lines will be in the NCR format.
Standard
Scan lines will be in the standard format.
Yes
A renewal offer should be included in the scan line. The most expensive term within the oldest active renewal offer will be exported after the last rate term.
No
A renewal offer should not be included in the scan line.
Cost Descending
Rate terms are exported in cost-descending order.
Cost Desc Prev Last
Rate terms are exported in cost-descending order, with the previous rate term exported last.
Prev then Cost Desc
The previous rate term is exported first if the last payment matches it. Remaining rate terms are exported in cost order, from highest to lowest.
Yes
Only terms that meet or exceed the last payment will appear.
No
Payment terms are not limited in this way.
Yes
Permanently stopped customers are selected for invoices and renewals.
No
Only current subscribers are selected.
Yes
Separate records should be exported for each rate code when subscribers have a rate change while in grace.
No
Separate rate code records should not be exported for subscribers in grace.
Yes
Deduct bonus day premiums from subscriber payments. If you charge for bonus days, Naviga recommends setting this parameter to “yes”.
No
Charge bonus day premiums by adjusting the subscriber’s expire date when the bonus day occurs. You should also select this setting if you do not charge for bonus days.
Yes
The expire date printing on renewal notices will be adjusted for lapse in service.
No
The expire date printing on renewal notices will not be adjusted.
1. Should “GraceOwed” transactions be created for subscribers who receive papers in their grace period? BCP (Client) It may be desirable to track the number of papers subscribers receive during their grace period so that number may be subtracted from the number of papers the subscriber will receive in the future for the renewal amount remitted. This option determines whether grace owed transactions are created for subscribers who receive papers during their grace period, but for which the newspaper has not been paid. Grace owed transactions are only created when the grace period ends without a payment being received from the subscriber.
Yes
If grace owed transactions should be created for subscribers who receive papers in their grace period.
No
If grace owed transactions should not be created for subscribers who receive papers in their grace period.
If Yes:
2. What is the minimum grace receivable amount before a bill should be generated for the receivable amount? BCP (Client) Circulation has a feature to export grace owed information to an ASCII file. The file can be imported into another application and used to create subscriber bills for grace owed amounts. This setting governs the minimum amount of grace that should be included in the file. Subscribers whose grace owed is below this amount will not be included. The default is zero.
3. How many days must pass between grace owed exports before a subscriber can be included in another grace export run? BCP (Client) Grace owed can be exported until is fully written off or paid off. Enter the number of days between grace exports in which a subscriber can be included. The default is zero.
4. What is the maximum variance from the calculated amount that an operator may enter for the refund paid? BCP (Client) A subscription refund may be issued to a subscriber who stops before the end of the subscription term. The calculated refund amount will be based on the number of issues remaining in the subscription term, but the operator may need to manually override the refund amount, as in the case of a “full money back” promotion. You may wish to limit the amount of variance allowed in such situations by establishing a maximum variance amount here. Enter the maximum variance allowed (in dollars) between the calculated amount and the override amount. The default value is 99999.99.
5. What is the number of days a subscriber refund should be maintained as available? BCP (Client) A subscriber that perm stops with a positive balance will have an available refund. However, the subscriber might not ask for a refund, and so a refund may not be entered. After a certain period of time, the newspaper may then write off the available refund. Refunds can be written off automatically using Refund Writeoff. This setting determines how many days an available refund must be kept before it can be written off by Refund Writeoff. For example, if “100” is entered here, an available refund will not be written off automatically until it is 100 days old. The default number of days is 182.
6. What is the number of days a subscriber refund should be maintained as available if over the refund limit? BCP (Client) A refund writeoff limit can be defined in Publication setup. Refund writeoffs for amounts over this limit may be required by state law to go to the state. The newspaper may keep these available refunds in Circulation for a shorter or longer period of time than normal available refunds. This setting determines the number of days an available refund must be in the system before it can be written off, if the refund amount is over the writeoff limit. The default is zero.
7. To which system should refunds be automatically interfaced? B (Client) Note: Each of the refund interfaces requires a separate license fee to use. Contact the Naviga Support Center for more information.
When refunds are processed, Circulation can automatically generate an ASCII file for interfacing with SBS, Dunn and Bradstreet, PeopleSoft, or Compu-Share (all are general ledger software programs that handle refunds).
Compu-Share
Refunds will be interfaced to Compu-Share.
Dunn and Bradstreet
Refunds will be interfaced to Dunn and Bradstreet.
Great Plains
Refunds will be interfaced to Great Plains. This is a licensed option.
JD Edwards
Refunds will be interfaced to JD Edwards.
Lawson
Refunds will be interfaced to Lawson. This is a licensed option.
None
Refunds will not be interfaced.
DTI Standard
Refunds will be interfaced to SBS.
PeopleSoft
Refunds will be interfaced to PeopleSoft.
PeopleSoft II
Refunds will be interfaced to PeopleSoft in the second PeopleSoft format.
PeopleSoft3
Refunds will be interfaced to PeopleSoft with expanded record layouts.
8. What is the origin code for subscribers when interfacing to the PeopleSoft accounting system? BC (Client) If you use the PeopleSoft3 file format, this setting populates the ORIGIN field in the voucher file when creating subscriber refunds.
9. What is the default file name for cash refunds? BCP (Client) This setting allows you to set the default file name for the cash refund file. The default setting is aprefund.d.
10. Should cash refunds create separate export files by publication? P (Client) Setting this rule to “y” will cause the refund export file created for A/P (aprefund.d or apvendref.d) to be prefixed with the product ID when the refund is issued via Customer Service or when the batch refund process includes a single product. If the selection includes multiple products, the output file will not include the product ID.
Yes
Refund export files will be prefixed with the product ID.
No
Refund export files will not contain the product ID.
11. Should credit card refunds create separate export files by publication? P (Client)
Refunds to a credit card are be interfaced to a separate file (ccrefund.d) from regular refunds. This setting determines whether credit card refunds for different publications should be in separate files, or in one file. If this rule is set to “yes”, the file names will be ccrefund.d[publication ID]. For example, publication “Times” would have credit card refunds exported to the ccrefund.dtimes
file.
Yes
Credit card refunds should be exported to separate files for each publication.
No
All credit card refunds should be exported to one file.
12. In batch refunds, do you use different vendor information for each subscriber? B (Client) When interfacing subscriber refunds to an AP system, you may not bring over unique vendor information for each subscriber. If this rule is set to “no”, you will only be prompted once for vendor information, after the refund batch is accepted. The vendor information entered will be interfaced for all subscribers in the batch.
Yes
Different vendor information should be entered for each subscriber.
No
One set of vendor information will be used for all subscribers in the batch.
13. Which reason code should be used when writing off the remaining balance of a refund within batch refund entry? BCP (Client) During batch refund entry, there may be situations in which the amount refunded is less than the available refund amount. This setting determines the reason code that should be used for these refunds.
14. Should customer service refunds create separate refund batches by publication? P (Client) Refunds entered in Customer Service are added to a suspended refund batch, which must then be reviewed and accepted in Batch Refunds. This Business Rule determines if a separate batch will be created for a given publication.
Yes
A separate refund batch should be created for the publication.
No
Refunds for the publication will be in a combined refund batch.
15. What is the default GL account for creating vendors in the MediaPlus refund system? BCP (Client) Enter the default general ledger account for interfacing subscriber refunds to the Accounts Payable system. This default can be used in creating vendor records for subscribers to whom you are issuing refunds. The account number should be a clearing general ledger account. If you do not have Accounts Payable (a legacy Naviga product), you can leave this setting blank.
16. What is the default GL account for grace owed adjustments? BCP (Client) Adjustments may be made to grace owed amounts, for example when subscribers are assigned to different rates. Because revenue accounts can be defined by day of week, and there is no specific day for an adjustment, a separate revenue account, specified here, will be used. This account will also be used for grace owed if no other revenue account can be found (because of incomplete setup, for instance).
17. What is the default GL account for subscriber revenue? BCP (Client) If no other CR GL account can be found (because of incomplete setup, for instance), this account will be used as the GL account for subscriber revenue.
18. What is the default GL account for subscriber discount? BCP (Client) If no other discount account can be found (because of incomplete setup, for instance), this account will be used as the GL account for subscriber discounts.
19. How many days must a payment buy to qualify the subscriber for a promotional item? BCP (Client) Some newspapers offer promotional items such as “frequent reader discount cards”. Based on a minimum payment term, the subscriber will receive the promotional item free of charge. Custom programs have been written to produce frequent reader cards. Define the minimum subscription term in days which a subscriber must pay before qualifying for the promotion.
20. How many months must a payment buy to qualify the subscriber for a promotional item? BCP (Client) Some newspapers offer promotional items such as “frequent reader discount cards”. Based on a minimum payment term, the subscriber will receive the promotional item free of charge. Custom programs have been written to produce frequent reader cards. Define the minimum subscription term in months which a subscriber must pay before qualifying for the promotion.
21. Should a transfer-in auto-start a former subscriber? BCP (Client) When money is transferred to a former subscriber, you may elect to automatically create a start for the former (permanently stopped) subscriber instead of requiring a start to be manually entered for the subscription.
Always
If the entry of a transfer-in should automatically start a subscription for the former permanently stopped subscriber.
Never
If the entry of a transfer-in to a former permanently stopped subscriber is not allowed.
Take Transfer Only
If the entry of a transfer-in to a former subscriber is allowed, but a start must be manually entered as a separate step.
22. When transferring money to a subscription, what is the minimum amount that should be considered a payment? BCP (Client) This business rule allows you to treat transfer-in amounts (including transferred refunds) over a specified threshold as payments. If you do not want to use this feature, leave the default amount of 99999.99.
23. Which address should be used for determining a subscriber’s taxability? BCP (Client) Subscriptions may be taxed, based on city, county, state and country tax laws. This setting controls which address is used when determining a subscription tax—the subscriber’s address or the address of the publication.
Publication
The publication’s address should be used when determining subscription taxability.
Subscriber
The subscriber’s address should be used when determining subscription taxability.
If Publication:
24. If the subscriber’s taxability is based on the address of the publication, must the subscriber live in the same state? BCP (Client) Some states tax out-of-state newspaper subscriptions, while others do not. If you tax based on the address of the publication, but the subscriber must live in the state to be taxed, set this rule to “yes”.
Yes
A subscriber must live in the same state in order to be taxed.
No
Subscribers living in other states may be taxed.
25. How should tips be distributed when the subscription is delivered by multiple accounts? BCP (Client) If more than one carrier delivers a subscription, this setting determines how tips sent by the subscriber with a payment will be divided.
Divide Evenly
Tips will be divided evenly among all carriers delivering the subscription.
Weight by Days
Tips will be divided based on the percentage of days delivered by each carrier. For example, if a subscriber has separate weekend and weekday carriers for her seven-day-a-week subscription, and sent a tip of 10.00 with her payment, this method would give 2/7 x 10= 2.86 to the weekend carrier and 5/7 x 10 = 7.14 to the weekday carrier.
26. Are any of your subscriber rates based on ZIP Code? B (Client) This setting determines whether the subscriber’s Zip code will be used in rating. If you enter “no” here, the Zip Code field in Location Rule Setup will be bypassed.
Yes
Some subscriber rates are based on Zip code.
No
No subscriber rates are based on Zip code.
27. What percent of the daily subscription value is required to buy another day? BCP (Client) If one or more of your publications will have subscription rates broken out by day, you need to specify what percentage of a daily rate is needed to buy an extra day. This is used when payments have odd amounts, or subscriptions are extended because of complaints or other adjustments. The default is 100. For example, a subscriber may mistakenly send in 32.00 to buy a three-month subscription that actually costs 31.95. Once the three months are purchased, 0.05 is left over. Say the subscription stops on a Tuesday and the daily rate for Wednesday is 0.10. If this rule is set to “50” or less, the extra day will be awarded (0.05 is 50% of 0.10). However, if rule is set to anything over 50, the 0.05 will not be enough to purchase an extra day—it will become “unallocated”, and be added to the next payment made by the subscriber.
28. Should the value of expire changes be shown in the Show -> Adjustments query? BCP (Client) Expire changes are alterations to the expiration date of a subscription. For example, a complaint might extend the expire date for 1 day, and a payment might extend it for one month. Restarts, permanent stops, and many other transactions can change the expire date. Expire change transactions can be viewed on the Financial tab in Customer Service. This setting determines whether the value of each expire change should also be displayed. The value will be based on the number of publishing days between the new and old expire dates, and the current rate.
Yes
The value of expire changes should be displayed on the Financial tab.
No
The value of expire changes should not be displayed.
29. Should the Show -> Adjustments query include current grace paid as part of the payment’s adjust and discount amounts? BCP (Client) This setting controls whether current grace paid is shown in the Grace Paid column or the Adjust Amount and Discount columns on the Financial tab.
Yes
Current grace paid will appear in the Adjust Amount and Discount columns.
No
Current grace paid will appear in the Grace Paid column.
30. Should renewal subscribers’ credit status be changed when their grace period ends without a payment? BCP (Client) This parameter determines whether subscribers who expire stop without a payment should be assigned a new credit status (the credit status is defined in the Stop Credit Status field in Credit Status Publication setup). This pertains to renewing subscribers only; start and bill subscribers are always switched to the stop credit status.
Yes
Change the credit status when no payment is received.
No
Do not change the credit status.
31. Should grace revenue and discount be recognized while a subscriber is in their grace period? BCP (Client) When a subscriber sends in a payment to purchase a subscription, the newspaper looks at the payment as unearned revenue. As the subscription is delivered, the revenue becomes earned. When a subscriber goes into grace, there is no longer any unearned revenue to be earned, even though the subscription is still being delivered. Most newspapers do not declare earned revenue for papers delivered in a grace period until the subscriber sends another payment—the cost of the grace period is then deducted from the payment and considered earned revenue. If the grace period ends without a payment, a grace owed transaction is created for the cost of the grace period, and the earned revenue is declared, with an offsetting entry made in the Subscriber AR account. Some newspapers, however, have a different accounting practice for grace subscribers—they declare earned revenue for papers delivered in the grace period even if the subscriber is still in grace (i.e. before another payment arrives). This means they will have more accurate earned revenue figures at, for example, the end of a fiscal period. If your newspaper recognizes earned revenue for grace days while subscribers are still in grace, enter “yes”. Otherwise enter “no”. If you enter “yes”, earned revenue for subscribers in grace will be updated when the Grace Due report is run. Grace accrual transactions will be created for these subscribers, which will cause the revenue for delivering the grace days to become earned. The grace accrual is the running total of the grace amount the subscriber has accumulated. A reversing grace accrual transaction is also created with a transaction date of the end date of the report plus one day, which causes it to be picked up in the next fiscal period.
Yes
Earned revenue should be declared for grace days delivered while the subscriber is still in their grace period.
No
Earned revenue should not be declared for grace days until the grace period has ended or a payment has been received.
32. What is the total maximum grace days a subscriber may have? BCP (Client) Some newspapers deduct unpaid grace days from a subscriber’s previous subscription from the grace days allowed for a new subscription. For example, say subscriber Jones had 84 days of grace owed from previous subscriptions, and the maximum grace days were 90. If Jones starts again she will only be allowed 6 grace days with this subscription, even though her credit status allows her 30 grace days. The default is zero days.
33. Is balance forward subscriber billing allowed? BCP (Client) This Business Rule enables a subscription billing option that creates a balance forward bill, which includes any balance due from previous months, charges and credits since the last bill date, and the charge for the next billing period. When entering a start or billing change transaction, users will indicate that balance-forward billing is to be used.
Yes
Balance-forward subscriber billing is allowed.
No
Balance-forward subscriber billing is not allowed.
If Yes:
34. How many days past the expiration date before a balance forward bill is no longer produced? BCP (Client) If you use balance-forward billing, enter a number of days. When this threshold is reached, balance-forward bills will no longer be produced for the subscriber, and the subscriber is considered carrier collect. The default is 9999.
35. Will Postalsoft Presort be used to sort mailed balance forward bills? BCP (Client) You may use Postalsoft’s Presort software to sort your balance forward bills according to the latest USPS regulations, which could result in mailing discounts.
Yes
Use Presort to sort mailed balance forward bills.
No
Use Circulation to sort mailed balance forward bills.
If Yes:
36. What is the name of the job file to use for balance forward bills? BCP (Client) In order to sort mailed renewal notices in Presort, you must set up a “job file”, which contains information about the sorting (see the Postware and Label Studio documentation for more information). You specify the name of the job file(s) here—you may have a different one for each publication, or one for the entire business or company. When running balance forward bills, you may multi-select products that use the same job file, but you must print bills for products with different job files separately. We recommend that you make the job file ID different from your product IDs, so as not to come into conflict with job files used with mail labels.
37. Should the optional endorsement line, produced Postalsoft Presort, be printed on the balance forward bills? BCP The “endorsement line” contains PO route information and can print on the balance forward bills. This line is necessary for receiving presort discounts. We recommend that you have this set to “yes”.
Yes
Print the endorsement line on balance forward bills.
No
Do not print the endorsement line on balance forward bills.
38. How many days do you wish to retain Postalsoft data and work files for balance forward bills? BCP (Client) If you are sorting your balance forward bills through Postalsoft Presort, specify the number of days sort information should be kept. The default is 7 days.
39. Which demographic is used to define a subscription length level? BCP (Client) This setting is used with subscription-length pricing. It identifies the demographic ID that will be used to store the subscriber’s subscription length. “Low integer” values are set within the demographic to indicate a range of days.
40. Which demographic is used to define the date of a change to subscription length level? BCP (Client) This setting is used with subscription-length pricing. The demographic identified here stores the date at which the subscriber’s subscription-length level was last updated.
41. How many days can a subscriber be permanently stopped without impacting their subscription length level? BCP (Client) This setting is used with subscription-length pricing. It defines the maximum number of days, by product, that a subscriber may be permanently stopped before excluding that period for subscription-length determination. For example, if you enter “90” here, and a subscriber has a permanently stopped period of 90 days or more, the next start date after that period will be used to determine the active subscription length. Temporarily stopped subscribers are considered active.
42. Which demographic is used to define the expiration date of a subscription length level lock? BCP (Client) This setting is used with subscription-length pricing and subscription-length lock. This will be a subscription “date” demographic that is used to store the date through which the subscription level will be locked.
43. How many days should be added to the system date to define the default subscription length level lock period? BCP (Client) This setting is used with subscription-length pricing and subscription-length lock. If no answer exists to the demographic defined above, this value will be the default when entering the demographic answer (“today” plus the number of days entered here).
44. Should the Tax Export export refund amounts with a negative sign? BCP (Client) This setting controls whether refund amounts are exported with a minus symbol (-).
Yes
Refund amounts should be exported with a “-” sign in the Tax Export.
No
Refund amounts should be exported as positive amounts (without the “-” sign).
45. What is the default name for the subscriber refund vendor balance file? BCP (Client) The vendor file is exported with refunds. The default file name is “apvendref.d.”
46. Should declined CC refunds for subscribers on digital-only addresses be moved to a new batch instead of cash? Default Value: No This setting controls the refund created against Digital Address Subscribers. If the value is set to Yes, then a new Suspended Batch ID is created and assigned to the pending refund transaction.
This section of Business Rules will appear only if you have purchased the transportation exclusion option for Remit on Payment.
1. What is the daily subsidy amount which should be added to the remit on payment trans cost calculation? BCP (Client) If a subsidy amount can be added to the transportation cost when calculating the tax exclusion, enter the per copy amount added to the carrier’s delivery credit. The default is zero.
2. What is the minimum cost of a [day of week] paper which should be used in the remit on payment trans cost calculation? BCP (Client) Tax laws may define a minimum subscription copy rate for the transportation exclusion. If the credit to the carrier is greater than the amount paid by the subscriber, the transportation cost will be based on the subscriber’s copy rate minus the minimum copy rate. The minimum copy rate is defined for each day of the week separately. The default is zero.
Household Management is a separate application used to manage address and occupant information that is shared between Circulation and Ad Management, MediaPlus Advertising, or AudienceReach.
Settings for Circulation’s integration with AudienceReach are located in the Audience section.
1. What is the host name for the DTI Audience server? B (Client) Enter the name of the AudienceReach server here.
2. What is the URL Path for the DTI Audience service? B (Client)
Enter the URL for the AudienceReach server here. The default is “/csp/ad/public/
.”
3. What is the class path for the DTI Audience service? B (Client) Enter the location on the Audience server where the Circulation Audience web service is located. The default is “dt.audience.profiler.service.”
4. What is the WSDL name for the DTI Audience service? B (Client)
Enter the name of the WSDL file used by the Circulation Audience web service, which determines the format of the XML file used by the service. The default is “IntegrationService.CLS?WSDL=1
.”
5. What is the maximum batch size for transferring genome information to the DTI Audience service? B (Client) The default is “192.” This determines the number of records sent in a call to the AudienceReach service. It does not affect the total number of records exported. You should not need to change the default unless directed to by Naviga.
6. Should genome information transferred by the Audience Sync utility include passwords? B (NCS) This parameter determines whether Circulation sends web passwords for subscribers during the Audience Sync process.
Yes
Web passwords will be sent during Audience Sync.
No
Passwords will not be sent during Audience Sync.
7. Should genome information be transferred immediately when registration details change? B (NCS) This Business Rule determines whether Circulation sends updates when doing an “instant synch” via the Audience web service as a result of a subscriber changing their e-mail address or account information.
Yes
Information will be transferred to Audience when registration details change.
No
Changing registration details will not trigger updates to be sent to Audience.
8. Should genome information be limited to one profile per occupant? B (NCS) You can choose to transfer only one profile per occupant to Audience Sync. For example, an occupant with two addresses (due to a move or a subscription being delivered to a different address) would have only one profile interfaced. This is necessary in Audience 2011 and greater, as the e-mail address must now be a unique value, and it is also required for some pay wall environments where the login ID is the e-mail address.
Yes
Only one profile per occupant should be transferred to Audience.
No
Multiple profiles can be transferred per occupant.
9. Should genome information be transferred only for subscribers? B (NCS) You can choose to transfer only subscribers for certain publications to Audience via Audience Sync. If so, set this parameter to “yes” and indicate the publications in the parameter If transferring genome information only for subscribers, should these subscribers be included?, below. This will reduce the amount of profile data transferred by the integration, and the number of errors that are generated by the process due to erroneous data and other issues.
Yes
Only information for subscribers should be transferred to Audience.
No
Information for all occupants should be transferred to Audience.
If Yes:
10. If transferring genome information only for subscribers, must they have complete web user registration details? B (NCS) If interfacing only subscribers to Audience, Audience Sync can exclude subscribers with incomplete, missing or invalid registration information (e.g. no active email address, no password, invalid email address, non-SHA-1 password). This feature can be useful in environments where Audience Sync is being used to support a subscriber access pay wall. Answer this parameter “yes” to exclude profiles with bad or missing login information in Genome Synch.
Yes
Only subscribers with complete registration details will be transferred.
No
All subscribers will be transferred.
11. If transferring genome information only for subscribers, should these subscribers be included? BCP (NCS) This Business Rule can be used to limit AudienceReach integration to certain companies or publications. For example, if set to “yes” for publication Times but “no” for other publications, only subscribers for the Times would be interfaced.
Yes
Transfer information for the subscribers of the publication, company or business selected.
No
Do not transfer information for the subscribers of the publication, company or business selected.
12. What is the host name for the Audience API's XML Schema location? B (Client) This will typically be the same as the host name for the Audience server entered above. The XML Schema is used to synch demographics defined in Circulation with AudienceReach.
13. What is the URL Path for the Audience API's XML Schema location? B (Client) Enter the URL for the XML Schema. The default is “hm/xmlschema”.
14. What is the Task Group for manual tasks for creating products via Audience? B (Client) E-mail campaigns in Audience are sent to Circulation for distribution. When this happens, a task can be generated in the Circulation Task system, reminding users in this task group to check the TM setup.
15. What is the Task Group for manual tasks when adding targets for a specific delivery date, via Audience? B (Client) A manual task can also be created for each delivery date for a campaign. For example, if the campaign is set up to e-mail the selected profiles on March 6, and make phone contact starting on March 9, two tasks would be created in the Circulation Task system for users in this task group, one for March 6 and one for March 9. The tasks remind users to process the TM product and confirm that the campaign was distributed correctly.
16. What is the default delivery publication for products created via the Audience API? B (Client) When a TM product is created as a result of a campaign launched in AudienceReach, this delivery publication will be used by default (the delivery publication can later be changed in Targeted Marketing). The delivery publication determines the routes, trucks, and other distribution entities that are used with the product.
17. What is the default process to run for products created via the Audience API? B (Client) When a TM product is created for an Audience campaign, it can be automatically assigned to an output format, such as StormPost or an ASCII export, if specified here. Enter the name of the format to assign the product. (The format should already exist in TM.)
Note: Most of the Business Rules in this section are also found in the General section in Circulation.
1. In which country are the addresses primarily located? B (Client) See description in the General section in Circulation.
2. Does the user name in the CIRC API need to be a valid user in the database? B (Client) This setting allows sites to optionally validate users making Circulation API calls.
Yes
Users making Circulation API calls will be validated.
No
Users making Circulation API calls will not be validated.
3. Which day is considered the first day of the week? B (Client) See description in the General section in Circulation.
4. How many addresses should be displayed when searching and multiple addresses match the selection criteria? B (Client) See description in the General section in Circulation.
5. How many occupants should be displayed when searching and multiple occupants match the selection criteria? B (Client) See description in the General section in Circulation.
6. What is the maximum number of items that should display in an F2 lookup? B (Client) See description in the General section in Circulation.
7. What is the Task Group for manual tasks for subscribers? BCP (Client)
8. What is the Task Group for manual tasks for non-subscribers? BCP (Client) Tasks interfaced via the Circulation API will be created in Circulation for the task groups specified by these parameters. Different groups can be defined for subscribers and non-subscribers.
9. Should starts via the Circ API be suspended? BCP (Client) Starts interfaced from the Circulation API will initially be suspended, if this Business Rule is set to “yes”. If Circulation API starts do not need review before being processed, set this parameter to “no”.
Yes
Starts interfaced by the Circulation API should be suspended.
No
Starts interfaced by the Circulation API should not be suspended.
1. Do you want shortages to print to a dedicated printer at entry time? BCP (Client) You may have a printer set up for the exclusive purpose of printing shortages. This setting determines whether shortages will print on the dedicated printer immediately after they are entered in Route Service.
Always
If you always want shortages to print on a dedicated printer at entry time.
Never
If you do not have a dedicated printer set up for printing shortages.
Ask
If you have a dedicated printer set up for printing shortages but would like to ask the operator if the shortage should print.
If Always or Ask:
2. What is the device name of the printer for automatically printing shortages? BCP (Client) If a printer has been set up to print shortages, enter the printer’s device name here. Examples of device names are: lp0, lp, and lpt1. See your System Administrator for this information.
3. Do you allow entry of shortages prior to final transaction processing? BCP (Client) Final transaction processing is typically completed for the day before the routes receive their papers, so any shortages are reported on that date or later. This setting determines whether Circulation validates the shortage date so that no shortages can be entered for unprocessed dates. You may want to have this set to “yes” if, for example, you enter shortages for advance sections.
Yes
Shortages can be entered for dates that have not completed final transaction processing.
No
A date must have completed final transaction processing before a shortage can be entered for it.
4. What is the default dispatch indicator in shortage transactions? BCP (Client) This setting determines the default for the Dispatch flag when entering shortages. If shortages are typically dispatched, set this rule to “yes”.
Yes
Dispatch should default to “y”.
No
Dispatch should default to “n”.
5. What draw adjust code should be used when a shortage is fulfilled via the resupply process? BCD (Client) Select the draw adjustment code to use when a shortage is dispatched via the resupply process. This is not used for an actual resupply request (Request Resupply field checked when entering the shortage). It is used only for shortages that have Request Resupply unchecked but which are dispatched via the resupply process (by clicking the Resupply button in Dispatching). Only draw adjustment codes that do not update AAM or charge the carrier can be specified (in the case of the shortage, the draw has already been counted).
6. What format should be used by the Burt Export? BCP (Client) Note:
The Burt interface requires a separate license fee to use. Contact the Naviga Support Center for more information.
This setting identifies the Burt format to use. The default setting is “Version 4.” The other option is “Version 7.”
7. What should the file extension be for Burt export files? BCP (Client) This setting determines the file extension of Burt export. The valid options are “ProductID,” “Draw Date,” and “ProductID and Draw Date” (the default).
8. In the Burt Export, should the ‘class of sale’ field contain the 1st 2 characters of the route/single copy type or HD/SC? BCP (Client) The Burt Export interfaces Circulation draw and route information to Burt inserting software. Burt has the concept of a “class of sale”, and this is a field in the export. Depending on how this rule is set, home delivery routes will have the first two characters of their route type or “HD” exported as the Class of Sale, and single copy routes will have the first to characters of their single copy type or “SC” exported.
HD/SC
Export “HD” or “SC” in the Class of Sale field.
Route/Single Type
Export the route type or single copy type of the route in the Class of Sale field.
9. In the Burt Export, should carrier routes or ad zones be used to export ad routes? BCP (Client) The Burt Export creates both an ad route and a carrier route file (“ad routes” are route groupings used in building ad zones). Because Circulation does not have a concept of ad routes, sites must either export each carrier route as an ad route, or define ad routes as ad zones (each of which would contain one or more carrier routes).
Carrier Route
Carrier routes should be exported as ad routes.
Ad Zone
Ad routes will be defined by ad zones.
If Ad Zone:
10. In the Burt Export, what is the ad zone map to use to identify ad zones which are ad routes? BCP (Client) If ad routes are defined by ad zone, Circulation needs to differentiate the ad routes from the bona fide ad zones used by InsertPlus. This is done by setting up a special ad zone map, identified here, for the ad route ad zones.
11. In the Burt Export, should the truck departure sequence be exported as the Sequence Offset? BCP (Client) This setting will enable the truck departure sequence to be exported as the sequence offset. If this setting is “yes”, Burt will export the last four digits of the TruckDeparture.DepartureOrder in the Sequence Offset field of the Carrier Route file. If the departure order is “0312”, for example, the offset will be exported as “03:12”. If this setting is “no”, “00:00” will be exported instead.
Yes
Export the truck departure sequence as the sequence offset.
No
Do not export the truck departure sequence as the sequence offset.
12. In the Burt Export, should the ‘route sequence’ field be incremented with each route? BCP (Client) This parameter determines whether the route sequence number exported to Burt will be incremented with each route within the drop.
Yes
The route sequence field exported to Burt should be incremented. The export files will be exported in truck, drop, route descending order.
No
The route sequence field should always be exported as “0000”. The export will sort by route ID.
13. In the Burt Export, should bulk routes on a truck be exported as a single record? BCP (Client) This parameter determines whether bulk routes on a truck are “rolled up” to export as a single record to Burt. If so, the carrier route and ad route exported will be “BULK” plus the truck ID.
Yes
All bulk routes on a truck should be exported as a single record to the AR and CR files.
No
Bulk routes should be exported as separate records to the AR and CR files.
14. Does the route indicator vary by route for the Burt Export? BCP (Client) If you set this rule to “yes”, you will be able to indicate “route” (and not just “parts” or “completes”) on the Burt Export screen, as well as enter the appropriate Burt indicator.
Yes
The route indicator varies by route, and “route” is a valid option in the Burt Export.
No
The route indicator does not vary, enter only “parts” or “completes” in the Burt Export.
15. Should routes with zero draw be exported to Burt? BCP (Client) This setting determines whether routes with zero draw are exported to Burt.
Yes
Zero-draw routes will be exported to Burt.
No
Zero-draw routes will not be exported to Burt.
16. Should mail draw quantities be included in the Burt Export? BCP (Client) Draw for mail subscribers can be exported to the Burt ad route and carrier route files, as governed by this Business Rule.
Yes
Mail subscribers should be exported to Burt.
No
Mail subscribers should not be included in the Burt export.
If Yes:
17. If mail draw is being included in the Burt Export, what is the Class of Sale for mail? BCP (Client) If mail subscribers are being exported to Burt, enter the class of sale that should be used for mail. The default is “MA”.
18. Should mail be zoned in the Burt Export? BCP (Client) If you set this Business Rule to “no”, only one mail record will be exported. The truck and drop ID will be “PO” (not “ML” as with zoned mail). If you leave this Business Rule set to “yes”, every Zip code that has mail subscribers will be exported as a separate record. A record will be exported for each Zip code/edition combination and include the draw for all mail subscribers in that Zip code. The route ID will be “Z” plus the Zip code, and the truck ID will be “ML” plus the ad zone. Mail subscribers with Zip codes that are not assigned to an ad zone will be exported with ad zone “MAIL”. The ad zone will also be “MAIL” if the Ad Zone Type is set to “Zip” rather than “Ad Zone”. If the Ad Zone Type is set to “Truck,” one record will be exported for each edition.
Yes
Every Zip code with mail subscribers will be exported separately.
No
Only one mail record will be exported.
19. What entry discount code should be exported to Burt? BCP (Client)
20. What presort discount code should be exported to Burt? BCP (Client) The entry discount and presort discount are exported to the Burt carrier route (CR) file. Identify them using these Business Rules.
21. In the GMA/SAM Export, what is the default circ group? BCP (Client) This setting defines the default that will be displayed in the Circ Group field when using the GMA/SAM Export option. If you want a circ group to default, enter it here. Note: The GMA/SAM interface requires a separate license fee to use. Contact the Naviga Support Center for more information.
22. Should the account type, route or time zone ZIP be exported as the GMA/SAM Zone Group? BCP (Client)
Account Type
The route’s SAM account type (based on the route type and defined in GMA/SAM Account Type) will be exported as the zone group.
Time Zone Zip
The route’s time zone Zip will be exported as the zone group.
Route
The route ID will be exported as the zone group.
23. What should be exported as the GMA/SAM Content Code? BCP (Client) This setting determines if the publication or edition ID should be exported in the Content Code field of the GMA/SAM export.
Publication
The route’s publication ID will be exported as the content code.
Edition
The route’s edition ID will be exported as the content code.
Edition + Demographic
The first six characters of the route’s edition, plus the first character of the route’s preprint demographic, will be exported as the content code. The format will be: [edition ID]-[preprint demographic].
Depot
The depot ID by day of week will be exported as the content code.
24. What is the Plant Code for the GMA/SAM Export? BCP (Client) This setting allows a plant code of up to 10 characters to be defined. This setting will be exported in the Plant Code field of the GMA/SAM export file. If this value is missing, the circulation group will be exported instead.
25. What single copy demographic should be used to set the Pad Disable flag in the GMA/SAM Export? BCP (Client) The Pad Disable flag is a “y/n” field in the GMA/SAM export file. This setting allows you to populate the Pad Disable flag with the value of a single copy demographic answer that has an answer type of “logical.” If no demographic is entered here, a blank will be exported for this value. A blank will always be exported for home delivery routes.
26. What single copy demographic should be used for storing the Address 1 data for the GMA/SAM export? BCP (Client)
27. What single copy demographic should be used for storing the Address 2 data for the GMA/SAM export? BCP (Client) These two settings are used to indicate which single copy demographic answers are used to export the Address 1 and Address 2 data for the GMA/SAM Export. If these Business Rules are not set, address fields are exported normally.
28. Should the parent truck be included in the drop sequence in the GMA/SAM Export? BCP (Client) If a route is dropped by a relay truck, this parameter determines whether the relay parent ins incorporated into the drop sequence exported to SAM.
Yes
The parent truck should be included in the drop sequence exported to SAM. The drop sequence will be exported as “0000000000.11111” (“0000000000” is the drop sequence of the relay truck on the parent truck, and “11111” is the drop sequence of the route on the relay truck). If there is no relay truck, “00000” will be exported for the relay truck’s drop sequence.
No
The parent truck should be included in the drop sequence exported to SAM.
29. What should be exported as the GMA/SAM Drop Name? BCP (Client) This setting determines whether the route or tuck ID is exported in the Drop Name field in the SAM draw file.
Route ID
The route ID exports as the drop name.
Truck ID
The truck ID exports as the drop name.
30. Should mail draw quantities be included in the GMA/SAM draw file? BCP (Client) This setting allows a mail draw quantity to be exported for each label in the GMA/SAM draw file.
Yes
Mail quantities will be exported to SAM.
No
Only route draw will be exported to SAM.
31. How many weeks of historical draw should be shown when viewing a single copy route? BCP (Client) This setting controls the number of weeks of historical draw are show when viewing a single copy route in Route Service. You can enter a value from 1 to 6, with 6 being the default. The weeks are shown in descending date order.
32. What additional lines of draw information should appear in the Batch Draw Change table? BCP (Client) This setting controls whether historical and/or projected draw are displayed on the Batch Draw Change entry screen.
Both
Both historical and projected draw will be shown.
Historical
Historical draw will be shown.
None
Neither historical nor projected draw will be shown.
Projected
Projected draw will be shown.
33. Should a task be created when adding draw to a route that is not assigned to a truck? BCP (Client) When adding draw to a route that is not assigned to a truck, you can have a task created automatically as a reminder to assign the route.
Yes
A task will be created automatically in this situation.
No
A task will not be created.
34. Where are the signatures captured by Syncronex stored? BCS (Client) This setting identifies the directory where signature images captured by Syncronex are stored. Signature images can be viewed in Route Service if the image file is found in this directory. The default is “/dti/exchange/cm/secure ” (“/dti/exchange/” for on-premises sites).
35. Should the system default the effective date in Distribution Maintenance? B (Client) The effective date can default when making changes in Distribution Maintenance, based on this parameter.
Yes
The system will scan truck sequence route records to find the range of cutoff dates for products in the truck sequence. This will establish a historical period, a current period, and a future period. The date defaulted is the last cutoff date.
No
The date will remain blank until it is entered by the user, and there will be no historical, current, or future periods.
36. Should the build default to full or departure distribution in Distribution Maintenance? B (Client) This setting determines which of the two “build” radio buttons is selected by default when Distribution Maintenance is launched.
Full
Full Distribution Build is selected by default. Using the “full” build method, the act of expanding an object in the tree merely displays details that have already been loaded.
Departure
Departure Distribution Build is selected by default. Using the “departure” build method, the act of expanding an object in the tree causes the next level of detail to be loaded.
37. Should separate returns batches be created for each product in a returns import file? BC (Client) This Business Rule allows separate returns batches to be created for each product when running Returns Import.
Yes
A separate returns batch will be created for each product in the import file when running Returns Import.
No
Only one returns batch will be created by Returns Import even if multiple publications are included in the import file.
38. Should separate adjustment batches be created for each product in an adjustment import file? BC (Client) This Business Rule allows separate returns batches to be created for each product when running Draw Adjust Import.
Yes
A separate draw adjustment batch will be created for each product in the import file when running Draw Adjust Import.
No
Only one draw adjustment batch will be created by Draw Adjustment Import even if multiple publications are included in the import file.
39. Should route level subsidies be included in transportation costs? BCP (Client) A transportation cost subsidy amount can be defined at the route level. If a subsidy amount is specified, it increases the transportation cost for taxing purposes. This parameter only needs to be answered “yes” if the subsidy amount changes at a route level. If a single subsidy is used, you can specify it for the Business Rule What is the daily subsidy amount which should be added to the remit on payment trans cost calculation? (Transportation Cost section).
Yes
Transportation cost subsidies can be entered at the route level.
No
Transportation cost subsidies cannot be entered for individual routes.
40. What should be exported as the GMA/SAM publication group? BCP (Client) The information in these fields will export at the end of the DN records in the GLBL or Global file when using version 1.2 in the Business Rule: “What version of the GMA/SAM Global Import File Business are you using?” or when using version 2.3 in the Business Rule: “What version of the GMA/SAM Circulation Import File Business are you using?”
41. What should be exported as the GMA/SAM default drop group? BCP (Client) The information in these fields will export at the end of the DN records in the GLBL or Global file when using version 1.2 in the Business Rule: “What version of the GMA/SAM Global Import File Business are you using?” or when using version 2.3 in the Business Rule: “What version of the GMA/SAM Circulation Import File Business are you using?”
42. Which GMA/SAM version should be used? Default Value: Export without Bundle Info
When value is set to "Export with Bundle Info": Running GMA/SAM Export will add five new fields to the current file (Zip, Publication, Bundle Size, Key Bundle, and Company).
When value is set to "Export without Bundle Info": Running GMA/SAM Export will not include the above mentioned five fields.
1. Should automatic selection of same editions be skipped for publishing group when running bundle, manifest and stacker? B (Client) If using publishing groups and separate publishing runs by edition (Cutoff by Edition flagged in Publication setup), when selecting an edition for bundle tops, the truck manifest or the stacker interface, all of the other publishing runs for the same edition may or may not be auto-selected, based on this parameter.
Yes
When selecting an edition for bundle tops, the truck manifest or the stacker interface, only the publishing run flagged will be selected.
No
When selecting an edition for bundle tops, the truck manifest or the stacker interface, other publishing runs in the publishing group with the same edition (but different products, truck departures and truck sequences) will be auto-selected.
2. Which days should display on the draw history/estimated draw section of the daily draw worksheet? BCP (Client) This setting determines how the draw history/estimated draw section of the daily draw worksheet is displayed.
Consecutive Days
Consecutive days are displayed.
Same Weekday
The same weekday is displayed.
3. What is the print order for the daily draw worksheet? BCP (Client) The daily draw worksheet may be printed in either AAM column or district manager order.
AAM column
If the daily draw worksheet should be printed in AAM column order.
District
If the daily draw worksheet should be printed in district manager order.
4. How many days of previous draw history for the daily draw worksheet? BCP (Client) You may request from zero to six days of previous route draw history to be printed on the daily draw worksheet. A combined total of no more than six days of draw history (previous and/or future) may be printed.
0
Do not print route draw history on the daily draw worksheet.
1
Print one day of previous draw history on the daily draw worksheet.
2
Print two days of previous draw history on the daily draw worksheet.
3
Print three days of previous draw history on the daily draw worksheet.
4
Print four days of previous draw history on the daily draw worksheet.
5
Print five days of previous draw history on the daily draw worksheet.
6
Print six days of previous draw history on the daily draw worksheet.
5. How many days of future draw estimates for the daily draw worksheet? BCP (Client) You may request from zero to six days of future route draw history to be printed on the daily draw worksheet. A combined total of no more than six days of draw history (previous and/or future) may be printed.
0
Do not print route draw history on the daily draw worksheet.
1
Print one day of future draw history on the daily draw worksheet.
2
Print two days of future draw history on the daily draw worksheet.
3
Print three days of future draw history on the daily draw worksheet.
4
Print four days of future draw history on the daily draw worksheet.
5
Print five days of future draw history on the daily draw worksheet.
6
Print six days of future draw history on the daily draw worksheet.
6. Should the account name or the route name/location print on the Daily Draw Worksheet? BCP (Client) This setting determines whether the account name or the route name and location are displayed on the Daily Draw Worksheet. Select “Account Name” (the default) or “Route Name.”
7. If rating carrier collect draw, should a rate code be required when entering draw changes? BCP (Client) If this Business Rule is set to “yes”, draw change entry and returns entry will require a rate code for carrier collect draws and returns.
Yes
A rate code is required for carrier collect draws and returns.
No
A rate code is not required for carrier collect draws and returns.
8. Are changes to the truck sequence allowed in “Enter Bundle Info”? BCP (Client) This setting determines whether the truck sequence can be changed during the publishing run. (The truck sequence is changed by rejecting the default shown in the Truck Sequence field on the Enter Bundle Info window and entering a different one.)
Yes
The truck sequence can be changed during the publishing run.
No
The truck sequence cannot be changed during the publishing run.
9. Should the export file set for multi-pack products default to 'One File Set' in 'Enter Bundle Info'? BCP (Client) This setting controls the default setting of the Create One File Set checkbox in Enter Bundle Info, which is used to combine all multi-pack editions into one set of export files.
Yes
One File Set should be checked by default in Enter Bundle Info.
No
One File Set should be unchecked by default in Enter Bundle Info.
10. Should the account’s phone number print on the bundle top? BCP (Client) The carrier’s phone number may print on the bundle tops that accompany papers the carrier receives for delivery.
Yes
If the carrier’s phone number should print on bundle tops.
No
If the carrier’s phone number should not print on bundle tops.
11. Should the subscriber’s phone number print on the bundle top? BCP (Client) The subscriber’s phone number may print on the bundle tops for subscriber-related messages that accompany papers the carrier receives for delivery.
Yes
If the subscriber’s phone number should print on bundle tops. If the subscriber’s phone number is an unlisted number, it will not print.
No
If the subscriber’s phone number should not print on bundle tops.
12. When printing stop messages, should the restart date print on the bundle top? BCP (Client) Restart dates can be entered with a stop transaction. This setting governs whether the restart date should print with the stop transaction on bundle tops, if a date has been entered.
Yes
The restart dates should print with the stop, if available.
No
The restart date should never print with the stop.
13. Should account payments print on the bundle top? BCP (Client) In order to keep carriers better informed of activity, account payment information may print on the bundle tops.
Yes
Account payment information should print on bundle tops. Canceled payments will also print on bundle tops.
No
Account payment information will not print on bundle tops.
14. Should subscriber payments print on the bundle top? BCP (Client) In order to keep carriers better informed of activity, subscriber payment information may print on the bundle tops.
Yes
Subscriber payment information should print on the bundle tops. NSF checks and canceled payments will also print on bundle tops.
No
Subscriber payment information should not print on the bundle tops.
15. Should complaints print on the bundle top? BCP (Client) Complaints may print on the bundle tops to accompany papers the carrier receives for delivery. Selected complaint codes may be defined to not print on the bundle tops.
Yes
If complaints should print on bundle tops.
No
If complaints should not print on bundle tops.
16. What label should display for complaints on the bundle tops? BCP (Client) This Business Rule allows you to set the text that will appear as the label for complaints on bundle tops. The default setting is “Complaint”.
17. Should multiple-day complaints generate separate messages when the date range includes the most recent delivery date? BCP (Client) You can generate a separate bundle top message for the current complaint of a multiple-day complaint, with the remaining complaints included in another message. If all of the complaints are for previous dates, then only one message is created.
Yes
A separate message should be generated for the current complaint of a multiple-day complaint.
No
Only one message should be generated for a multiple-day complaint.
18. Should returns print on the bundle top? BCP (Client) Returns may print on the bundle top (all returns that have not previously appeared on the bundle top will print).
Yes
If returns should print on bundle tops.
No
If returns should not print on bundle tops.
19. Should bundle detail print for each advance section when printing bundle tops for the main publishing run? BCP (Client) Bundle detail may be printed for advance sections. If this rule is set to “yes”, the standard bundle size, number of standard bundles, and key bundle size will be printed on bundle tops for each advance section of the newspaper, as well as the insert mix and total draw. To print advance section detail, the Business Rule Do you run advance processing by section? , below, must be set to “yes”.
Yes
Bundle detail will be printed for advance sections.
No
Bundle detail will not be printed for advance sections.
20. Should draw adjustments print on the bundle top? BCP (Client) Draw adjustments may print on the bundle top (all draw adjustments that have not previously appeared on the bundle top will print).
Yes
If draw adjustments should print on bundle tops.
No
If draw adjustments should not print on bundle tops.
21. Should a reminder message print for holding vacation packs each day the subscriber is on vacation pack? BCP (Client) Subscribers may elect to keep their subscription active while on vacation. If they do, the carrier or District Manager holds their newspapers for them until they return. This setting controls whether messages should print on the bundle top each day reminding carriers which subscriptions should be held for vacation packs.
Yes
Reminder messages should print for vacation packs.
No
Vacation pack messages should only print on the first day.
22. When truck is a relay, should the supplying truck be included on the bundle top? BCP (Client) The supplying truck for a relay truck can be included on bundle tops and truck manifest, and the exports for those options, based on this in the next parameter.
Yes
The relay supplying truck will be included on bundle tops.
No
Only the relay truck will be included on bundle tops.
23. When truck is a relay, should the supplying truck be included on the truck manifest? BCP (Client)
Yes
The relay supplying truck will be included on the truck manifest.
No
Only the relay truck will be included on the truck manifest.
24. What is the print order for bundle tops? BCP (Client) Bundle tops are typically printed in ascending or descending truck departure order, and within each truck by ascending or descending drop order. Truck departure order is the order in which trucks leave the dock, and drop order is the order in which routes are dropped off from a truck. Bundle tops can also be sorted by edition or depot, but this is less common.
Ascending Truck
Bundle tops will sort in ascending truck departure order and, within each truck, in ascending drop order.
Depot Depart Drop
Bundle tops will sort in alphabetical depot order and, within each depot, in depot drop order.
Descending Drop
Bundle tops will sort in ascending truck departure order and, within each truck, in descending drop order.
Descending Truck
Bundle tops will sort in descending truck departure order and, within each truck, in descending drop order.
Edition Depart Drop
Bundle tops will sort by edition. Within each edition, they will sort in ascending truck departure and ascending drop order.
To illustrate the different sort orders, assume the departure sequence is truck A, then B, then 100, and the drop order within these trucks is:
A
10
240
Metro
30Mnd
100
20
270
Metro
20Slr
20
30
A36
Metro
20Slr
50
B
10
280
City
30Mnd
80
20
310
Metro
Extra
30
100
10
400
City
80Bst
150
20
430
City
20Slr
340
30
410
City
30Mnd
45
The order in which the bundle tops will be printed with each of the five possible settings is:
25. Should a minimum bundle size be used? BCP (Client) Bundles may contain a specified number of papers, but a minimum bundle size will be requested to accommodate “hand tied” bundles if you set this rule to “yes”.
Yes
If a minimum bundle size should be used.
No
If there is no minimum bundle size.
26. When printing bundle tops to different spool files by truck, should exception bundles be included in the truck file? BCP (Client) Based on this Business Rule, you can print the exception bundles at the end of each spool file when different spool files are created by truck.
Yes
Include exception bundles at the end of each spool file.
No
Do not include exception bundles in the truck file.
27. When bundle messages for a route exceed one page should the remaining messages appear at the end of the spool file? BCP (Client) This Rule allows newspapers to limit bundle tops to one page by separating any messages that would cause the bundle top to exceed one page and place them at the end of the spool file.
Yes
Limit bundle tops to one page.
No
Do not limit bundle tops to one page.
28. What type of bundle tops should be printed separately? BCP (Client) “Hand-tie” bundles are bundles where the total paper draw is less than the minimum. It may be necessary to print bundle tops for hand-tie bundles separately (after the standard and key bundle tops) if bundle tops are attached automatically to standard-size bundles, necessitating special handling of hand-tie bundles. “Special” bundles apply only with the InsertPlus module. Some bundles will not have inserts and require special handling in the mail room. It may be necessary to print bundle tops for special bundles separately (after the standard and key bundle tops).
Hand-tie
Hand-tie bundles should print separately.
Special
Special bundles should print separately.
Both
Both hand-tie and special bundles should print separately.
None
Neither hand-tie or special bundles should print separately.
29. Should an additional spool file be created for each route when bundle tops are processed? BCP (Client)
Yes
Individual bundle top files will be created for each route, as well as the full bundle top file. The file for each route will contain the same types of information that are included in the full file, and the product ID and route ID will be appended to the file name entered in View/Print.
No
Only the full bundle top file will be created.
30. Which document setup should be used when creating additional files by route for bundle tops? BCP (Client)
31. Which document setup should be used when creating additional files by route for route lists? BCP (Client) These two Business Rules identify the document setup to be used when creating individual route reports in addition to the standard report. The settings of these Business Rules identify the filename format and file path for these reports. Valid settings are those documents that have been set up in the “iServices Distribution” document area in Document setup.
32. Which document setup should be used when creating additional files by route for carrier mail export? BCP (Client) This setting identifies the document setup to be used when separating the carrier mail export into separate files by route so that they can be viewed on the Routes tab in iServices Distribution. This setting identifies the filename format and file path for these files. Valid settings are those documents that have been set up in the “iServices Distribution” document area in Document setup.
33. Which document setup should be used when creating additional files by route for route labels? BCP (Client) This setting identifies the document setup to be used when creating an additional route label file for each route. This setting identifies the filename format and file path for these files. Valid settings are those documents that have been set up in the “iServices Distribution” document area in Document setup.
34. Which document setup should be used when creating additional files by route for previous delivery labels? BCP (Client) This setting identifies the document setup to be used when creating an additional previous delivery label file for each route. This setting identifies the filename format and file path for these files. Valid settings are those documents that have been set up in the “iServices Distribution” document area in Document setup.
35. What is the “label” for “hand tie” bundles? BCP (Client) “Hand-tie” bundles are bundles where the total paper draw is less than the minimum bundle size. Such bundles are also called “illegal” bundles, rolls, etc. This option allows these bundles to be called by a user-defined name. This name prints on the bundle tops and truck manifest. The default is “Illegal”.
36. What is the default key bundle print option? BCP (Client) This determines the default setting of the Print Key Bundles Only? prompt in Publishing | Carrier/Dealer | Enter Bundle Info. This default print option may be changed when entering the bundle information.
Always
Bundle labels will be printed only for key bundles.
Never
Bundle labels will be printed for all bundles (key and standard).
Route
The key bundle option defined for each route in the truck sequence file should be used to determine whether a key bundle only or a bundle top for each bundle should be printed.
37. If all bundles are the standard size, should a key bundle be created? BCP (Client) If the key bundle has the same number of papers as the standard bundles, the key bundle can be counted as a standard, as governed by this setting. For example, say the standard bundle size is 30 and a route has a draw of 120. If this rule is set to “no”, the bundle tops will still record 3 bundles of 30 and 1 key of 30; if it is set to “yes”, however, the bundle tops will record 4 bundles of 30.
Yes
A key bundle top should be produced even if all bundles are the standard size.
No
Produce only standard bundle tops if all bundles are the standard size.
38. Should a message print on the bundle top when an office pay subscription goes into grace? BCP (Client) A message may be displayed on the bundle top when an office pay subscriber reaches their expiration date and goes into their grace period.
Yes
Print a message on the bundle top when a subscriber enters their grace period.
No
Do not print a message.
39. Should bundle tops always print on the same side of paper? BCP (Client) If bundle tops always print on the same side of the paper, the bundle tops can be easily burst in units containing an even number of pages. For example, some clients use a large paper cutter to cut the top perforation of the bundle tops—this results in every other page being a bundle top (see example). This does not conserve paper, however, if that is a concern.
Yes
If bundle tops should always print on the same side of the paper. If the messages require more than one page, a blank page will separate the bundle tops.
No
If bundle tops should print consecutively, regardless of the side of the paper on which they begin.
40. Should bundle top messages print on a separate page? BCP (Client) If bundle top messages print on the same page as the bundle top information, they will be exposed when bundles are dropped at the drop location. Confidential subscriber information, such as names, phone numbers, and vacation plans, is therefore available to any passer-by. If bundle messages begin printing on page two of the bundle top, this information will not be visible until the bundle is opened by the carrier.
Yes
If bundle top messages should begin on page two of the bundle top.
No
If bundle top messages should begin on page one of the bundle top.
41. Should the expire date print with the subscription transaction messages on the bundle top? BCP (Client) The expire date may be printed with other transaction information for office pay subscribers.
Yes
The expire date should print with subscription transaction messages.
No
The expire date should not print with subscription transaction messages.
42. Should messages print on the first key bundle top or the first standard bundle top? BCP (Client) Some newspapers print carrier messages on the first standard bundle top, while others have their carriers look on the key (odd) bundle top for messages.
Key
Messages should print on the key bundle top.
Standard
Messages should print on the first standard bundle top.
43. If a route requires additional advance sections, should a separate bundle top be printed for the advance section? BCP (Client) Advanced processing can be done for special sections of the paper that are delivered to carriers prior to the publishing date. The draw for advanced publishing is only an estimate, and when the actual draw is calculated on the publishing day the draw for any additional advance sections that need to be distributed to a given route will print on the bundle tops. This setting governs whether the additional draw for advanced sections (known as “updraw”) is printed on a separate bundle top.
Yes
Print additional advanced draw on a separate bundle top.
No
Print additional advanced draw with other bundle information.
If Yes:
44. Should the separate bundle tops for the advance sections be in a separate spool file? BCP (Client) If separate bundle tops are printed for advance section updraw, the advance section bundle tops can be printed along with the regular bundle tops or in a separate file, depending on how this rule is set.
Yes
Print advance section bundles to a separate file.
No
Advance section bundles should print with the regular bundle tops.
45. On combined publishing days, should one bundle top be produced for routes that deliver to both products? BCP (Client) If you have more than one publication, you may have some routes that deliver multiple pubs. In the case where two publications are combined on a publishing day, this setting determines whether one bundle top prints for multi-pub routes, or a separate bundle top for each publication delivered by the route. In order to print on a single bundle top, the route must be on the same truck and truck sequence for both publications, and have the same district and (if you have InsertPlus) the same inserts. See Specifics, Publication Combine for more information about combined publications. This rule not only affects bundle tops, but also route delivery lists, the truck manifest, and daily draw worksheets. If a single bundle top prints for the route, the route will also print as a single line on these reports.
Yes
A single bundle top should print for routes that deliver more than one of the publications in a combined publishing run.
No
Multiple bundle tops should print for routes that deliver more than one of the publications in a combined publishing run.
46. Should bundle tops include additional products? BCP (Client) Carriers may deliver Targeted Marketing products or other publications along with the regular newspaper. If so, it is useful to have the bundle tops list the other products that should be delivered on the bundle top. This setting determines whether bundle tops should list the other products being delivered with the newspaper. See Deliverable for more information.
Yes
TM products delivered with a publication should be listed on the publication’s bundle tops.
No
No TM products should be listed on bundle tops.
47. Should a draw comparison print on bundle tops? BCP (Client) Bundle tops can print a draw summary that compares the route’s draw in the current month to the draw in the same month last year. A “year to date” comparison between this year and last year is also included. The comparisons list the average draw, quantity change, and percent change.
Yes
A draw comparison should print on the bundle tops.
No
No draw comparison should print.
48. When printing route lists on bundle tops, should the subscriber billing method be included? BCP (Client) This Business Rule determines whether the subscriber’s billing method is included on the route delivery list that is printed on bundle tops.
Yes
The subscriber’s billing method will be included in the route list on bundle tops.
No
The subscriber’s billing method will not appear in the route list on bundle tops.
49. Should bundles for relay trucks be printed at the drop point for the relay truck? BCP (Client) A relay truck is one which receives bundles from another truck. Bundle tops print in drop order, so bundle tops for a relay truck might print in between other drops on a truck. Or, all relay truck bundle tops can print after the other bundles on the truck. For example, say truck A drops route 09, route 10, relay truck B, and route 11, and relay truck B in turn drops routes 40 and 50. This setting would govern whether bundle tops for routes 40 and 50 printed between routes 10 and 11, or after route 11.
Yes
Bundle tops for relay trucks should print between other drops on the truck, in drop point order.
No
Bundle tops for relay trucks should print after the other drops on the truck.
50. When an account has multiple routes at the same drop point should they be combined on the bundle, manifest and stacker? BCP (Client) This setting allows you to combine draw quantities on bundle tops, truck manifest and the stacker interface when a single distribution drop point contains multiple routes for the same product, carrier, edition, and insert mix.
Yes
Routes should be combined on bundle tops, truck manifests, and the stacker interface.
No
Routes should not be combined.
51. What bundle information should display on the bundle tops in large print? BCP (Client) Bundle tops contain some information, such as the total draw for the route, in large print. This setting determines whether the standard bundle size or the number of standard bundle tops to be dropped at the route displays in large print. If the bundle size or number of standards does not display in large print, it will still appear on the bundle tops, but in normal print.
Bundle Size
The standard bundle size should display in large print.
Number of Standards
The number of standard bundles should display in large print.
52. Should a truck banner label print before each truck on the bundle tops? BCP (Client) A banner page may print for each truck, before the truck’s route bundle tops, based on this setting. The page will contain the word “TRUCK” and the truck ID in large print. Each truck in the truck sequence will receive a banner. The exception is relay trucks—if bundle tops for relay trucks are printed at the drop point of the relay truck (as determined by the above rule), no truck banner will print.
Yes
A banner should print for each truck before the bundle tops.
No
No truck banners should print.
53. Should the truck display on the bundle top in large print? BCP (Client) As mentioned in the previous rule, bundle tops can display some information in large print. This setting determines whether the truck that drops the bundle tops at the route should display in large or regular print.
Yes
The truck should display on the bundle top in large print.
No
The truck should display on the bundle top in regular print only.
54. What is the print order for the truck manifest? BCP (Client) The truck manifest may be printed in either ascending or descending truck departure order.
Ascending Truck
If the truck manifest should print in ascending truck departure order.
Descending Truck
If the truck manifest should print in descending truck departure order.
For example, assume the truck departure order is:
A
10
B
20
100
30
16
40
If Ascending Truck is selected the truck manifest will be printed in order of A, B, 100, 16. If Descending Truck is selected, the manifest will be printed in order of 16, 100, B, A.
55. Should the edition print on the truck manifest? BCP (Client) This defines whether or not the edition should print on the truck manifest.
Yes
Print the edition on the truck manifest. It will appear under the route.
No
Do not print the edition on the truck manifest.
56. Should the truck manifest include additional products? BCP (Client) Targeted Marketing products may be dropped at the same time as the newspaper. In this case, it would be helpful to include the TM draw on the manifest as well as the newspaper. See Deliverable for more information.
Yes
Print the TM product on the newspaper truck manifest.
No
TM products should not print on the newspaper truck manifest.
57. Should a column to record returns print on the truck manifest? BCP (Client) This defines whether or not a blank column should be allowed on the truck manifest to record the number of returns picked up by the truck driver.
Yes
A column should be allowed for recording returns on the truck manifest.
No
A column should not be allowed for recording returns on the truck manifest.
58. Should the standard bundle size print as a message on the truck manifest when bundle sizes are defined at truck level? BCP (Client) This setting defines whether the standard bundle size will appear as a message on the Truck Manifest when the bundle size option is set to “truck”.
Yes
The standard bundle size will be printed on the Truck Manifest when bundle size is defined as “truck”.
No
No bundle size message will be printed.
59. When a truck’s relays have bulked draw and bundle sizes match, should bundle count and key size be recalculated? BCP (Client) If a relay parent has children trucks that bulk draw, the relay parent can include the actual draw or the bulked draw for the child truck when calculating the parent’s total draw, based on this parameter. If the actual draw is included, the draw is recalculated when totalling the parent truck’s draw.
Yes
The draw is recalculated when determining the total draw for the parent truck, using the actual draw of the children trucks.
No
The draw is not recalculated, and the totals on the parent truck will match the relay’s truck totals.
60. What “label” should print for advanced sections? BCP (Client) During the publishing run, any additional draw needed for sections distributed in advance will print on the Truck Manifest and Press Room Report. This setting determines the label this advanced draw will print under. The default is “ADVANCE”.
61. On the Truck Manifest and Press Report, should only advance section up-draws print? BCP (Client) If you distribute advanced sections, the advance draw will often be different from the actual draw of the publishing run. If the advance draw for a route is less than the actual draw, this will print on the Truck Manifest and Press Room Report, so that extra advanced sections can be distributed. This setting determines if advanced draw also prints in the case where the advanced draw is greater than the actual draw. This may be useful, for example, if your drivers collect advanced sections from routes that have extra draw and redistribute them to routes that need more sections.
Yes
Only routes that need more advanced sections should print.
No
Routes with extra advanced sections should print.
62. Should route service draw be reported separately on the press room report? BCP (Client) This setting allows the service draw portion of home-delivery route draw to be reported as a separate category within each route type.
Yes
Service draw should be reported as a separate category on the Press Room Report.
No
Service draw should not be broken out separately on the Press Room Report.
63. What is the format for chute? BCP (Client) This setting indicates that chute IDs are either Numeric (the default) or Alphanumeric.
64. What is the maximum length for chute? BCP (Client) This setting determines the maximum length of chute IDs (the default is 2).
65. What is the default counter/stacker equipment? BCP (Client) Circulation can export draw information to a file, which can then be imported into a counter/stacker machine. Indicate here the brand of counter/stacker you use, or enter “NONE” if you will not export information to your counter/stacker. If using “File Map,” file mapping will determine the stacker format. Ferag
File Map
HALL
iDab
KANSA
Muller Martini
NONE
QUIP
QUIPP2
WinLincs Note:
All of the stacker interfaces require a separate license fee to use. Contact the Naviga Support Center for more information.
66. Which day is considered the first day when determining the value for day of week number in the stacker interface? BCP (Client) This setting allows sites to set a day other than Sunday as the first day of the week. The default value is Sunday.
67. If using the Ferag stacker and File Map, should illegal bundles be separated? BCP (Client) When using a stacker interface file map for Ferag, the key bundle can appear first on its own line, followed by the standard/bulk lines.
Yes
Key and standard bundles should be exported separately to Ferag.
No
Key and standard bundles should not be exported separately to Ferag.
68. When using the WinLincs format for the Stacker Interface, should illegal bundles be combined? BCP (Client) When using the WinLincs format, illegal bundles can be combined into one entry or listed on separate lines, based on this Rule.
Yes
Combine illegal bundles into one entry.
No
List illegal bundles on separate lines.
69. In what order should the route labels print? BCP (Client) The route labels may print in delivery sequence or subscription ID order within a truck and route. If the route assigned to the subscription is an override route (not assigned to the address), then the delivery sequence order may not be used.
Delivery sequence
Print route labels in truck, newspaper route, newspaper delivery (walk) sequence order.
Subscription
Print route labels in truck, newspaper route, subscription ID order.
70. What is the distribution class used for mixed delivery routes? BCP (Client) You may have some routes that are mixed mail/carrier delivery. For example, a route at the edge of your market area might be mail Monday through Saturday, but carrier delivered on Sunday, when the mail isn’t delivered. You identify a route as a mixed delivery route by assigning it to the mixed distribution class. You identify the mixed distribution class here.
71. Which master table should be used to determine the label group for subscriptions both mail and route delivered? BCP (Client) Subscribers on a mixed delivery route will be mail delivered at least one day a week. The label group can be determined based on the Zip code (the normal method for mail subscribers) or by delivery schedule. Indicate which method to use for assigning the mail label group.
ZipLabelGroup
Use the subscriber’s Zip code to assign the label group.
DeliveryScheduleDays
Use the subscriber’s delivery schedule to assign the label group.
72. For how many days into the future should pending draw be automatically updated by End Publishing Run? BCP (Client) The pending draw for a publishing date is the estimated draw, taking both processed and unprocessed transactions into consideration. This is generally the most reliable way to estimate draw, but the calculations take extra time because the system is “peeking” at unprocessed transactions. Pending draw can be calculated manually (in Update Pending Draw) or automatically, when you run End Publ Run. If you would like pending draw to be updated automatically by End Publ Run, enter the number of days into the future for which pending draw should be calculated. If you do not want pending draw updated automatically, leave the setting defaulted to “0”.
73. Which single copy demographic identifies the home delivery route used to deliver NIE papers? BCP (Client) If a setting is entered for this rule (i.e., it is not blank), an NIE export file will be produced during each end publ run that contains the product, account, route, run date, and draw total. The file will be saved in /dti/exchange and will be named nieroutes<productID>.d. This file can then be imported into an external NIE application for billing. This rule can be set to any single copy demographic question that has been set up.
74. Which subscription demographic identifies the postal routing code? BCP (Client) An optional 3-character postal routing code can be used with the Wamac Inkjet file map after the city ID. This Business Rule identifies the demographic that contains this routing code. The full code, including the postal routing code, is: [6-character Zip]{space}{space}[11-character city]{space}[3-character routing code].
75. Is the rack draw managed at the outlet level within Bellatrix, but at a “group” route level within DTI? BCP (Client) Note:
The Bellatrix interface requires a separate license fee to use. Contact the Naviga Support Center for more information.
Bellatrix is an automated newspaper rack system. If you interface information to Bellatrix, this setting determines whether racks are set up at the “group” level in Circulation, as opposed to the “outlet” level (individual racks). In the Bellatrix import file, groups must be placed in the Route Number field, whereas outlets must be in the Outlet field. If the Rack/Dealer field is set to “1” (indicating a rack), Circulation will look at this setting to determine whether it should try to match the group or outlet with a Circulation route when interfacing draw, returns, and draw adjustments. Note that you can have multiple records for the same group in the import file—Circulation will keep a running tally for the group. Also note that groups in Bellatrix can be no more than three digits—this means that the corresponding routes in Circulation must be no more than 3 characters, if you keep information at a group level.
Yes
Rack information will be kept at the Bellatrix group level in Circulation.
No
Rack information will be kept at the Bellatrix outlet level in Circulation.
76. What is the insert mix size required by the inserting equipment? B (Client) If your newspaper uses InsertPlus, and your inserter has a minimum number of papers that must have one edition and insert combination in succession, enter that number here. For example, the inserter might have a minimum limit of 75 papers—if there are fewer than 75 papers before either the edition or the insert combination change, the papers will require special inserting. For example, with a minimum of 75, and the routes in the drop order shown below, routes 07, 27, and 15 would require special inserting.
8
Metro
08-25-0003
54
2
Metro
08-25-0003
46
7
Metro
08-25-0001
59
27
Metro
08-25-0001
12
11
City
08-25-0002
87
15
Metro
08-25-0002
61
3
Metro
08-25-0001
121
77. What is the label for insert mixes that fall below the minimum required by the inserting equipment? B (Client) As mentioned in the previous rule, bundle tops for routes that have insert combinations that are below the minimum required by the inserter machine will print separately. A message will also appear for these routes on the truck manifest. For this rule, indicate the label that should be used in both cases—for example, “Insert Exception”.
78. Which days need initial subscriber messages repeated? BCP (Client) Because different carriers may deliver a single route, you may need to have messages repeated on bundle tops on certain days of the week. For example, a route may have a weekday carrier and a weekend carrier. Therefore, messages for all of the subscriber transactions that have taken place on the route in the past week should appear on the Saturday bundle tops, so that the weekend carrier will know which subscribers have started and stopped. The messages will be repeats of the initial message (they will not be labeled as reminder messages). This setting determines the days of the week that subscription transaction messages are repeated on bundle tops. Unlike most Business Rules, more than one setting (day) an be chosen (multi-select).
79. When should subscription reminder messages print? BCP (Client) “Reminder” messages can print on bundle tops for a given number of days after the transaction date. For example, you could have start messages appear on the start date, and on two subsequent days (see Tran Type Publication for more information). This setting determines whether the reminder days should be the subsequent publishing days, subsequent delivery days for the subscriber (determined by the delivery schedule) or the same day in subsequent weeks. To illustrate the three possible settings, let’s use the example of the Trib, which publishes seven days a week. Mr. Jones, a Mon-Fri subscriber, restarts on Friday the 5th. We have set up restarts to generate two reminder messages. The initial message will appear on Friday the 5th; the following table describes when the two reminder messages will be printed, depending on how this rule is set.
Next Delivery Day
Monday the 8th, Tuesday the 9th
Next Publishing Day
Saturday the 6th, Sunday the 7th
Next Weekday
Friday the 12th, Friday the 19th
Next Delivery Day
Reminder messages will print on bundle tops on the next delivery day, based on the subscriber’s delivery schedule.
Next Publishing Day
Reminder messages will print on bundle tops on the next publishing day.
Next Weekday
Reminder messages will print on bundle tops on the same day of the week as the initial messages.
80. Which day’s complaints should print on the same weekday? BCP (Client) Complaints are different from other subscriber transactions in that they do not initially print on bundle tops on the transaction date (the bundle tops will already be printed for that date). Instead, they print on the next publishing day or (depending on how you set this rule) the same day as the transaction date in the following week. For example, if you set up Sunday’s complaints to print on the same weekday, a complaint entered for Sunday the 6th would print on the route’s bundle tops on Sunday the 13th. If no days should have their complaints printed on the same weekday, leave this setting blank.
81. Should a message recap print on bundle tops? BCP (Client) Start, stop, and other subscriber transactions that occur on a route can be printed as messages on the route’s bundle top. A recap of the day’s transactions can also print at the bottom of the bundle top, if this rule is set to “yes”.
Yes
A recap of the day’s transactions should print on a route’s bundle tops.
No
No recap should print on the bundle tops.
82. Which date should previous paper deliveries be based on? BCP (Client) Your newspaper may offer new subscribers or restarts a free paper from a day earlier in the week. For example, if a subscription starts Wednesday, you can offer the subscriber the previous Sunday’s paper. This previous paper can be delivered on the start date of the subscription, or the entry date (if final transaction processing is completed for the entry date, it will be delivered on the next publishing date). This setting determines whether the previous paper is delivered on the start date or the entry date.
So, with the above example where the subscription starts on Wednesday, let’s say the new start is entered on Monday (after final transaction processing has been completed). The Sunday paper could be delivered separately on Tuesday (entry date option), or with the daily paper on Wednesday (start date option). If you do not offer delivery of previous papers to new starts or restarts, it does not matter how you set this rule.
Entry Date of Start
The previous paper should be delivered on the entry date of the new start or restart (or, if final transaction processing has been run, the next publishing day).
Start/Entry Date
The previous paper should be delivered on the start date of the new start or restart. If this date does not work, the system will use the entry date of the new start or restart.
Start Date
The previous paper should be delivered on the start date of the new start or restart.
83. Should the subscriber’s name and address print for each message on bundle tops? BCP (Client) This setting determines whether the subscriber’s name and address print on bundle tops with each message if there are multiple messages of the same transaction type. For example, if a subscriber had three complaints, this setting determines whether the subscriber’s name and address are printed with each complaint.
Yes
The subscriber’s name and address should print with each message.
No
The subscriber’s name and address should only print with the first message if there are multiple messages for the same transaction type.
84. Should route messages be deleted if there is no net effect to the carrier? BCP (Client) This setting determines whether messages should be retained (for printing on bundle tops, truck manifests, etc.) if there is no change for that subscriber. For example, if a Sunday-only subscriber stops on Tuesday and then, on Friday, decides to start again, there is no net change for Sunday, and printing the start and stop messages will just confuse the carrier. If this rule is set to “yes”, neither message would print on the bundle top.
Yes
Delete messages if there is no net affect to the route’s draw.
No
Do not delete messages, even if there is no net affect.
85. Can advance publishing runs be started while transaction processing is being run? BCP (Client) An advance publishing run may be started while Transaction Processing is being run for the publication. If this happens, the actual draw figures may be changing while the advance draw figures are being calculated, resulting in less accurate advance draw. Based on your publishing processes and how accurate you need the advance draw, you may or may not want to allow this.
Yes
Circulation will allow advance runs to be started while Transaction Processing is being run for the same publication.
No
Advance runs cannot be started if Transaction Processing is being run for the same publication.
86. How many days prior to and including a bonus day delivery should messages be automatically created for a carrier? BCP (Client) “Bonus days” are days on which the subscriber receives the paper even though it is not a normal delivery day. For example, as part of their subscription, a weekend-only subscriber might get the paper on New Years, even though New Years is on a Monday. Bonus day messages may or may not print on bundle tops, depending on whether the reason code for the BonusDay transaction has Print On Bundle set to “y”. However, the bonus day message will print, regardless of the reason code, if the BonusDay transaction was created within a certain number of days of the bonus date, as defined here. So, for example, if the reason code is set not to print on a bundle top, but this rule is set to 5 and a subscriber starts 4 days before a bonus date, a bonus day message will print on the bundle top for that subscriber on the bonus date. The default is zero.
87. What is the threshold for creating future start messages? BCP (Client) When a route has a large number of new starts in the future, it may be helpful to print the pending starts on bundle tops so that the carrier can be prepared for the increased activity. Circulation has the ability to list new subscribers that will start on the next publishing day on bundle tops, if the number of starts equals or exceeds the number entered here. For example, if this is set to 5, and a route has 7 new starts on the next publishing day, the 7 new subscribers would have future start messages print on the bundle top. However, if the route only had 4 new starts on the next publishing day, there would be no future start messages. If all starts for the next publishing day should print on your bundle tops, set this rule to 1; if the next day’s starts should never print, set the rule to zero (the default).
88. Do you round draw for advance sections? BCP (Client) To make it easier for distribution personnel to handle advance sections, some newspapers use only standard bundles for bulked routes; key bundles are either rounded up to become an additional standard, or rounded down (dropped from the run). This rule determines whether advance draw for bulked routes may be rounded. If you set it to “yes”, a rounding model will need to be specified when entering bundle information for an advance run.
Yes
Advance draw for bulk routes may be rounded.
No
No rounding will occur.
89. Do you run advance processing by section? BCP (Client) Advance publishing runs can be opened for each section, or one run may be active for all sections. If each section publishes independently, advance draw will be kept at the section level. Otherwise, the advance draw will be the same for all sections. If you want only one advance publishing run per day and product, and would like all sections to have the same draw, enter “no” here. On the other hand, if you would like each section to have its own advance draw and separate advance run, enter “yes”.
Yes
Each section should have its own advance run.
No
One advance run will include all sections.
90. Should advance draw by section detail print on the truck manifest instead of updraw for the main publishing run? BCP (Client) If you set this rule to “yes”, draw by section information will appear on the truck manifest. A paper section recap at the drop and truck levels will also be added to the truck manifest.
Yes
Advance draw section detail will appear on the truck manifest.
No
Advance draw section detail will not appear.
91. When combining routes at a drop level, must the summary route on the manifest have draw or a driver alert? BCP (Client) This setting determines whether a route with zero draw prints on the truck manifest, if a carrier’s routes are combined at the drop level and it is the first route. Note that if the first route has a driver alert (that the route no longer has draw), the first route will still display on the manifest regardless of the Business Rule.
Yes
If the first route has no draw for the date, that route will not display on the manifest. Instead, the first route that does have draw will display.
No
The first route for the drop will always print on the manifest, even if it has no draw for the date.
92. Should the advance section detail reprint on the publishing manifest if it was combined with a final on an earlier date? BCP (Client) If advance section detail prints on the regular truck manifest for an earlier date (based on the Combine with Final On field in Advance Enter Bundle Info), the detail can also print on the regular manifest for the actual publishing day, based on this parameter. For example, if a Sunday advance run section was distributed on Friday and detail for the Sunday section printed on the Friday regular manifest, the advance section detail would print again on the Sunday regular manifest if this Business Rule is set to “yes”.
Yes
Advance detail should appear on the final manifest for the publishing date, even when combined with the final manifest on an earlier date.
No
Advance detail should not appear on the final manifest for the publishing date, if combined with the final manifest on an earlier date.
93. When combining routes at a drop level, should a recap of the routes display for the drop on the Truck Manifest? BCP (Client) If you set this rule to “yes”, a recap will appear on the truck manifest that displays routes at the drop level when routes are combined. The draw amount and bundle sizes will be displayed for each route.
Yes
A route recap will appear on the truck manifest.
No
A route recap will not appear.
94. How many days do you want to retain delivery deadline override records? BCP (Client) Enter the number of days you want to retain delivery deadline override records. The default is 999 days.
95. What is the ‘label’ for depots? BC (Client) Depots are warehouses where newspapers for a large number of routes are dropped off and arranged. Carriers then come to the depot and pick up the papers for their routes. As different newspapers have different names for depots (“distribution center”, “warehouse”, etc.), you can define the name to use for depots here. This name will appear on invoices and bundle tops if they are sorted by depot. The default is “Depot”.
96. Should weight information print on the truck manifest? BCP (Client) The setting controls whether weights are shown on the truck manifest.
Yes
The truck manifest will display, for each drop, the weight of the standard bundle, each product/route combination and the total weight for the drop. At the end of the truck details, the total weight for the truck will also be shown.
No
Weights will not appear on the truck manifest.
97. Should the route name print on the truck manifest? BCP (Client) You may want the route name to be printed below the account name on the truck manifest, as shown below.
Yes
The route name should appear below the account name on the truck manifest.
No
The account telephone number will be displayed instead of the route name.
98. Should the truck manifest create an export file? BCP (Client) The truck manifest is one of the central documents in the publishing run. To allow greater flexibility, the data for this report can be exported to an ASCII file. This setting indicates whether the data will be exported.
Yes
Truck manifest data should be exported to an ASCII file as part of the report generation process.
No
No export should take place.
99. Should the format of the truck manifest export file name be manifest<ProductID><EditionID><DayNumber><ProcessID>
? BCP (Client)
This rule gives you the option to create manifest export files by publication and/or edition. If you enter “yes”, separate export files will be created with the file name of “manifest<product/publication><edition><day number of publish date><processid>
”. If you enter “no”, only one export file will be created. Note that the EditionID will be included in the export file name only if the publication is publishing by edition.
Yes
Separate export files will be created with the file name of “manifest<product/publication><edition><day number of publish date><processid>
”
No
Only one export file will be created.
100. What format should be used for the truck manifest export? BCP (Client) This setting determines the format to use when an export file is created for the truck manifest. “Standard” is the normal format. “Syncronex” includes only the R1 and R3 records in the export file. R1 records are for a route’s regular draw, and R3 records are for a route’s TM draw. R3 records will be included only if TM draw exists for the route.
Standard
The truck manifest export will use the standard DTI format.
Syncronex
The truck manifest export will use the Syncronex format.
101. Should the rate for single copy routes be appended to the manifest export when using the Syncronex format? BCP (Client) If you use Syncronex, set this Business Rule to “yes” if you want export the single copy rate amounts during each publishing run. These rates will be used with hand-held devices when rating returns applied against the invoice amount due.
Yes
Export the single copy rate amounts during each publishing run.
No
Do not include single copy rate amounts.
102. When routes are combined at a drop level, should routes be exported individually in the manifest export file? BCP (Client) If the Business Rule When an account has multiple routes at the same drop point, should they be combined on the bundle, manifest and stacker? is set to “Yes,” you can still export the individual route detail rather than the combined drop information in the R1 records of the truck manifest export.
Yes
The truck manifest should export individual routes to the R1 record.
No
The combined drop should be exported to the R1 record.
103. Should the delivery instructions always print on the District Manager report? BCP (Client) This setting enables delivery instructions (i.e., requests) from the occupant record to be printed on the DM report.
Yes
Delivery instructions should always print on the District Manager report.
No
Delivery instructions should not appear on the District Manager report.
104. Should an export file also be created for route messages and complaints when running the District Manager report? BCP (Client) The starts, stops, complaints and other messages appearing on the DM Report may be exported to an ASCII file, as governed by this setting.
Yes
Export DM Report information to an ASCII file.
No
No export should take place.
105. Should the complete complaint text be exported in a separate field in the District Manager Report export? BCP (Client)
Yes
The full complaint text should be exported in a separate field.
No
Complaint text should not be exported separately.
106. If rounding draw at a truck level, should the draw for relay trucks be included in the round draw calculation? BCP (Client) If advance draw is rounded, this setting determines whether parent trucks that drop to children trucks should include the draw for the children trucks in the rounding calculation.
Yes
The draw for relays a truck drops to should be included in the round draw calculation.
No
Only the draw for routes actually dropped by the truck should be included in the round draw calculation.
107. Which single copy draw classification should be exported to the stacker separately when exporting Muller Martini or Ferag? BCP (Client) This setting determines the single copy draw type that should be used when exporting the box-out quantity to Muller Martini or Ferag. Single copy draw classes must be set up previously. The default is “NONE”.
108. Should bundle tops print for illegal bundles? BCP (Client) This setting determines if bundle tops should be printed for illegal bundles.
Yes
Bundle tops will be printed for illegal bundles.
No
Bundle tops will not be printed for illegal bundles.
109. Should the bundle top process create an export file? BCP (Client) This setting identifies whether an export file should be generated when bundle tops are produced. The export file is in addition to the usual print file, and it uses the file map identified in the next setting.
Yes
An export file should be generated when running bundle tops.
No
Only the bundle top report should be generated when running bundle tops.
110. Which file map should be used to create the bundle top export? BCP (Client) If you are creating an export file when bundle tops are produced, enter the name of the file map to use.
111. Should the route label process create an export file? BCP (Client) This setting identifies whether an export file should be generated when route labels are produced. The export file is in addition to the usual print file, and it uses the file map identified in the next setting.
Yes
An export file should be generated when producing route labels.
No
Only the labels should be generated when running route labels.
112. Which file map should be used to create the route label export? BCP (Client) If you are creating an export file when route labels are produced, enter the name of the file map to use.
113. Should the previous delivery label process create an export file? BCP (Client) This setting identifies whether an export file should be generated when previous delivery labels are produced. The export file is in addition to the usual print file, and it uses the file map identified in the next setting.
Yes
An export file should be generated when producing previous delivery labels.
No
Only the labels should be generated when running previous delivery labels.
114. Which file map should be used to create the previous delivery label export? BCP (Client) If you are creating an export file when previous delivery labels are produced, enter the name of the file map to use.
115. When printing bundle tops for each bundle, should the truck bulk key bundle print after the truck's standard bundles? Default Value: Yes This setting determines whether the Bundle Tops create a single bulk key label with the key total for the bulked truck and specifies all routes on the bulked truck.